etoc (11mar15)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@36485 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

2 files changed, 11997 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/etoc/etoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/etoc/etoc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..12bb38b9730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/etoc/etoc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,11920 @@
+% -*- coding: utf-8; -*-
+%<*none>
+{\def\doctimestamp {Time-stamp: <10-03-2015 22:45:02 CET>}% 
+ \def\getdtxtimestamp #1 <#2 #3 #4>{#2 at #3 #4}%
+ \xdef\etocdtxtimestamp {\expandafter\getdtxtimestamp\doctimestamp }}%
+%</none>
+%<*!readme>
+%%
+%% Package: etoc
+%% Version: 1.08 (2015/03/10)
+%% License: LPPL 1.3c or later (see etoc.dtx)
+%% Copyright (C) 2012-2015 Jean-Francois Burnol <jfbu at free dot fr>
+%% Copyright (C) 2014-2015 Christine Roemer <Christine_Roemer at t-online dot de>
+%%    and collaborators for the translation into German of the documentation
+%%
+%</!readme>
+%<*insfile>
+\def\etocpkgdate        {2015/03/10} 
+\def\etocdocdate        {2015/03/10}
+\def\etocpkgversion     {v1.08}
+\def\etocpkgdescription {Completely customisable TOCs (jfB)}
+%</insfile>
+%<*none>
+% Now the date and version which are specific to the German translation.
+% Replace \let by suitable \def's in case this lags behing English version.
+\let\etocDEpkgdate   \etocpkgdate    %
+\let\etocDEdocdate   \etocdocdate    %
+\let\etocDEpkgversion\etocpkgversion %
+% Definition of \etocLicense
+% --------------------------
+\begingroup
+    \long\def\firstofone #1{#1}\catcode1=14\catcode2=0
+    \catcode`\%=12\catcode`\_=12\endlinechar13\catcode13=13 ^^A
+    \catcode32=13\catcode`\\=12^^Brelax^^A
+^^Bfirstofone{^^Bendgroup^^Bdef^^BetocLicense^^A
+{% Package: etoc
+% Version: 1.08 (2015/03/10)
+% License: LPPL 1.3c or later
+% Copyright (C) 2012-2015 Jean-Francois Burnol <jfbu at free dot fr>
+% Copyright (C) 2014-2015 Christine Roemer <Christine_Roemer at t-online dot de>
+%    and collaborators for the translation into German of the documentation
+%
+%     This Work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%     conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%     version 1.3c of this license or (at your option) any later
+%     version. This version of this license is in 
+%          http://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c.txt
+%     and the latest version of this license is in
+%          http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%     and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+%     LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. 
+%
+% The Authors of this Work are:
+% Jean-Francois Burnol <jfbu at free dot fr> for the source code and
+%     English documentation, and
+% Christine Roemer <Christine_Roemer at t-online dot de> and collaborators
+%     for the translation into German of the documentation.
+% 
+% This Work consists of the main source file etoc.dtx and the derived
+% files etoc.sty, etoc.ins, etoc.tex, etoc-DE.tex, etoc.pdf, etoc-DE.pdf, 
+% etoc.dvi, etoc-DE.dvi, README.md.
+%
+% Running tex or etex on etoc.dtx extracts etoc.sty, etoc.ins, etoc.etex,
+% etoc-DE.tex, and README.md. See README.md for further instructions.
+% 
+% It is also possible to typeset etoc.dtx directly via latex or pdflatex.
+}}%
+\iffalse
+%</none>
+%<readme>% README
+%<readme>% etoc 1.08
+%<readme>% 2015/03/10
+%<*readme>
+
+    Source:  etoc.dtx (v1.08 2015/03/10)
+    Author:  Jean-Francois Burnol
+    Author for German tranlation: Christine Roemer
+    Info:    Completely customisable TOCs
+    License: LPPL 1.3c or later
+
+Copyright (C) 2012-2015 Jean-Francois Burnol <jfbu at free dot fr>
+
+Copyright (C) 2014-2015 Christine Roemer <Christine_Roemer at t-online dot de>
+    and collaborators for the translation into German of the documentation.
+
+
+ABSTRACT
+========
+
+>
+  The etoc package gives to the user complete control on how
+  the entries of the table of contents should be constituted
+  from the *name*, *number*, and *page number* of each
+  sectioning unit. This goes via the definition of *line
+  styles* for each sectioning level used in the document. The
+  package provides its own custom line styles. Simpler ones
+  are given as examples in the documentation. The simplest
+  usage will be to take advantage of the layout facilities of
+  packages dealing with list environments.
+>
+  Regarding the *global toc display*, etoc provides
+  pre-defined styles based on a multi-column format, with,
+  optionally, a ruled title or framed contents.
+>
+  The `\tableofcontents` command may be used arbitrarily many
+  times and it has a variant `\localtableofcontents` which
+  prints tables of contents 'local' to the current surrounding
+  document unit. An extension of the `\label/\ref` syntax allows
+  to reproduce (with another layout) a local table of contents
+  defined somewhere else in the document.
+>
+  Via ''depth tags'', one gets an even finer control for each
+  table of contents of which sectioning units it should, or
+  not, display.
+>
+  The formatting inherited (and possibly customized by other
+  packages) from the document class will be used when in
+  compatibility mode.
+>
+  The assignment of levels to the sectioning units can be
+  changed at any time, and etoc can thus be used in a quite
+  general manner to create custom ''lists of'', additionally
+  to the tables of contents related to the document sectioning
+  units. No auxiliary file is used additionally to the
+  standard .toc file.
+
+
+INSTALLATION
+============
+
+The simplest is to download
+
+>  <http://mirrors.ctan.org/install/macros/latex/contrib/etoc.tds.zip>
+
+and then run `unzip etoc.tds.zip -d <DEST>` where `<DEST>` is a 
+TDS-compliant repertory.
+
+Else, to extract the package (.sty) and driver (.tex) files from etoc.dtx:
+
+  - if etoc.ins is present:   etex etoc.ins (or tex etoc.ins)
+  - without etoc.ins:         etex etoc.dtx (or tex etoc.dtx)
+
+It is also possible to run latex or pdflatex directly on etoc.dtx.
+
+At least three ways to produce etoc.pdf (method (3) is preferred):
+
+(1) latex etoc.dtx (three times), then dvips, then ps2pdf
+
+(2) pdflatex etoc.dtx (three times)
+
+(3) latex etoc.tex (three times), then dvipdfmx
+
+Method (3) produces the smallest pdf files.
+Options can be set in etoc.tex:
+  - scrdoc class options (paper size, font size, ...) 
+  - with or without source code, 
+  - with dvipdfmx or with latex+dvips or pdflatex. 
+
+To produce etoc-DE.pdf (German documentation) run tex on etoc.ins
+or etoc.dtx to produce etoc-DE.tex, then compile etoc-DE.tex with
+latex (thrice) then dvipdmx, or set first to 0 \Withdvipdfmx in
+etoc-DE.tex to allow compilation with pdflatex.
+
+Um etoc-DE.pdf zu erzeugen ist latex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen
+zu lassen, dann dvipdfmx mit etoc-DE.dvi. Im Falle von Problemen
+mit dvipdfmx ist \Withdvidpdfmx auf 0 in etoc-DE.tex zu setzen,
+dann ist pdflatex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen zu lassen.
+
+Installation: 
+
+    etoc.sty    -> TDS:tex/latex/etoc/etoc.sty
+    etoc.dtx    -> TDS:source/latex/etoc/etoc.dtx
+    etoc.pdf    -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/etoc.pdf
+    etoc-DE.pdf -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/etoc-DE.pdf
+    README.md   -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/README.md
+
+The other files may be discarded.
+
+LICENSE
+=======
+
+>
+    This Work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+    conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+    version 1.3c of this license or (at your option) any later
+    version. This version of this license is in
+<http://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c.txt>
+>
+    and the latest version of this license is in
+<http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt>
+>
+    and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+    LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. 
+
+The Authors of this Work are:
+
+- Jean-Francois Burnol <jfbu at free dot fr> for the source code and
+     English documentation, and
+- Christine Roemer <Christine_Roemer at t-online dot de> and collaborators
+     for the translation into German of the documentation.
+
+>
+    This Work consists of the main source file etoc.dtx and the
+    derived files etoc.sty, etoc.ins, etoc.tex, etoc-DE.tex,
+    etoc.pdf, etoc-DE.pdf, etoc.dvi, etoc-DE.dvi.
+
+RECENT CHANGES
+==============
+
+v1.08 [2015/03/10]
+
+>  `\etocskipfirstprefix` may now appear anywhere in the <start>
+   part of a level style. 
+
+>  New commands `\etociffirst`, `\etocxiffirst`, `\etocxifnumbered`.
+
+>  It is now possible to issue line style specifications directly
+   with `&` and `\\` tokens, in order to typeset a TOC as a tabular
+   or longtable with the opening for example in the first
+   argument of `\etocsettocstyle` and the closing in its second
+   argument.
+
+>  It is mandatory for such uses to issue `\etocglobaldefs` which
+   tells etoc to proceed globally for certain definitions. This
+   is also useful in the context of the inline environments of
+   package enumitem.
+
+>  On this occasion, various old parts of the code have been
+   improved.
+
+v1.07n [2015/03/05]
+
+>  No more use of `\toks@` when etoc constructs `\etocthelinkedname` etc...
+   Thus `\toks@` can be put in the line styles in order to accumulate
+   information. Only useful if it is certain nothing else will change
+   `\toks@` either.
+
+>  In the documentation: list of main commands now in alphabetic order.
+
+v1.07m [2015/01/23]
+
+>  Reading of .toc file is delayed to `\begin{document}` to account for
+   possible Babel active characters used therein. Thanks to Denis
+   Bitouzé who reported a Babel related problem.
+
+>  Improved global toc display emulation under KOMA-script classes.
+
+>  New command `\etocbeforetitlehook`. New command `\etocdisplay`.
+
+v1.07l [doc of 2014/04/29]
+
+>  Added to the documentation an example of use of `\etocthelinkedname`
+   together with an enumitem inline itemize\* environment; moved main TOC
+   to immediately after the title, and license to the first pages.
+
+>  Incorporation of the translation into German done on the initiative
+   of Christine Römer by Felix Baral-Weber, Jenny Rothkrämer-Vogt,
+   Daniel Büttner, Claudia Dahl, Christian Otto and Christine Römer (FSU
+   Jena). My grateful thanks to all!
+
+%</readme>
+%<*tex>-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% run latex thrice on this file etoc.tex then dvipdfmx on etoc.dvi 
+%% to produce the documentation etoc.pdf, with source code included.  
+%%
+%% possible dvipdfmx warnings (due to hyperlinks extending over page
+%% breaks) may be ignored, but in case of a too old dvipdfmx, it may 
+%% be preferable to use pdflatex. Set \Withdvipdfmx to 0 first.
+%%
+\chardef\Withdvipdfmx 1 % replace 1 by 0 for using latex+dvips or pdflatex
+\chardef\NoSourceCode 0 % replace 0 by 1 for the doc *without* the source code
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesFile {etoc.tex}[Driver for etoc documentation]%
+\PassOptionsToClass   {a4paper,fontsize=11pt,twoside}{scrdoc}
+\PassOptionsToPackage {ngerman,english}{babel}
+\chardef\ForEnglish 1 % (can NOT be both 1..)
+\chardef\ForDeutsch 0 %
+\input etoc.dtx
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% End:
+%</tex>-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%<*DEtex>-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% run latex thrice on this file etoc-DE.tex then dvipdfmx on etoc-DE.dvi 
+%% to produce the German documentation etoc-DE.pdf (without source code).
+%%
+%% possible dvipdfmx warnings (due to hyperlinks extending over page
+%% breaks) may be ignored, but in case of a too old dvipdfmx, it may 
+%% be preferable to use pdflatex. For this set \Withdvipdfmx to 0.
+%%
+%% Um etoc-DE.pdf zu erzeugen ist latex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen
+%% zu lassen, dann dvipdfmx mit etoc-DE.dvi. Im Falle von Problemen
+%% mit dvipdfmx ist \Withdvidpdfmx auf 0 zu setzen, dann ist pdflatex
+%% dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen zu lassen.
+%%
+\chardef\Withdvipdfmx 1 % replace 1 by 0 for using latex+dvips or pdflatex
+\chardef\NoSourceCode 1 % replace 1 by 0 for the doc *with* the source code
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesFile {etoc-DE.tex}[Driver for etoc German documentation]%
+\PassOptionsToClass   {a4paper,fontsize=11pt,twoside,ngerman}{scrdoc}
+\PassOptionsToPackage {english,ngerman}{babel}
+\chardef\ForEnglish 0 % (can NOT be both 1..)
+\chardef\ForDeutsch 1 %
+\input etoc.dtx
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% End:
+%</DEtex>-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%<*insfile>---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Run tex on this file to extract from etoc.dtx:
+%%        etoc.sty, etoc.tex, etoc-DE.tex and README.md
+%%
+%% At least three ways to produce etoc.pdf (method (3) is preferred):
+%%  (1) latex etoc.dtx (three times), then dvips, then ps2pdf
+%%  (2) pdflatex etoc.dtx (three times)
+%%  (3) latex etoc.tex (three times), then dvipdfmx
+%%
+%% Method (3) produces the smallest pdf files.
+%% Options can be set in etoc.tex (and etoc-DE.tex):
+%%  - scrdoc class options (paper size, font size, ...) 
+%%  - with or without source code, 
+%%  - with dvipdfmx or with latex/pdflatex. 
+%%
+%% To produce the German documentation etoc-DE.pdf run tex on etoc.ins
+%% or etoc.dtx to produce etoc-DE.tex, then compile etoc-DE.tex with
+%% latex (thrice) then dvipdmx, or edit the suitable toggle in
+%% etoc-DE.tex to allow compilation to proceed with pdflatex.
+%%
+%% Um etoc-DE.pdf zu erzeugen ist latex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen
+%% zu lassen, dann dvipdfmx mit etoc-DE.dvi. Im Falle von Problemen
+%% mit dvipdfmx ist \Withdvidpdfmx auf 0 in etoc-DE.tex zu setzen,
+%% dann ist pdflatex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen zu lassen.
+%%
+%% Installation:
+%%
+%%   etoc.sty    -> TDS:tex/latex/etoc/etoc.sty
+%%   etoc.dtx    -> TDS:source/latex/etoc/etoc.dtx
+%%   etoc.pdf    -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/etoc.pdf
+%%   etoc-DE.pdf -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/etoc-DE.pdf
+%%   README.md   -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/README.md
+%%
+\input docstrip.tex
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\def\etocpkgpreamble{\defaultpreamble^^J\MetaPrefix^^J%
+\string\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}^^J%
+\string\ProvidesPackage{etoc}^^J%
+\space[\etocpkgdate\space\etocpkgversion\space\etocpkgdescription]}%
+\generate{\nopreamble\nopostamble
+\file{README.md}{\from{etoc.dtx}{readme}}%
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble
+\file{etoc.tex}{\from{etoc.dtx}{tex}}%
+\file{etoc-DE.tex}{\from{etoc.dtx}{DEtex}}%
+\usepreamble\etocpkgpreamble
+\file{etoc.sty}{\from{etoc.dtx}{package}}}%
+\catcode32=13\relax% active space
+\let =\space%
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* file into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{*     etoc.sty} 
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run latex thrice on file etoc.tex}
+\Msg{* (or etoc-DE.tex) and then run dvipdfmx on file etoc.dvi, resp.}
+\Msg{* etoc-DE.dvi}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\endbatchfile
+%</insfile>---------------------------------------------------------------------
+%<*none>------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\fi
+%
+\chardef\noetex 0
+\expandafter\ifx\csname numexpr\endcsname\relax \chardef\noetex 1 \fi
+\ifnum\noetex=1 \chardef\extractfiles 0 % extract files, then stop
+\else
+% \ifdefined does not count as \if with Knuth tex !
+% no way to use it or \ifcsname here ! (besides hiding it in macros)
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname ProvidesFile\endcsname\relax
+      \chardef\extractfiles 0 % etex etc.. on etoc.dtx
+    \else % latex/pdflatex on etoc.tex or on etoc.dtx
+      \ProvidesFile{etoc.dtx}%
+        [`etoc' source and documentation (\etocdtxtimestamp)]%
+      \expandafter\ifx\csname Withdvipdfmx\endcsname\relax
+        % latex run is on etoc.dtx
+        \chardef\extractfiles 1 % 1 = extract files and typeset manual
+        \chardef\Withdvipdfmx 0 % 0 = pdflatex or latex+dvips
+        \chardef\NoSourceCode 1 % do not include source code
+        \chardef\ForEnglish 1 \chardef\ForDeutsch 0
+        \PassOptionsToClass   {a4paper,fontsize=11pt,twoside}{scrdoc}% 
+        \PassOptionsToPackage {ngerman,english}{babel}%
+      \else % latex run is on etoc.tex or etoc-DE.tex
+        \chardef\extractfiles 2 % do not extract files
+      \fi
+    \fi
+\fi
+\ifnum\extractfiles<2 % extract files
+\def\MessageDeFin{\newlinechar10 \let\Msg\message
+\Msg{********************************************************************^^J}%
+\Msg{*^^J}%
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following^^J}%
+\Msg{* file into a directory searched by TeX:^^J}%
+\Msg{*^^J}%
+\Msg{*\space\space\space\space etoc.sty^^J}%
+\Msg{*^^J}%
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation with source code included run latex^^J}%
+\Msg{* thrice on file etoc.tex and then dvipdfmx on etoc.dvi^^J}%
+\Msg{*^^J}%
+\Msg{* To produce the German documentation run latex thrice on file^^J}%
+\Msg{* etoc-DE.tex and then dvipdfmx on etoc-DE.dvi^^J}%
+\Msg{*^^J}%
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!^^J}%
+\Msg{*^^J}%
+\Msg{********************************************************************^^J}%
+}%
+\begingroup
+    \input docstrip.tex
+    \askforoverwritefalse
+    \def\etocpkgpreamble{\defaultpreamble^^J\MetaPrefix^^J%
+    \string\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}^^J%
+    \string\ProvidesPackage{etoc}^^J%
+    \space[\etocpkgdate\space\etocpkgversion\space\etocpkgdescription]}%
+    \generate{\nopreamble\nopostamble
+    \file{README.md}{\from{etoc.dtx}{readme}}%
+    \usepostamble\defaultpostamble
+    \file{etoc.ins}{\from{etoc.dtx}{insfile}}%
+    \file{etoc.tex}{\from{etoc.dtx}{tex}}%
+    \file{etoc-DE.tex}{\from{etoc.dtx}{DEtex}}%
+    \usepreamble\etocpkgpreamble
+    \file{etoc.sty}{\from{etoc.dtx}{package}}}%
+\endgroup
+\fi % end of file extraction
+\ifnum\extractfiles=0 % tex/etex/xetex/etc on etoc.dtx, files extracted, stop
+      \MessageDeFin\expandafter\end\fi
+% no use of docstrip to extract files if latex run was on etoc.tex
+\ifdefined\MessageDeFin\AtEndDocument{\MessageDeFin}\fi
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% START OF USER MANUAL TEX SOURCE
+\documentclass[abstract]{scrdoc}
+
+\ifnum\NoSourceCode=1 \OnlyDescription\fi
+
+\makeatletter
+\ifnum\Withdvipdfmx=1
+   \@for\@tempa:=hyperref,bookmark,graphicx,xcolor\do
+            {\PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfmx}\@tempa}
+   %
+   \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfm}{geometry}
+   \PassOptionsToPackage{bookmarks=true}{hyperref}
+   \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfmx-outline-open}{hyperref}
+   \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipdfmx-outline-open}{bookmark}
+   %
+   \def\pgfsysdriver{pgfsys-dvipdfm.def}
+\else
+   \PassOptionsToPackage{bookmarks=true}{hyperref}
+\fi
+\makeatother
+
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[hscale=0.66,vscale=0.75]{geometry}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+
+% January 2014. work-around a bug in KOMA 3.12 (December 2013):
+\makeatletter
+\def\buggysectionmark #1{% KOMA 3.12 as released to CTAN December 2013
+    \if@twoside\expandafter\markboth\else\expandafter\markright\fi
+    {\MakeMarkcase{\ifnumbered{section}{\sectionmarkformat\fi}{}#1}}{}}
+\ifx\buggysectionmark\sectionmark
+\def\sectionmark #1{%
+    \if@twoside\expandafter\markboth\else\expandafter\markright\fi
+    {\MakeMarkcase{\ifnumbered{section}{\sectionmarkformat}{}#1}}{}}
+\fi
+\makeatother
+
+\makeatletter
+% 2013/03/07. 
+% This macro allows to conveniently center a line inside a paragraph and still
+% use therein \verb or other commands changing catcodes.
+% Note: \centerline in LaTeX still uses \hsize and not \linewidth/\columnwidth
+    \def\@centeredline {\hbox to \linewidth
+                        \bgroup \hss \bgroup
+                        \aftergroup\centeredline@ }
+    \newcommand*\centeredline {%
+      \ifhmode
+        \\\relax
+        \def\centeredline@{\hss\egroup\hskip\z@skip}%
+      \else
+        \def\centeredline@{\hss\egroup}%
+      \fi
+      \afterassignment\@centeredline
+      \let\next=}
+
+% pour maintenir les % en début de ligne dans les blocs verbatim
+%
+
+   \let\original@check@percent\check@percent
+   \let\check@percent\relax
+\makeatother
+
+
+% pour les environnements verbatim
+% uniformisé finalement, avec quelques exceptions, pour dtx du 3 déc 2013
+\def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\small\hyphenchar\font45 \baselineskip11pt\relax}
+
+% ATTENTION: (avec doc.sty ou les classes scrdoc ou ltxdoc)
+%
+% - l'environnement macrocode se fait avec \macro@font qui est le
+% \MacroFont du \begin{document}.
+%
+% - les environnements verbatim utilisent le \MacroFont courant.
+%
+% - \verb utilise un \ttfamily !! et non pas \verbatim@font que l'on
+% peut customiser.
+%
+% - (9 mars 2015) il ne faut PAS commencer des macrocode directement après
+% un \section, il faut un paragraphe (par exemple un \indent\par)
+
+%----
+% better \verb pour doc.
+% 12 octobre 2013, importé de xint.dtx
+% je rajoute pour { afin que truc{machin puisse avoir hyphénation
+% retire \leavemmode, pas nécessaire pour emploi ici
+
+% NOTE 9 mars 2015. J'ai depuis une version plus aboutie dans xint.dtx
+% mais je laisse ici tel quel.
+
+\def\MicroFont{\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font45 }
+% modif de \do@noligs: \char`#1} --> \char`#1 }
+\makeatletter 
+\def\do@noligs #1%
+{%
+    \catcode `#1\active 
+    \begingroup \lccode `\~=`#1\relax 
+    \lowercase {\endgroup \def ~{\kern \z@ \char `#1 }}%
+}% 
+\def\dobackslash
+{%
+    \catcode92 \active 
+    \begingroup \lccode `\~=92\relax 
+    \lowercase {\endgroup \def ~{\kern \z@ \char 92 }}%
+}% 
+\def\dobraces
+{%
+    \catcode123 \active 
+    \begingroup \lccode `\~=123\relax 
+    \lowercase {\endgroup \def ~{\hskip \z@\@plus.1pt\@minus.1pt
+                                 \char 123 }}%
+    \catcode125 \active 
+    \begingroup \lccode `\~=125\relax 
+    \lowercase {\endgroup \def ~{\char 125 \hskip \z@\@plus.1pt\@minus.1pt }}%
+}% 
+\def\verb 
+{%
+  \relax \ifmmode\hbox\else\leavevmode\null\fi
+  \bgroup \MicroFont
+  \let\do\do@noligs  \verbatim@nolig@list
+  \let\do\@makeother \dospecials 
+  \catcode32 10 
+  \dobackslash \dobraces \makestarlowast 
+  \@jfverb 
+}% 
+\def\@jfverb #1{\catcode`#1\active
+                \lccode`\~`#1\lowercase{\def~{\egroup\unskip}}}%
+% (\unskip ajouté le 14 octobre)
+% \lowast est défini plus loin
+\begingroup
+   \lccode`\~=`\*
+\lowercase{%
+\endgroup
+\def\makestarlowast {\catcode`\*\active\let~\lowast}}%
+\makeatother
+%
+\usepackage{txfonts}
+
+% m'occuper de la taille de txtt:
+% au passage je supprime le \hyphenchar \font\m@ne
+
+% avril 2013
+% ATTENTION ATTENTION ATTENTION Un changement de taille comme \small semble
+% déclencher (peut-être) la relecture de t1txtt.fd et quoi qu'il en soit le
+% \hyphenchar est REMIS à -1 !
+
+% update: 13 octobre 2013 
+% et pourtant tailles sont ok, donc au moins cette information est
+% maintenue je ne sais donc pas exactement ce qui se passe.
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{txtt}{\hyphenchar\font 45\relax}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{m}{n}{  %medium
+     <->s*[.96] t1xtt%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{m}{sc}{ %cap & small cap
+     <->s*[.96] t1xttsc%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{m}{sl}{ %slanted
+     <->s*[.96] t1xttsl%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{m}{it}{ %italic
+     <->ssub * txtt/m/sl%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{m}{ui}{     %unslanted italic
+     <->ssub * txtt/m/sl%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{bx}{n}{ %bold extended
+     <->t1xbtt%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{bx}{sc}{    %bold extended cap & small cap
+     <->t1xbttsc%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{bx}{sl}{    %bold extended slanted
+     <->t1xbttsl%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{bx}{it}{    %bold extended italic
+     <->ssub * txtt/bx/sl%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{bx}{ui}{    %bold extended unslanted italic
+     <->ssub * txtt/bx/sl%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{b}{n}{  %bold
+     <->ssub * txtt/bx/n%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{b}{sc}{ %bold cap & small cap
+     <->ssub * txtt/bx/sc%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{b}{sl}{ %bold slanted
+     <->ssub * txtt/bx/sl%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{b}{it}{     %bold italic
+     <->ssub * txtt/bx/it%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{txtt}{b}{ui}{     %bold unslanted italic
+     <->ssub * txtt/bx/ui%
+}{}
+
+\usepackage{xspace}
+\usepackage[dvipsnames]{xcolor}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage[inline]{enumitem}
+\usepackage{array}
+\usepackage{longtable}
+
+\definecolor{joli}{RGB}{225,95,0}
+\definecolor{JOLI}{RGB}{225,95,0}
+\definecolor{BLUE}{RGB}{0,0,255}
+\colorlet{niceone}{green!35!blue!75}
+
+\usepackage {babel} % ngerman and english options have been passed to babel
+\AtBeginDocument {
+  \ifnum\ForEnglish=1 \renewcommand\partname{Part}\fi
+  \addto\captionsenglish{\renewcommand\partname{Part}}
+  \addto\captionsgerman {\renewcommand\partname{Teil}}
+}
+
+\usepackage{tikz}
+\usetikzlibrary{trees}    % added for "cyclic" grow function 2013/03/02
+\usepackage{forest}       % switched from tikz-qtree to forest 2013/09/09
+% No problem with hyperlinks then, contrarily to tikz-qtree.
+
+% NOTE: (12 octobre 2013)
+%  - si compilation pour dvipdfmx, les arbres dans le dvi visualisés par xdvi
+%  montrent correctement les textes, mais rien au point de vue graphique,
+%  - si compilation pour dvips, l'arbre fait par forest est tout empilé, celui
+%  fait par tikz sans forest est presque correct, les labels débordent.
+% Dans les deux cas, le résultat final dans le pdf est bon.
+% grosso modo dans l'état actuel le pdf fait 250K (dvipdfmx), 340K (pdflatex) et
+% 1M pour dvips+ps2pdf.
+
+% 9 octobre 2013, je me décide à ne plus utiliser hidelinks, mais il est tout de
+% même ajouté au .toc
+
+% 18 mai 2014: pdfinfo différent suivant anglais ou allemand
+\ifnum\ForEnglish=1
+\usepackage[pdfencoding=pdfdoc]{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{%
+linktoc=all,%      why is the important stuff
+%% bookmarksdepth=3,% in a *hard* to find README?  
+%% (but not needeed anymore now, v1.07g)
+breaklinks=true,%
+colorlinks,%   
+linkcolor=RoyalBlue,% Orchid
+urlcolor=OliveGreen,%
+pdfauthor={Jean-Fran\c cois Burnol},%
+pdftitle={The etoc package},%
+pdfsubject={Tables of contents with LaTeX},%
+pdfkeywords={LaTeX, table of contents},%
+pdfstartview=FitH,%
+pdfpagemode=UseOutlines}
+\fi
+
+\ifnum\ForDeutsch=1
+\usepackage[pdfencoding=pdfdoc]{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{%
+linktoc=all,%
+breaklinks=true,%
+colorlinks,%   
+linkcolor=RoyalBlue,% Orchid
+urlcolor=OliveGreen,%
+pdfauthor={Jean-Fran\c cois Burnol, Christine Römer},%
+pdftitle={Das etoc Paket},%
+pdfsubject={Inhaltsverzeichnisse mit LaTeX},%
+pdfkeywords={LaTeX, Inhaltsverzeichnis},%
+pdfstartview=FitH,%
+pdfpagemode=UseOutlines}
+\fi
+
+% added usage of package bookmark 2013/10/10
+\usepackage{bookmark} 
+
+\usepackage{framed}
+\usepackage{varioref}
+
+\usepackage{etoc}  % loads multicol
+
+%--------
+% 10 octobre 2013:
+\AtBeginDocument{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\hypersetup{hidelinks}}}
+% mieux que de passer hidelinks comme option à hyperref.
+% Comme toutes les tocs sont faites dans un groupe, c'est très
+% bien. (et j'utilise \etocaftertitlehook pour autre chose)
+
+%--------
+% add-ons for the new section `surprising uses of etoc' (2013/01/24)
+\newcounter{visibletoc}
+\renewcommand{\etocaftertitlehook}
+   {\stepcounter{visibletoc}%
+    \phantomsection
+    \etoctoccontentsline{visibletoc}{\thevisibletoc}}
+\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{6}
+%--------
+% add-ons for the `fancy TOC' (2013/01/25)
+    \newcounter{dummypart}
+    \newcounter{dummychapter}
+    \newcounter{dummysection}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummypart}{6}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummychapter}{6}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummysection}{6}
+%--------
+% for "Another compatibility mode"  (2013/02/21):
+% attention au 5 qui est hard-coded 
+% (pour 1.07f c'était 3, maintenant 5 pour 1.07g; et 4 maintenant pour 1.07h...)
+% (et pour 1.07i.. à nouveau 3 faudra vraiment que je change cela)
+% et maintenant =4 pour version de la doc du 28 avril 2014... faudra vraiment qu
+% je mette un mécanisme plus robuste pour cette TOC.
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand*{\MyQuasiStandardTOC}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\savedsectionline\l@section
+  \let\savedsubsectionline\l@subsection 
+  \etocsetstyle{section}{}
+    {\ifnum\etocthenumber=4 % <- check this if new sections added to user manual
+      \etocsetstyle{subsection}
+        {\par\nopagebreak\begingroup
+         \leftskip1.5em \rightskip\@tocrmarg
+         \parfillskip \@flushglue 
+         \parindent 0pt
+         \normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+         \etocskipfirstprefix}
+        {\allowbreak\,--\,}
+        {\etocname\ \textup{(\etocnumber)}}
+        {.\par\endgroup}%
+     \else
+        \etocsetstyle{subsection}{}{}
+        {\savedsubsectionline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+     \fi} 
+    {\savedsectionline
+      {\numberline{{\color{cyan}\etocthenumber}}\etocname}{\etocpage}}
+    {}%
+  \etocstandarddisplaystyle
+  \etocsetnexttocdepth {2}%
+  \tableofcontents #1
+  \endgroup}
+\makeatother
+%--------
+% Statistics on sections and subsections in a part \thispartstats:
+% 2 mars 2013
+% cette version utilise des box, plutôt que des macros.
+% mais on ne peut plus alors changer de police etc...
+
+% 11 octobre 2013, je retire les \color{teal}.
+
+\newsavebox\firstnamei
+\newsavebox\firstnumberi
+\newsavebox\lastnamei
+\newsavebox\lastnumberi
+\newsavebox\firstnameii
+\newsavebox\firstnumberii
+\newsavebox\lastnameii
+\newsavebox\lastnumberii
+\newcounter{mycounti}
+\newcounter{mycountii}
+
+\newcommand*{\thispartstatsauxi}{}
+\newcommand*{\thispartstatsauxii}{}
+\newcommand*{\oldtocdepth}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\thispartstats}{%
+  \setcounter{mycounti}{0}%
+  \setcounter{mycountii}{0}%
+  \def\thispartstatsauxi{%
+         \sbox{\firstnamei}{\etocname}%
+         \sbox{\firstnumberi}{\etocnumber}%
+         \def\thispartstatsauxi{}}%
+  \def\thispartstatsauxii{%
+         \sbox{\firstnameii}{\etocname}%
+         \sbox{\firstnumberii}{\etocnumber}%
+         \def\thispartstatsauxii{}}%
+  \begingroup
+  \etocsetstyle{subsection}
+    {}
+    {}
+    {\thispartstatsauxii
+     \stepcounter{mycountii}%
+     \sbox{\lastnameii}{\etocname}%
+     \sbox{\lastnumberii}{\etocnumber}}
+    {}
+\ifnum\ForEnglish=1
+  \etocsetstyle{section}
+    {}
+    {}
+    {\thispartstatsauxi
+     \stepcounter{mycounti}%
+     \sbox{\lastnamei}{\etocname}%
+     \sbox{\lastnumberi}{\etocnumber}}
+    {Here are some statistics for this part: it contains \arabic{mycounti}
+      section\ifnum\value{mycounti}>1 s\fi{} and
+      \arabic{mycountii} subsection\ifnum\value{mycountii}>1 s\fi. The name of
+     the first section is 
+     ``\unhbox\firstnamei{}'' and the corresponding number is 
+     ``\unhbox\firstnumberi''. The name of the last section is 
+     ``\unhbox\lastnamei{}'' and its number is
+     ``\unhbox\lastnumberi''. 
+     \ifnum\value{mycountii}>0 The name of
+     the first subsection is 
+     ``\unhbox\firstnameii{}'' and the corresponding number is 
+     ``\unhbox\firstnumberii''. The name of the last subsection is 
+     ``\unhbox\lastnameii{}'' and its number is
+     ``\unhbox\lastnumberii''.\fi }
+\fi
+\ifnum\ForDeutsch=1 
+  \etocsetstyle{section}
+    {}
+    {}
+    {\thispartstatsauxi
+     \stepcounter{mycounti}%
+     \sbox{\lastnamei}{\etocname}%
+     \sbox{\lastnumberi}{\etocnumber}}
+% Hier wird ein Befehl definiert, der fuer jedes Teil ein paar Fakten sammelt
+% und ausgibt. 
+    {Zu Beginn wollen wir ein paar Fakten zu diesem Teil nennen. Er enthält
+     \arabic{mycounti} Abschnitt\ifnum\value{mycounti}>1 e\fi{} und 
+      \arabic{mycountii} Unterabschnitt\ifnum\value{mycountii}>1 e\fi. Der Name des ersten 
+      Abschnitts lautet
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnamei{}\grqq~und er hat die Gliederungsnummer 
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnumberi\grqq. Der Name des letzten Abschnitts lautet 
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnamei{}\grqq~und er hat die Nummer
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnumberi\grqq. 
+     \ifnum\value{mycountii}>0  Der erste 
+     Unterabschnitt heißt 
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnameii{}\grqq~und er hat die Nummer 
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnumberii\grqq. Der Name des letzten Unterabschnitts ist 
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnameii{}\grqq~und dessen Nummer ist
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnumberii\grqq.\fi }% 
+\fi
+  \etocinline 
+% october 10, 2013. 
+  \etocsetnexttocdepth {2}%
+  \etocsettocstyle {\pdfbookmark[1]{Statistics}{\thepart.STATS}}{}
+  \localtableofcontents
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+
+\newcommand\etoc{%
+        \texorpdfstring{{\color{joli}\ttfamily\bfseries etoc}}{etoc}\xspace}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\csa [1] {{\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font45 \char`\\ #1}}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\csb [1] 
+                {\hyperref[#1] {\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font45 \char`\\ #1}}
+
+\newcommand\cshyp[1]{\texorpdfstring{\csa{#1}}{\textbackslash #1}}
+
+\newcommand\csbhyp[1]{\texorpdfstring{\csa{#1}}{\textbackslash #1}}
+
+\newcommand\toc{\csa{table\-of\-contents}\xspace}
+\newcommand\localtoc{\csa{local\-table\-of\-contents}\xspace}
+
+\newcommand\lowast{\raisebox{-.25\height}{*}}
+\newcommand\starit[1]{\csa{#1\lowast}}
+\newcommand\staritb[1]{\csb{#1}\lowast}
+
+\hyphenation{toc-depth sec-num-depth con-tents-line}
+\hyphenation{etoc-tan-dard-lines
+etoc-de-fault-lines
+etoc-toc-lines
+etoc-set-style
+etoc-name
+etoc-page
+etoc-skip-first-pre-fix
+etoc-num-ber
+etoc-if-first
+etoc-ifnum-bered
+etoc-the-name
+etoc-the-num-ber
+etoc-the-page
+etoc-link
+etoc-the-linked-name
+etoc-the-linked-num-ber
+etoc-the-linked-page
+etoc-the-link
+etoc-set-level
+etoc-set-toc-depth
+etoc-set-next-toc-depth
+etoc-set-toc-depth
+etoc-obey-toc-toc-depth
+etoc-ig-nor-toc-depth
+etoc-depth-tag
+etoc-set-tag-depth
+etoc-obey-depth-tags
+etoc-ig-nore-depth-tags
+etoc-stan-dard-dis-playstyle
+etoc-set-toc-style
+etoc-mul-ti-col-style
+etoc-mul-ti-col
+etoc-lo-cal-mul-ti-col
+etoc-toc-style
+etoc-toc-style-with-marks
+etoc-toc-style-with-mark-snouc
+etoc-ruled-style
+etoc-ruled
+etoc-lo-cal-ruled
+etoc-framed-style
+etoc-framed
+etoc-lo-cal-framed
+etoc-in-line
+etoc-af-ter-ti-tle-hook
+etoc-af-ter-con-tentshook
+etoc-af-ter-toc-hook
+etoc-skip-first-pre-fix
+etoc-only-on-first}
+
+\hyphenation{ 
+etoc-font-mi-nus-two 
+etoc-font-mi-nus-one 
+etoc-font-zero 
+etoc-font-one 
+etoc-font-two 
+etoc-font-three 
+etoc-sep-mi-nus-two 
+etoc-sep-mi-nus-one 
+etoc-sep-zero 
+etoc-sep-one 
+etoc-sep-two 
+etoc-sep-three 
+etoc-mi-nus-two-left-mar-gin 
+etoc-mi-nus-two-right-mar-gin 
+etoc-mi-nus-one-left-mar-gin 
+etoc-mi-nus-one-right-mar-gin 
+etoc-base-line-spread-mi-nus-two 
+etoc-base-line-spread-mi-nus-one 
+etoc-base-line-spread-zero 
+etoc-base-line-spread-one 
+etoc-base-line-spread-two 
+etoc-base-line-spread-three 
+etoc-toc-line-lead-ers 
+etoc-ab-brev-page-name 
+etoc-part-name 
+etoc-book-name 
+etoc-above-toc-skip 
+etoc-be-low-toc-skip 
+etoc-column-sep 
+etoc-mul-ti-col-sep 
+etoc-mul-ti-col-pre-tol-er-ance 
+etoc-mul-ti-col-tol-er-ance 
+etoc-de-fault-nb-col 
+etoc-in-ner-top-sep 
+etoc-top-rule 
+etoc-top-rule-col-or-cmd 
+etoc-in-ner-left-sep 
+etoc-in-ner-right-sep 
+etoc-in-ner-bot-tom-sep 
+etoc-left-rule 
+etoc-right-rule 
+etoc-bot-tom-rule 
+etoc-left-rule-col-or-cmd 
+etoc-rightrule-col-or-cmd 
+etoc-bot-tom-rule-col-or-cmd 
+etoc-bkg-col-or-cmd 
+etoc-framed-mp-hook}
+
+\hyphenation{next-toc-with-tags}
+\frenchspacing
+
+\renewcommand\familydefault\sfdefault
+
+% for illustration only. Not to be recommended in general.
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+
+\ifnum\ForDeutsch=1
+  \renewcommand*{\etocabbrevpagename}{S.~}
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}\rmfamily
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% THIS IS TO AVOID TEX BEING CONFUSED BY CONDITIONALS IN FALSE BRANCHES
+\catcode1 0
+\catcode92 12
+
+^^Aifnum^^AForEnglish=1
+
+    ^^Acatcode92 0 
+
+% START ENGLISH VERSION
+\bookmark[named=FirstPage,level=1]{Title page}
+
+\begin{center}
+  {\normalfont\Large The \etoc package}\\
+  \textsc{Jean-François Burnol}\par
+  \footnotesize \ttfamily jfbu (at) free (dot) fr\\
+  Package version: \etocpkgversion\ (\etocpkgdate)
+  \let\thefootnote\empty
+  \footnote{Documentation (\etocdocdate) generated from the source file
+  with timestamp ``\etocdtxtimestamp''.}\par
+\end{center}
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}
+
+\etocdepthtag.toc {preamble}
+
+%----
+% MAIN TOC
+%
+\etocsettocdepth {subsubsection}
+\etoctoclines
+\etocmarkboth\contentsname
+\etocmulticolstyle[1]
+     {\pdfbookmark[1]{Table of contents}{MAINTOC}%
+      \noindent\bfseries\Large
+      \leaders\hrule height1pt\hfill
+      \MakeUppercase{Table of Contents}}
+
+\begingroup
+  \etocsetlevel{subsection}{3}
+  \etocsetlevel{subsubsection}{6}
+  \tableofcontents \label{toc:main}
+\endgroup
+
+\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\abstractname}
+\begin{abstract}
+  The \etoc package gives to the user complete control on how
+  the entries of the table of contents should be constituted
+  from the \emph{name}, \emph{number}, and \emph{page number}
+  of each sectioning unit. This goes via the definition of
+  \emph{line styles} for each sectioning level used in the
+  document. The package provides its own custom line styles.
+  Simpler ones are given as examples in the documentation. The
+  simplest usage will be to take advantage of the layout facilities
+  of packages dealing with list environments.
+  
+  Regarding the \emph{global toc display}, \etoc provides pre-defined styles
+  based on a multi-column format, with, optionally, a ruled title or framed
+  contents.
+
+  The \csa{tableofcontents} command may be used arbitrarily many times and it
+  has a variant \csa{localtableofcontents} which prints tables of contents
+  `local' to the current surrounding document unit. An extension of the
+  \csa{label}/\csa{ref} syntax allows to reproduce (with another layout) a local
+  table of contents defined somewhere else in the document.
+
+  Via ``depth tags'', one gets an even finer control for each table of contents
+  of which sectioning units it should, or not, display.
+
+  The formatting inherited (and possibly customized by other
+  packages) from the document class will be used when in
+  \emph{compatibility mode}.
+
+  The assignment of levels to the sectioning units can be changed at any
+  time, and \etoc can thus be used in a quite general manner to
+  create custom ``lists of'', additionally to the tables of contents
+  related to the document sectioning units. No auxiliary file is used
+  additionally to the standard |.toc| file.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Foreword}
+
+Popular packages dealing with TOCs include |tocloft|, |titletoc|
+and |minitoc|. Why another one? I started \etoc
+for my own use, and found out only later about these mentioned
+packages.
+
+As is well explained in the |tocloft| package documentation,
+the standard \LaTeX{} layout for the Table of Contents is
+buried in the class definitions. In particular, most of the
+lengths therein are hardcoded, and the only way for the user
+to change them is to recopy the class definitions into the
+document and then change them to obtain what is desired
+(within suitable \csa{makeatletter} and \csa{makeatother}).
+The more reasonable alternative is to use a dedicated package such as
+|tocloft| or to use another flexible document class.
+
+However, although now things are hopefully not hard-coded, one
+still has to go through the package or class interface. This
+means one has to memorize a (possibly large) number of macros
+which will serve only to this task, and one will always be
+constrained to customizing one initially given layout.
+
+The spirit of \etoc is something else. The user will deal with
+the \emph{name}, the \emph{number} and the \emph{page number}
+corresponding to each document sectional division (and
+found in a line of the |.toc| file) in a completely arbitrary
+manner: they are made available via the \csb{etocname},
+\csb{etocnumber}, and \csb{etocpage} commands. 
+
+\etoc appears to be (at least partially) compatible with the
+|article|, |book|, |report|, |scrartcl|, |scrbook|, |scrreprt| and
+|memoir| classes. Starting with release |1.07k| it is possible to
+use \etoc concurrently with  package |tocloft|.
+
+\section{License}
+
+\begingroup\ttfamily\small\hyphenchar\font -1
+           \parindent0pt 
+           \obeyspaces\obeylines %
+\etocLicense\endgroup
+
+
+\clearpage
+
+\etocsettocdepth {subsection}
+
+\etocdepthtag.toc{overview}
+
+\part{Overview}\label{part:overview}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\invisiblelocaltableofcontents \label{toc:overview}
+
+\section{Do I need to be a geek to use \etoc?}
+
+Not quite. The simplest way is to use |enumerate| environments,
+with the customizing facilities of packages such as
+|enumitem|,\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/enumitem}} to
+display the data fetched by \etoc from the |.toc| file. The data
+consists of the \emph{name} (\csb{etocname}), \emph{number}
+(\csb{etocnumber}), and \emph{page number} (\csb{etocpage}) as
+extracted
+% \footnote{although \LaTeX{} has been promoted as
+%   separating contents from form, there are some areas where its
+%   real implementation is very far from this ideal. And the |.toc|
+%   file is a case in point; not to mention the hard-coded
+%   dimensions, with use of the @ sign,
+%   in the macros responsible for constructing the typeset table of
+%   contents.} 
+from the |.toc| file.
+
+This is
+illustrated \hyperref[toc:a]{at the start} of
+\autoref{part:linestyles}. More
+sophisticated examples would use more sophisticated |enumitem|
+options. One may say then that again the user has to memorize some
+customizing! indeed, but the syntax and option names to memorize
+are in no way related only to matters of tables of contents, hence
+an economy of use of the poor brain.
+
+% People who
+% know the internals of \LaTeX2e well (which is not my case) could
+% happily use directly a |\list| command;  
+
+Next in ease of use, perhaps, is the method explained
+\hyperref[sec:firstexample]{later in this part} (\autoref{sec:firstexample}).
+For this some knowledge of |\leftskip|, |\rightskip|, etc... is necessary. And a
+slight elaboration of this method, whose code is to be found in
+\autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}, allows to mimick very well, if so desired, the
+standard looks.
+
+As will be amply illustrated in this manual, \etoc is quite
+versatile (especially as it allows to re-define at any point in
+the document the hierarchy of sectioning units) and one can
+achieve surprising effects with it: \autoref{part:surprising} is
+devoted to this, and some more is to be found in
+\autoref{part:tipsandtricks}.
+
+\begin{framed}
+\setcounter{mycounti}{0}%
+  \etocinline
+\etocsetlevel{part}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{chapter}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}
+\etocsetstyle{visibletoc}
+    {}
+    {\stepcounter{mycounti}}
+    {}
+    {}
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{0}
+\tableofcontents
+A very important aspect of \etoc is that it is geared towards making many TOCs
+in the same document, \emph{using only one |.toc| file}! The present
+documentation contains \arabic{mycounti} visible tables of contents (and a few
+invisible ones) and uses only one |.toc| file!\footnotemark{} So one should
+think 
+twice before adding manually extra commands to the |.toc| file (see
+\autoref{sec:addingtotoc}).
+\end{framed}
+
+\footnotetext{and the counting itself has been achieved by a table of contents
+  which was inserted in the framed paragraph! \dots the technique for this kind
+  of effect will be explained later.}
+
+
+\subsection{Limitations in the use of list environments for
+  tables of contents}
+\label{ssec:limitations}
+
+There are some limitations to the use of list environments
+for typesetting TOCs. One of them is intrinsic to the scope
+limitations created by the groups associated to the
+environments: the |.toc| file
+may contain, besides the information to be typeset in the
+TOCs, some other commands, such as language changing
+commands, which do not expect to see their scope limited in
+this way inside a group (\LaTeX's environments create groups).
+
+Therefore the built-in ``line styles'' proposed by \etoc as an example (and
+which are illustrated\footnote{with a twist, subsections having been downgraded
+  to the subsubsection style\dots} by the \hyperref[toc:main]{main table of
+  contents} in this document) do not make use of environments. Actually, in this
+user manual, only the \hyperref[toc:a]{table of contents} at the start of
+\autoref{part:linestyles} and the \autoref{toc:allsubsections} (which is a TOC!)
+have their line styles expressed in terms of enumerate environments.
+
+\section{Line styles and toc display style}
+
+A distinction shall be made between the \emph{line styles},
+\emph{i.e.} the way the name, number and page numbers are
+used at each level, and the \emph{toc display style} (for
+lack of a better name) which tells how the title should be
+set, whether an entry in the |.toc| file should be made,
+whether the contents should be typeset with multiple columns,
+etc... the latter is governed by the command
+\csa{etocsettocstyle} (or some higher-level commands) and the
+former by the command \csa{etocsetstyle}.
+
+
+\subsection{\csbhyp{etocsetstyle} for the line styles}
+
+The command to inform \etoc of what to do with \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber},
+and \csa{etocpage} is called \csb{etocsetstyle}. It has five mandatory
+arguments. The first one is the name of the sectional unit: a priori known names
+are |book|, |part|, |chapter|, |section|, |subsection|, |subsubsection|,
+|paragraph|, and |subparagraph|, and any other name can be declared and assigned
+to a (numeric) level via the \csb{etocsetlevel} command.\footnote{under the
+  \texttt{memoir} class, \etoc knows \texttt{appendix} as a sectioning
+  name.} 
+
+The four other arguments of \csb{etocsetstyle} specify: 1) \emph{what to do when
+  this level is first encountered, down from a more general one,} then 2) \& 3)
+(two arguments, a `prefix' and a `contents') \emph{what to do when a new entry
+  of that type is found,} and 4) \emph{the last argument is the code to execute
+  when a division unit of higher importance is again hit upon.}
+
+\subsection{\csbhyp{etocsettocstyle} for the toc display}
+
+The \csb{etocsettocstyle} command allows to specify what
+should be done before and after the line entries of the TOC
+are typeset, and in particular how the title should be
+printed. It has two arguments, the first one is executed
+before the TOC contents (typically it will print
+``Contents'' and define suitable marks for the page headings) and
+the second is executed after the TOC contents.
+
+\etoc provides four (customizable) higher level toc styles:
+\csb{etocmulticolstyle}, \csb{etoctocstyle},
+\csb{etocruledstyle}, and \csb{etocframedstyle}. All use the
+|multicol| package with a default of two columns
+(single-column mode is obtained with the optional argument |[1]|).
+
+These commands must be followed either by \toc or \localtoc.
+
+\subsection{Compatibility mode}\label{ssub:compat}
+\label{etoctoclines}
+\label{etocstandardlines}
+
+Both for the ``line styles'' and the ``toc display style'', it is
+possible to switch into a compatibility mode which uses the
+defaults from the
+document class.\footnote{for the ``toc display style''
+  \etoc checks if it knows the class, and if not defaults to
+  the |article| class layout. It will also check if
+  \texttt{tocloft} has customized the TOC title.} 
+This is activated by:\\
+\makebox[5.2cm][l]{\csb{etocstandardlines}}
+ |% `line entries' as without \usepackage{etoc}|\\
+\makebox[5.2cm][l]{\csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle}}
+ |% `toc display'  as without \usepackage{etoc}|
+
+
+If the command \csa{etocsetstyle} has \emph{not been used in the
+preamble} the package will be at |\begin{document}| in this
+  compatibility mode: hence just adding \csa{usepackage\{etoc\}}
+  should hopefully not change anything to the look of a
+  previously existing document, under the |article|, |book|,
+  |report|, |scrartcl|, |scrbook|, |scrreprt| and |memoir|
+  classes.
+
+  Any use of \csa{etocsetstyle} in the \emph{preamble or body} of
+  the document turns off from that point on the compatibility mode
+  for line styles, but maintains the compatibility mode for the
+  TOC title. One re-activates the compatibility mode for line
+  styles with \csb{etocstandardlines}; and 
+  \csb{etoctoclines} will re-activate the line styles as defined
+  with the help of \csa{etocsetstyle}, if their scope was not
+  limited to a group or environment.
+
+  The command \csb{etocdefaultlines} resets the line styles as
+  pre-defined internally by \etoc and described in
+  \autoref{etocdefaultlines}.
+
+Even if \csb{etocsetstyle} has been used, the global display style
+remains initially as defined by the document class (or the
+|tocloft| package); one needs to use the command
+\csb{etocsettocstyle} or its variants to exit from this
+compatibility mode at the ``toc display style'' level. It will be
+re-activated if use if made of \csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle}.
+
+\section{A first example}
+\label{sec:firstexample}
+
+Let us present a first example of specification for line styles.
+Immediately after the start of \autoref{part:overview} we inserted in the
+source file:
+\centeredline{|\invisiblelocaltableofcontents \label{toc:overview}|} This
+sets-up the label |toc:overview|, and we can use it at any location in the
+document: \centeredline{|\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}|} And as we used
+|\invisible...|,\footnote{this is a shortcut for setting temporarily the
+  |tocdepth| to |-3|, which has the effect to tell \etoc not to print the TOC,
+  and not even the heading.} the local TOC will exist only through its clones
+elsewhere in the document. 
+
+We could use the line styles defined by \etoc, with \csb{etocdefaultlines}, or
+the default document class styles with \csb{etocstandardlines}, but we were a
+bit more ambitious here and wanted to design our own. The technique is a simple
+one: each heading is in its own paragraph, which may extend on multiple lines;
+it is responsible for setting its own |\leftskip|.
+
+
+
+\begingroup
+\parindent 0pt
+\parfillskip 0pt
+\leftskip 0cm
+\rightskip 1cm
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 0cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\makebox[.5cm][l]{\etocnumber.}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\mdseries\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip .5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\bfseries \Large My first \etoc: TOC of
+  \autoref{part:overview} (\nameref{part:overview})}
+\tableofcontents \ref {toc:overview}
+\endgroup
+
+
+This is a simple design which does not make provisions for page breaks
+which should be discouraged in-between a section and a subsection
+etc\dots{} as we only used it for the table of contents of this part, thus
+with sections as top levels, there was no need to specify a style for
+parts too (we defined a subsubsection line style but as it turns
+out there are no subsubsections in this part). The two commands used are
+\csb{etocsetstyle} for specifying the line styles, and
+\csb{etocruledstyle} for the TOC global style.
+
+The |\rightskip| is shared by all, and creates space where the page
+numbers get printed. For an elaboration of this technique see the next
+\autoref{sec:secondexample} as well as \autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}
+which provides a TOC with parts and paragraphs. Both allow multi-line
+headings and employ a technique for putting page numbers in the right margin
+which was inspired from what \LaTeX2e's |\@dottedtocline| macro does.
+
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup\parindent 0pt \parfillskip 0pt \leftskip 0cm \rightskip 1cm
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 0cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\makebox[.5cm][l]{\etocnumber.}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\mdseries\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip .5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\bfseries \Large My first \etoc: TOC of
+  \autoref{part:overview} (\nameref{part:overview})}
+\tableofcontents \ref {toc:overview}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{A second example}
+\label{sec:secondexample}
+
+This second example displays only the contents from
+\autoref{part:linestyles} and \autoref{part:globalcmds}. This selection
+is done via the technique of \emph{depth tags}, described in
+\autoref{etocsettagdepth} and \autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}. Its
+layout is a bit like the one of the \hyperref[toc:main]{main document
+  TOC}, although the line styles are coded very differently.
+
+\begingroup
+\newcommand*{\DotsAndPage}
+{\nobreak\leaders\hbox{\bfseries\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}%
+         \hfill\nobreak
+         \makebox[\rightskip][r]{\bfseries\normalsize\etocpage}\par}
+
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+{\parindent 0pt
+ \nobreak
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\pagebreak[3]\bigskip}
+{\large\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape\centering
+ \etocifnumbered{Part \etocnumber{} -- }{}\etocname\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \nobreak\medskip
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \pagebreak[1]\smallskip}
+{\normalsize\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape
+ \etocnumber. \etocname\DotsAndPage }
+{\parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax }
+
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+{\leftskip1cm\rightskip .75cm \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax 
+ \nobreak\smallskip}
+{}
+{\footnotesize\sffamily\mdseries\itshape
+ \etocname{} (\etocnumber, p. \etocpage). }
+{\par\medskip}
+
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{none}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+
+\etocsettocstyle {\centering\LARGE\textsc{\contentsname}\par\nobreak\medskip}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+
+The code:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\newcommand*{\DotsAndPage}
+{\nobreak\leaders\hbox{\bfseries\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}%
+         \hfill\nobreak
+         \makebox[\rightskip][r]{\bfseries\normalsize\etocpage}\par}
+
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+{\parindent 0pt
+ \nobreak
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\pagebreak[3]\bigskip}
+{\large\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape\centering
+ \etocifnumbered{Part \etocnumber{} -- }{}\etocname\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \nobreak\medskip
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \pagebreak[1]\smallskip}
+{\normalsize\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape
+ \etocnumber. \etocname\DotsAndPage }
+{\parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax }
+
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+{\leftskip1cm\rightskip .75cm \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax 
+ \nobreak\smallskip}
+{}
+{\footnotesize\sffamily\mdseries\itshape
+ \etocname{} (\etocnumber, p. \etocpage). }
+{\par\medskip}
+
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{none}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+
+\etocsettocstyle {\centering\LARGE\textsc{\contentsname}\par\nobreak\medskip}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Linked list of the main package commands}
+
+\begingroup\raggedcolumns
+\advance\linewidth18pt
+\begin{multicols}{3}\parindent0pt\relax
+  \csb{etocaftercontentshook}\par
+  \csb{etocaftertitlehook}\par
+  \csb{etocaftertochook}\par
+  \csb{etocbeforetitlehook}\par
+  \csb{etocdefaultlines}\par
+  \csb{etocdepthtag.toc}\par
+  \csb{etocdisplay}\par
+  \csb{etocframedstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocframed}\par
+  \csb{etociffirst}\par
+  \csb{etocifnumbered}\par
+  \csb{etocignoredepthtags}\par
+  \csb{etocignoretoctocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocinline}\par
+  \csb{etoclink}\par
+  \csb{etoclocalframed}\par
+  \csb{etoclocalmulticol}\par
+  \csb{etoclocalruled}\par
+  \csb{etocmulticolstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocmulticol}\par
+  \csb{etocname}\par
+  \csb{etocnumber}\par
+  \csb{etocobeydepthtags}\par
+  \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocpage}\par
+  \csb{etocruledstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocruled}\par
+  \csb{etocsetlevel}\par
+  \csb{etocsetnexttocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocsetstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocsettagdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}\par
+  \csb{etocsettocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocsettocstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocskipfirstprefix}\par
+  \csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle}\par
+  \csb{etocstandardlines}\par
+  \csb{etocthelinkedname}\par
+  \csb{etocthelinkednumber}\par
+  \csb{etocthelinkedpage}\par
+  \csb{etocthelink}\par
+  \csb{etocthename}\par
+  \csb{etocthenumber}\par
+  \csb{etocthepage}\par
+  \csb{etoctoccontentsline}\par
+  \csb{etoctoclines}\par
+%\vspace{5\baselineskip}\hrule height 0pt
+\end{multicols}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\clearpage
+% 15 octobre, je teste les tags
+\etocdepthtag.toc {arbitrarily}
+
+\part{Arbitrarily many TOCs, and local ones too}
+% 13 octobre, ceci était une section avant
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocstandardlines
+\localtableofcontents
+
+\section{Labeling and reusing elsewhere}
+
+\etoc allows arbitrarily many \csa{tableofcontents} commands in
+your document. The line styles and the toc display style may of
+course be changed in-between. Furthermore 
+\csa{localtableofcontents} will print local tables of
+contents: \emph{i.e.} all sections and sub-units inside a
+given chapter, or all subsubsections and lower inside a given
+subsection, etc . . .
+
+\etoc allows the labeling of a TOC with (for example)
+\csa{label\{toc:A\}} and will redisplay it elsewhere when
+told \csa{tableofcontents}\csa{ref\{toc:A\}}. The actual
+layout (title inclusive) used for the cloned TOC will be
+decided locally. The line styles and toc display style
+(including the title) will be the current ones and the
+current value of the |tocdepth| counter is obeyed. As an
+example the table of contents of 
+\autoref{part:custom} is in a \hyperref[toc:d]{float} which appears
+\vpageref{toc:d}. 
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+  \begingroup
+  \etocstandardlines 
+  \renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{green!5}}
+  \renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{0pt\relax}
+  \fboxsep1ex 
+  \etocframedstyle [1]{\fbox{\makebox[.5\linewidth]{\etocfontminusone
+        \hyperref[toc:c]{I am from far away}}}}
+  \tableofcontents \label{toc:d} \ref{toc:c}
+  \endgroup
+%%  \centeredline{The original is \hyperref[toc:c]{there}.}
+\end{figure}
+
+We used this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+  \begingroup
+  \etocstandardlines 
+  \renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{green!5}}
+  \renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{0pt\relax}
+  \fboxsep1ex 
+  \etocframedstyle [1]{\fbox{\makebox[.5\linewidth]{\etocfontminusone
+        \hyperref[toc:c]{I am from far away}}}}
+  \tableofcontents \label{toc:d} \ref{toc:c}
+  \endgroup
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+Important: one should not use elsewhere \toc|\ref{toc:d}|. To clone again, one
+must use a reference to the original label: \toc|\ref{toc:c}|.
+
+\section{A powerful functionality of \etoc: the
+  re-assignment of levels with \csbhyp{etocsetlevel}}
+
+The intrinsic levels manipulated by \etoc are numeric: from
+|-2| (which corresponds to |book| in the |memoir| class)
+down (from the big to the small)
+to |5| (|subparagraph|). But the assignment of a numeric level
+to a given name can be modified at any time with the command
+\csb{etocsetlevel}\marg{level\_name}\marg{number}. In conjunction
+with the use of the \LaTeX{} |tocdepth| counter, this has
+powerful applications: \meta{level\_name} does not have to
+coincide with an actual document sectioning command, and \etoc
+can be used to print arbitrary ``lists of things'', using no
+other auxiliary file than the |.toc| file. This is
+explained further in \autoref{part:surprising}.
+
+\begin{framed}
+  It is often said that in the standard classes, the sectioning
+  level of |\part| is |0| in the classes not having a |\chapter|
+  command, and |-1| in classes having a |\chapter| command. This
+  is \emph{correct} for what regards the \emph{automatic
+    numbering}, as is governed by the value of the |secnumdepth|
+  counter; but it is \emph{wrong} for what regards the effect of
+  the |tocdepth| counter: setting the |tocdepth| to |-1| in the
+  |article| class just before |\tableofcontents| does \emph{not}
+  prevent Parts from appearing in the Table of Contents. One has
+  to set it to |-2| for that, whether in the |article| or in the
+  |book| class.
+
+  The canonical levels, a priori known to \etoc, are those of
+  relevance to the \textbf{|tocdepth|} counter in the standard
+  classes and are recapitulated in this table: \centeredline{
+    \fbox{\begin{tabular}{rc}
+        (|memoir| class) book&-2\\ part&-1\\ chapter&0 \\
+        section&1\\ subsection&2 \\
+        subsubsection&3 \\ paragraph&4 \\ subparagraph& 5
+    \end{tabular}}}
+
+\smallskip With \etoc, the user can easily print a local table of
+contents inside a given subsection, where subsubsections will be
+printed in the style of sections, paragraphs in the style of
+subsections, and subparagraphs in the style of subsubsections, if
+so desired. One can also decide to set everything to be at the level
+|6| (never displayed by \etoc), except for example
+paragraphs, promoted to be at level |1|, and then one obtains a nice
+table of contents of all the paragraphs from the document! 
+(|tocdepth| at least |1|)\footnotemark
+\end{framed}
+
+\footnotetext{and one should naturally not print this TOC of paragraphs in
+  compatibility mode, which would insist on inserting a gigantic left
+  margin.}
+
+\section{The \csbhyp{etoc\-set\-toc\-depth} and  
+  \csbhyp{etoc\-set\-next\-toc\-depth} commands} 
+\label{etocsettocdepth}
+\label{etocsetnexttocdepth}
+
+The |tocdepth| counter has no bearing on what gets written to the |.toc| file;
+its action is only on the actual typesetting of the table of contents: in the
+standard classes there is only one |\tableofcontents| possible, whereas with
+\etoc, arbitrarily many are allowed, so one may change |tocdepth| to the
+appropriate value (which decides the finest sectioning level displayed) again
+and again each time a table of contents needs to be typeset.
+
+\etoc provides \csb {etocsettocdepth}\marg{level} whose mandatory argument is
+either 
+numeric (from |-3| to |5|) or a division name such as |subsection| or
+|subsubsection| or any name previously declared to \etoc with
+\csb{etocsetlevel} (the keywords |all| and |none| are recognized, although not
+corresponding to a document division). 
+This does the appropriate |\setcounter{tocdepth}{numeric_level}|.
+
+As is explained in the next subsection, |tocdepth| is used by |hyperref|, and
+one must take steps to prevent its changes from influencing the bookmarks, too.
+So, \etoc has \csb {etocsetnexttocdepth}\marg{level} whose influence ceases
+immediately after the next table of contents. Thus, |\invisibletableofcontents|
+is essentially |\etocsetnexttocdepth{none}\tableofcontents|.
+
+The simplest course is thus to have after |\begin{document}| and before the
+  first |\tableofcontents| a single instance of the \csb{etocsettocdepth}
+  command, with argument the deepest level (or most commonly used deepest level)
+  among the tables of contents of the document, and to use locally,
+  where needed, \csb{etocsetnexttocdepth} before |\tableofcontents| or
+  |\localtableofcontents|.
+
+\subsection{The hyperref option \emph{bookmarksdepth}}
+\label{ssec:bookmarksdepth}
+
+When modifying the counter |tocdepth| for the purposes of
+multiple uses of \toc or \localtoc, one should be aware that
+package |hyperref| by default takes into account the
+\emph{current} value of the |tocdepth| counter to decide
+whether the |pdf| file will contain a bookmark corresponding
+to sectioning commands encountered in the source file. Thus,
+one typically needs to reset |tocdepth| to its previous
+value after having temporarily modified it for a given table of
+contents.
+
+Or, there is the \emph{bookmarksdepth=n} option of package
+|hyperref|, with \emph{n} the desired document bookmarks
+maximal depth, which can be numeric or the name of a level known to
+|hyperref|. This documentation previously passed |bookmarksdepth=3| as
+option to |hyperref|, so even if |tocdepth| was left to |1|
+by inadvertance after printing a certain table of contents 
+this did not modify the bookmark tree of the |pdf| file. Now that
+\csb{etocsetnexttocdepth} has been added to the package, we have used it
+systematically and there was no need for  |bookmarksdepth=3| anymore.
+
+\section{The command \csbhyp{etoc\-set\-toc\-dep\-th.toc}}
+\label{etocsettocdepth.toc}
+
+This command \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} implements some functionality of
+|tocvsec2|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tocvsec2}. I thank D.B. for drawing
+  my attention to the incompatibility of this package with \etoc.}, a package
+which however was incompatible with \etoc (it can still be used for its
+|secnumdepth|-related commands, but its |toc|-related activities will get
+canceled by \etoc) and more-or-less designed for a single table of contents.
+
+The action of \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} is totally different than the one of
+\csb{etocsettocdepth}. Rather than modifying the |tocdepth| counter immediately,
+it adds a line to the |.toc| file which, when executed inside a table of
+contents will enact this change. 
+
+The command \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}, like
+\csb{etocsettocdepth}, accepts both numeric and named
+arguments. In the case of a named argument, the actual numeric
+value to be used is not yet decided at the time the |.toc|
+file is created; it will be the value currently specified for
+the named level at the time each table of contents (not having
+done |\etocignoretoctocdepth|) is typeset. 
+
+The |tocdepth| counter will never be set to a value finer than its initial value
+at the start of the table of contents: so adding commands
+\csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} in the document is a way to \emph{restrict} locally
+the depth of the table of contents. For example to prevent inclusion in the
+tables of contents of the sub-sub-sections of a given chapter.
+
+This
+{\fbox{gets executed in ALL tables of contents.}}
+
+\subsection{The commands \csbhyp{etocobeytoctocdepth} and \csbhyp{etocignoretoctocdepth}}
+\label{etocobeytoctocdepth}
+\label{etocignoretoctocdepth}
+
+
+So \csb{etocignoretoctocdepth} is provided to cancel the
+\csa{etocsettocdepth.toc} mechanism when
+needed; and \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth} will
+re-activate it. The package does initially \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth}.
+
+
+\section{The commands \csbhyp{etoc\-depth\-tag.toc} and \csbhyp{etocsettagdepth}}
+\label{etocdepthtag.toc}
+\label{etocsettagdepth}
+
+As mentioned above, when the argument to  \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} isn't
+numeric but a named level the actual numeric level used is decided at the time
+the TOC gets typeset, thus with the \emph{shuffling abilities of \etoc}, one may
+obtain a very flexible control in the following way: one first declares with
+\csb{etocsetlevel} some
+dummy named level, say |partIII|, assigning it the invisible numeric level |6|.
+Then before the actual third |\part| command in the source one inserts
+\csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}|{partIII}|. At the location where the effect should
+cease one inserts in the source \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}|{all}|. It is now
+possible to specify, each time one wants to typeset a TOC, what will be the
+finest level for the entries originating in the third part: one just has to do
+\csa{etocsetlevel}|{partIII}{1}| for example. This will limit to sections
+(if |tocdepth| was at least at that level at the time \toc is encountered).
+
+This method has some limitations:
+\begin{enumerate*}[label={(\roman*)}]
+  \item the second argument to \csb{etocsetlevel} must be numeric,
+  \item it can not be set to |-3| (which would be necessary if one wanted to
+    exclude an entire Book from a TOC in a |memoir| document with multiple such
+    Books \dots admittedly a possibly rare case!),
+  \item it is a bit of a hack as |partIII| is not a real division unit, but just
+    a \emph{tag}.
+\end{enumerate*} 
+
+Release |1.07h| has a command \csb{etocdepthtag.toc} which
+makes it easier to achieve this variable local control of the |tocdepth| at the
+time of typesetting TOCs.
+
+It is used as \csb{etocdepthtag.toc}\marg{tag\_name}, where the \meta{tag\_name}
+is anything, and this will put the tag in the |.toc| file. When typesetting a
+TOC, one issues a series of commands
+\csb{etocsettagdepth}\marg{tag\_name}\marg{level} where the \meta{level} may be
+either numeric (from |-3| to |5|) or the name of a division unit known to \etoc,
+or |none| or |all|. The effect of the tag inside the |.toc| file will then be to
+set the |tocdepth| counter to the desired value, in real time (as mentioned
+already, this can not get finer than the initial value of |tocdepth| at the
+start of the TOC).
+
+The added flexibility is thus that \csb{etocsetlevel} has not been used in a
+kind of hacky way, that one may use named level depths, and the
+keywords |none| and |all|.
+
+As usual, once the tag depths have been set, they remain in effect until getting
+redefined or seeing their scope expire via the closing of a group or of a
+surrounding 
+environment. For an example, see \autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}.
+
+
+\subsection{The commands \csbhyp{etocobeydepthtags} and \csbhyp{etocignoredepthtags}}
+\label{etocobeydepthtags}
+\label{etocignoredepthtags}
+
+
+After \csb{etocignoredepthtags}, the |.toc| depth tags are ignored (but
+\csb{etocdepthtag.toc} still works). The package does initially
+\csb{etocobeydepthtags} which makes \etoc react to the found tags in the
+|.toc| file. 
+
+
+
+
+
+\section{Adding commands to the \texorpdfstring{\texttt{.toc}}{.toc} file}
+\label{sec:addingtotoc}
+
+We described above \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} and \csb{etocdepthtag.toc} which
+both insert commands inside the |.toc| file. An even more general mechanism of
+adding ``action tags'' to the |.toc| file could be envisioned, but this would
+just be a wrapper for direct use of |\addtocontents{toc}{\something}|.
+
+One should be cautious when adding in this way
+things
+to the |.toc| file. For example, inserting
+\csa{addtocontents}|{toc}{\string\clearpage}|
+just
+before a \csa{part} to fix the problem when some part entry (in
+the table of contents) is isolated at the bottom of one page,
+will cause problems with multiple TOCs: this \csa{clearpage}
+will be executed by \etoc each time a \toc or \localtoc
+command is encountered! The more prudent thing is to do
+rather: {\csa{addtocontents}|{toc}{\string\myclearpage}|,}
+to have a |\let\myclearpage\relax| at the top level of the
+document and  to use where needed something like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\let\myclearpage\clearpage
+\tableofcontents
+\let\myclearpage\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+The |memoir| class has the command \csa{settocdepth} which
+writes a \csa{changetoc\-depth} command inside the |.toc| file.
+This will impact the typesetting by \etoc of \emph{all} tables
+of contents, with (possibly) unexpected results: imagine the
+document has \csa{settocdepth}|{chapter}| at some point to
+avoid having the sections from subsequent chapters be listed
+in the main table of contents. Then a local table of contents
+in one of these chapters will print a title but will be
+without any entry. 
+
+As the |memoir| class by itself allows multiple\toc
+  these issues already arise there,
+  independently of \etoc, see page 170 of the |memoir|
+  manual.
+
+For this specific issue, the commands \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc},
+\csb{etocignoretoctocdepth} and \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth} are the way to go; or
+their variants \csb{etocdepthtag.toc} and \csb{etocsettagdepth}.
+
+As an aside, any |\setcounter{tocdepth}{n}| command added directly to the |.toc|
+file sees its effect (since release |1.07g|) canceled at the end of each table
+of contents, which automatically does a |\setcounter{tocdepth}{previous_value}|
+with the value active on entering the table of contents.
+
+\subsection{The hyperref option \emph{hidelinks}}\label{ssec:hidelinks}
+
+The colored links (and also the rectangle links) are a bit
+annoying when used in tables of contents, especially when
+the document uses \etoc and has plenty of them! One may wish
+for having colored links, \emph{except} for those within
+table of contents!
+Indeed, why would things in TOCs need to be either framed in
+rectangles or colored, when the user \emph{already expects
+  them to be links}?
+
+I use the following trick:  either in the preamble using
+|\AtBeginDocument|, or right after |\begin{document}|, I
+  have the command
+  \centeredline{|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\hypersetup{hidelinks}}|}
+
+  \begin{framed}
+    All TOCs typeset by \etoc have their contents done
+    within a group (as if enclosed in an environment). So
+    the command \csa{hypersetup}|{hidelinks}| will be
+    executed by \emph{each} TOC, but its effect will be
+    limited to that TOC. 
+  \end{framed}
+
+  I found out experimentally that the option |hidelinks| could
+  indeed be set many times with |\hypersetup| (this is not the
+  case of all |hyperref| options).
+
+
+
+\section{Two Examples}
+
+\subsection{A Beautiful Thesis example}
+
+Here is another relatively  simple example of use of the package
+functionalities. 
+Let us set up some line styles. We choose a style for sections and
+sub-sections which would be suitable for, respectively, sections and
+sub-sections in an average length memoir. The line style specifications have
+some redundancy for clarity, and do not care about what to do at possible page
+breaks. Also, they do not worry about potential multi-column use.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup % we start a group to keep the style changes local
+\newlength{\tocleftmargin}    \setlength{\tocleftmargin}{5cm}
+\newlength{\tocrightmargin}   \setlength{\tocrightmargin}{1cm}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}              % will pretend to be a Chapter
+{\addvspace{1ex}\parfillskip0pt
+ \leftskip\tocleftmargin            % (already done in title)
+ \rightskip\the\tocrightmargin plus 1fil
+ \parindent0pt\color{cyan}}         % (already done)
+{\bfseries\LARGE\upshape\addvspace{1ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{Chapter\hspace{.5em}{\etocnumber}\hspace{.75cm}}\etocname
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}           % will pretend to be a Section
+{}
+{\mdseries\large\addvspace{.5ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{\etocnumber\hspace{.75cm}}\textit{\etocname}%
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\def\tmptitle{My Beautiful Thesis}
+\etocsettocstyle{\color{cyan}\parindent0pt \leftskip\tocleftmargin
+  \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\ 
+  \huge\textit{\tmptitle}\par}{\bigskip}
+
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\begingroup
+\newlength{\tocleftmargin}
+\setlength{\tocleftmargin}{5cm}
+\newlength{\tocrightmargin}
+\setlength{\tocrightmargin}{1cm}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\addvspace{1ex}\parfillskip0pt
+ \leftskip\tocleftmargin
+ \rightskip\the\tocrightmargin plus 1fil
+ \parindent0pt\color{cyan}}
+{\bfseries\LARGE\upshape\addvspace{1ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{Chapter\hspace{.5em}{\etocnumber}\hspace{.75cm}}\etocname
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{}
+{\mdseries\large\addvspace{.5ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{\etocnumber\hspace{.75cm}}\textit{\etocname}%
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\def\tmptitle{My Beautiful Thesis}
+
+\etocsettocstyle{\color{cyan}\parindent0pt\leftskip\tocleftmargin
+  \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\ 
+  \huge\textit{\tmptitle}\par}{\bigskip}
+
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}
+% And again, for the fun of it:
+% \def\tmptitle{My Very Beautiful Thesis}
+% \tableofcontents \ref{toc:c}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\subsection{A TOC with a background color}\label{ssec:again}
+
+Let us now try out some more sophisticated line styles. The
+display will use the \csa{etocframedstyle} package command, which
+requires that the produced table of contents fits on a single
+page.
+We wrap it up in a \hyperref[toc:floating]{figure environment} showing up
+\vpageref{toc:floating}. 
+
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp!]\centering
+\colorlet{subsecnum}{black}
+\colorlet{secbackground}{green!30}
+\colorlet{tocbackground}{red!20!green!20}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 3cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width 1cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerbottomsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand\shiftedwhiterule[2]{%
+    \hbox to \linewidth{\color{white}%
+    \hskip#1\leaders\vrule height1pt\hfil}\nointerlineskip
+\vskip#2}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{\leftskip}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\footnotesize
+\leftskip2.3cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip.5cm\noindent
+\hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to .5cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.1cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{1.5cm}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\small
+\leftskip1.5cm\hangindent.8cm\rightskip.5cm\noindent
+\hbox to .75cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to .5cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.1cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+{}
+
+\newcommand{\coloredstuff}[2]{%
+            \leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parskip0pt
+            \fboxsep0pt % \colorbox uses \fboxsep also when no frame!
+       \noindent\colorbox{secbackground}
+               {\parbox{\linewidth}{%
+                    \vskip5pt
+                    {\noindent\color{#1}#2\par}\nointerlineskip
+                    \vskip3pt}}%
+       \par\nointerlineskip}
+
+% v1.07l on the occasion of traduction into German documentation:
+     % APRIL 26, 2014 Improvement in the section style for better placement of
+     % page number when the section name is more than one line long. Use of
+     % \makebox rather than \hbox, to be more LaTeX like.
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\coloredstuff{blue}
+     {\hfil \bfseries\large Contents of Part One\hfil}}
+{\vskip3pt\sffamily\small}
+{\coloredstuff{blue}
+    {\leftskip1.5cm\rightskip.5cm\parfillskip-\rightskip
+     \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[.5cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+     \etocname\hfill{\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocpage\hspace{.1cm}}}}%
+ \vskip6pt}
+{}
+
+
+% attention car \ref{toc:floating} fera référence au compteur de
+% toutes les toc, pas visibletoc. 
+
+\etocframedstyle[1]{}
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:floating} \ref{toc:overview}
+\vspace{-\baselineskip}
+\centeredline{|\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}| 
+(\emph{cf.} \autoref{ssec:again} and \hyperref[toc:clone]{this other toc})}
+\end{figure}
+
+The actual design is not pre-built in \etoc; it uses its `framed' style with a
+background color. The frame borders have been set to have the same color as the
+one serving as background for the entire thing. This design (with other colors)
+is in use also for \hyperref[toc:clone]{this other toc}, and the
+reader is referred to its \hyperref[ssec:tocclone]{subsection} for the
+coding used.
+
+% 11 octobre 2013 ceci était une section avant:
+% (17 octobre, je m'aperçois qu'à cause des différents chgts, des
+% sous-sections devenant des sections etc... \thisspecialstats ici ne
+% faisait pas du tout des statistiques; vaut mieux supprimer et faire
+% simplement \localtableofcontents pour maintenir le même layout.)
+
+% les \clearpage sont embêtants; surtout si je prétends qu'on peut
+% recompiler facilement sous d'autres conditions...
+
+% on va plutôt faire un \vspace suffisant, cela sera un moindre mal
+
+%\vspace{1cm}
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {surprising}
+\part{Surprising uses of \etoc}
+\label{part:surprising}
+
+\thispartstats %% (pas de sous-section)
+
+\etocstandardlines
+\etocsettocstyle {}{}
+\localtableofcontents
+
+\section{The TOC of TOCs}
+
+\begingroup % \endgroup just after the \tableofcontents command
+\etocinline
+\etocsetlevel{part}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}
+\etocsetstyle{visibletoc}
+    {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+    {, }
+    {{\color{niceone}\etocname}}
+    {}
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{visibletoc}
+
+
+Here is the numbered and linked list of all tables of contents which are
+displayed within this document:\footnote{The TOCs put in
+  floats may change the order: the numbers are listed
+  in the order the TOCs are typeset in the document; but the numbering
+  itself is from the order of the TOCs in the \emph{source} of
+  this document... }
+\tableofcontents\endgroup. And to obtain
+it here we just wrote:\par\smallskip 
+{\leftskip1cm\rightskip2cm
+  \ttfamily\small\baselineskip11pt \noindent Here is the
+  numbered and linked list of all tables of contents which are
+  displayed within this
+  document:~\string\tableofcontents.\par}
+
+  The preparatory work was the following. First, we defined a
+  counter |visibletoc| whose vocation is to get incremented at
+  each displayed toc. \etoc has its own private counter but it
+  counts all TOCs, even those not displayed because the |tocdepth|
+  value was |-2| or |-3|.
+
+  We could have added manually |\refstepcounter{visibletoc}|
+  and |\label| commands at all suitable locations in the
+  document source, and we would then have used here |\ref|
+  commands, but this imposes heavy manual editing of the source.
+
+  There is a much better way: there is a hook
+  \csb{etocaftertitlehook} and we told it to increment the
+  |visibletoc| counter and to write a line to the |.toc| file,
+  in a manner analogous to what sectioning commands such as
+  |chapter|, |section|, or |subsection| do. As \etoc
+  increments its own private counter even before typesetting
+  the title of a table of contents, this provides (most of the
+  time) a better link destination than any counter manipulated
+  from inside \csa{etocaftertitlehook} (for which the link
+  would target the area just after the title). So, rather than
+  including |\refstepcounter{visibletoc}| inside
+  \csa{etocaftertitlehook}, we just put there
+  |\stepcounter{visibletoc}| followed by the command
+  \csb{etoctoccontentsline}|{visibletoc}{\thevisibletoc}|. This \etoc
+  command \csb{etoctoccontentsline}\marg{level\_name}\marg{name} has the same
+  effect as:
+  \centeredline{|    ||\addcontentsline{toc}|\marg{level\_name}\marg{name}}
+  but its usefulness is to circumvent\footnote{using \csa{addtocontents} rather
+    than \csa{addcontentsline}} the patching for automatic creation
+  of bookmarks done to \csa{addcontentsline} by the |hyperref| package, 
+  as pdf bookmarks don't make 
+  much sense here (and would elicit a complaint
+  of |hyperref| that the bookmark level is `unknown').\footnote{%
+  The package provides a starred variant
+  \staritb{etoctoccontentsline}, which does allow the creation
+  of bookmarks and has a third mandatory argument which is the
+  Level to be used by these bookmarks; depending on the context
+  the starred as well as the non-starred variants may be
+  profitably preceded by \csa{phantomsection}.}
+
+  Finally, the preamble of the document did
+  |\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{6}|. The level |6| (or anything
+  with a higher number) is ignored, even if |tocdepth| has
+  value |10| for example; this is independently of whether \etoc
+  uses the document class default line styles or its own line
+  styles, or the ones defined by the user with the
+  \csa{etocsetstyle} command. So there is no need to worry that
+  something could go wrong. 
+
+  Then, only here we have set |\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}|. And to display
+  only this kind of entries we assign temporarily to |part| and |chapter| level
+  |1| (or anything higher than zero) and set |tocdepth| to the value |0|. We
+  also did \csa{etocsetstyle\{visibletoc\}\{\string\etocskipfirstprefix\}\{,
+    \}\{\string\etocname\}\{\}} which defines an inline display with the comma
+  as separator. Finally, as \etoc issues |\par| automatically by default just
+  before typesetting a table of contents, we used the command \csb{etocinline}
+  (also known as \cs{etocnopar}) which turns off this behavior.
+
+Here are the implementation details:
+
+\begingroup
+\begin{verbatim}
+   < in the preamble >
+\newcounter{visibletoc}
+\renewcommand{\etocaftertitlehook}
+   {\stepcounter{visibletoc}\etoctoccontentsline{visibletoc}{\thevisibletoc}}
+\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{6}
+\begin{document}
+   < document body >
+\subsection{Surprising uses of etoc}
+\begingroup
+    \etocinline
+    \etocsetlevel{part}{1}
+    % \etocsetlevel{chapter}{1} % (no chapters in scrartcl class)
+    \etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}
+    \etocsetstyle{visibletoc}
+        {\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }{{\color{niceone}\etocname}}{}
+    \etocsettocstyle{}{}     % don't set any title, rules or frame or multicol!
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth{visibletoc} % display only the `visibletoc' entries from .toc
+
+Here is the numbered and linked list of all tables of contents which are
+displayed within this document: \tableofcontents.
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\endgroup
+
+After |\etocsetstyle{visibletoc}{..}{..}{..}{..}|, all future TOCs (not in
+compatibility mode) will use the
+defined style for level |0| (which is normally the level for
+chapters). To keep these changes strictly local the simplest
+manner is to put everything inside a group.
+
+The \autoref{subsec:interverting} gives another use of the
+shuffling of levels. 
+
+
+\section{Arbitrary ``Lists Of...'', \csbhyp{etoctoccontentsline}}
+\label{etoctoccontentsline}
+
+This idea of interverting the levels is very powerful and allows
+to let \etoc display lists of arbitrary things contained in the
+document. All of that still
+using nothing else than the |.toc| file! 
+Example: imagine a document with dozens of
+exercises, perhaps defined as |\newtheorem{exercise}{}[section]|. Let
+us explain how to instruct \etoc to display an hyperlinked list
+of all these exercises. For this we put in the preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newtheorem{exerci}{}[section] 
+    % the exercice number will be recoverable via \etocname: v--here--v
+ \newcommand*{\exercisetotoc}{\etoctoccontentsline{exercise}{\theexerci}}
+ \newenvironment{exercise}{\begin{exerci}\exercisetotoc}{\end{exerci}}
+ \etocsetlevel{exercise}{6}
+\end{verbatim}
+In this way, \csa{etocname} will give the exercise number (but \csa{etocnumber}
+will be empty). Had we used instead
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand*{\exercisetotoc}
+    {\etoctoccontentsline{exercise}{\protect\numberline{\theexerci}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+the exercise number would then have been available via \csa{etocnumber}, and
+\csa{etocname} would have been empty. It doesn't matter which one of the two
+methods is used. The \etoc command \csa{etoctoccontentsline}|{..}{..}| is
+provided as a substitute to \csa{addcon\-tentsline}|{toc}{..}{..}|: this is to
+avoid the patching which is done by |hyperref| to \csa{addcontentsline} in its
+process of creation of bookmarks. If one wants to authorize |hyperref| to create
+bookmarks at a specific level \meta{n}, one can use (here with \meta{n}$=$|2|)
+the starred variant \starit{etoctoccontentsline} which has an additional
+argument:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\exercisetotoc}{\etoctoccontentsline*{exercise}{\theexerci}{2}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The counter |exerci| is already
+incremented by the |exerci| theorem environment, and
+provides the correct destination for the link added by package
+|hyperref|. The command \csa{exercisetotoc} adds for each exercise a line
+to the |.toc| file, corresponding to a fictitious document
+unit with name `|exercise|'. A
+four-column list, including the sections, can then be
+typeset with the following code:
+\begin{verbatim}
+  \etocsetnexttocdepth{2}     % sections are at level 1 and will show up
+\begingroup
+  \etocsetlevel{exercise}{2}   % but:
+  \etocsetlevel{chapter}{3}    %     no chapters
+  \etocsetlevel{subsection}{3} %     no subsections
+  \etocsetlevel{part}{3}       %     no parts
+  \etocsetstyle{exercise}{}{}  % \etocname = exercise number
+    {\noindent\etocname\strut\leaders\etoctoclineleaders\hfill\etocpage\par}
+    {\pagebreak[2]\vskip\baselineskip}
+  \etocsetstyle{section}{}{}
+    {\noindent\strut{\bfseries\large\etocnumber\hskip.5em\etocname}\par
+     \nopagebreak[3]}{}
+  \etocruledstyle[4]{\Large\bfseries List of the exercises}
+  \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}
+  \tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\section{A TOC with a fancy layout}
+
+Here is  a table of contents where
+the sections from a given chapter are to be represented by a number
+range (like 18--22 for a given chapter, 42--49 for another one ...
+of course to be inserted automatically in the TOC). 
+
+This is not an image inclusion, the TOC is produced from its original
+|tex| source inserted in this document after replacement of 
+|part|, |chapter| or |section| with |dummypart|, |dummychapter| and
+|dummysection| (and there is also a dummy page count).  We
+copied the line styles used in the original and
+displayed the table of contents following:
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummypart}  {-1} \etocsetlevel{part}   {2}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummychapter}{0} \etocsetlevel{chapter}{2}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummysection}{1} \etocsetlevel{section}{2}
+                    \etocsetnexttocdepth{dummysection}
+\end{verbatim}
+Each chapter displays the numbers of only the first and the last sections it
+  contains. See the
+source file |etoc.dtx| for the details of how this is done. 
+
+Another technique for doing this kind of things is explained in 
+  \autoref{ssec:statistics}.  
+
+\begingroup
+
+    \etocsetlevel{dummypart}{-1}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummychapter}{0}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummysection}{1}
+    \etocsetlevel{part}{2}
+    \etocsetlevel{chapter}{2}
+    \etocsetlevel{section}{2}
+
+    \newif\ifextraidone
+    \newif\ifextraiidone
+
+    \etocsetstyle{dummypart}
+    {}
+    {}
+    {\begin{center}\Large\bfseries PART \etocnumber
+    \ifextraiidone\\\etocname.\fi\end{center}
+    \ifextraidone\else
+    \noindent\hskip.7\linewidth
+        \hbox to .2\linewidth
+% février (ou janvier?) 2013
+% je modifie ici en ajoutant un \hss, pour compenser la plus petite
+% taille de txrm. Ok.
+        {\hss\small\textsc{\bfseries Sections.\hss Page.}}\par\fi
+    \extraidonetrue
+    }
+    {}
+
+    \newcommand\mytocleaders{\hbox to .125\linewidth{...\hss}}
+    \etocsetstyle{dummychapter}
+    {}
+    {\par\noindent\etocifnumbered
+        {\makebox[.15\linewidth][r]{\bfseries\etocnumber.}}
+        {\hspace*{.15\linewidth}}}
+    {\hbox to .65\linewidth
+        {\hspace{1em}\etocname\leaders\mytocleaders\hss}%
+     \hskip-.1\linewidth
+     \hbox to .2\linewidth{\hspace{1.5em}...\hss
+                    \etocifnumbered
+                        {\etocpage}
+                        {\ifextraiidone\else\etocpage\fi}}%
+     \hskip-.2\linewidth
+    }
+    {}
+
+    \newbox\forsectionnumbers
+    \makeatletter
+% 21 février 2013: je rajoute \color@begingroup et \color@endgroup
+    \etocsetstyle{dummysection}
+    {\setbox\forsectionnumbers=\hbox to .1\linewidth
+        \bgroup\color@begingroup\hss\etocskipfirstprefix}
+    {\@gobble}
+    {\etocnumber---}
+    {\etocnumber\color@endgroup\egroup
+    % for reasons I do not quite understand, in some pdf viewers the dots
+    % do not completely disappear if here \fboxsep0pt is used.
+    % (problèmes liés à l'anti-aliasing, sur Mac OS X, Skim, Preview...)
+    % (j'ai maintenu ici la méthode de mon post sur stackexchange, mais
+    %  sans doute je pourrais réfléchir à une autre façon évitant d'avoir à
+    %  « effacer ») 
+        \fboxsep=.5pt\colorbox{white}{\box\forsectionnumbers}\par
+        \ifextraiidone\else
+            \begin{center}\bfseries Concord.\end{center}
+            \noindent\makebox[.15\linewidth][r]{\textsc{\bfseries Lesson.}}\par
+        \fi\extraiidonetrue
+    }
+    \makeatother
+
+    \renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+
+    \etocruledstyle[1]{%
+        \parbox{\linewidth}{%
+            \centering
+            \textsc{\bfseries\LARGE\MakeUppercase{Table of Contents}}\\
+            \rule{.2\linewidth}{2pt}}%
+    }
+        
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth{dummysection}
+
+    \tableofcontents
+   
+\makeatletter
+    \def\adddummysection {\stepcounter{dummysection}%
+      \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummysection}{\protect\numberline{\thedummysection}}%
+                   {\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+ 
+    \def\adddummychapter #1{\stepcounter{dummychapter}%
+      \advance\dummypage2
+      \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummychapter}{\protect\numberline{\thedummychapter}#1}%
+                   {\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+
+
+    \def\adddummychapno #1{\advance\dummypage2
+      \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummychapter}{#1}{\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+
+    \def\adddummypart #1{\stepcounter{dummypart}%
+       \advance\dummypage4
+       \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummypart}{\protect\numberline{\Roman{dummypart}}#1}%
+                     {\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+\makeatother
+    
+    \newcount\dummypage \dummypage-1
+
+    \adddummypart {}
+    
+    \adddummychapno {Introductory}
+
+    \newcount\tempcount
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<8
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Concord of Subject and Verb}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<17
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Concord of Substantive and Adjective}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<22
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Concord of Relative and its Antecedent}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<25
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummypart {Government}
+
+    \adddummychapter {The Accusative Case}
+
+    \adddummychapno {General uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<30
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Particular uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<37
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Verbs governing two Accusatives}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<41
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {The Causal}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<49
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {The Instrumental Case}
+
+    \adddummychapno {General uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<54
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Particular uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<59
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {The Dative Case}
+
+    \adddummychapno {General uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<65
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Particular uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<71
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {The Ablative Case}
+
+    \adddummychapno {General uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<75
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Particular uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<86
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {The Locative Case}
+
+    \adddummychapno {General uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<92
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Particular uses}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<100
+    \repeat
+\endgroup
+
+\section{Another compatibility mode}
+
+As explained in \autoref{ssub:compat}, the commands
+\csa{etocstandardlines} and \csa{etocstandarddisplaystyle} tell \etoc to,
+essentially, act as an observer. The document class layout for the table of
+contents is then perfectly obeyed. There is no way to customize this standard
+layout (change fonts, margins, vertical spacings, etc...) from within the
+package. For this, use some package dedicated to this task; because \etoc either
+is (temporarily perhaps) in compatibility mode with no customization on its part
+possible, or the user has specified the layout in \csa{etocsetstyle} commands
+(and \csa{etocsettocstyle}) and is (supposedly...) in complete control.
+
+Well, there is actually an alternative. It is possible to use the
+\csa{etocsetstyle} commands to recreate an artificial compatibility mode, in
+order to achieve effects like the following, all things being otherwise equal to
+the document class defaults:
+\begin{enumerate}[noitemsep]
+\item get the |hyperref| link to encapsulate only the names, but not the numbers
+  of each entry of the table of contents,
+\item use the document class style for chapters and sections, but modify it only
+  for subsections,
+\item do either of the above only for some portions of the table of contents.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Here is how to proceed. One puts in the preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\MyStandardTOC}{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\savedpartline\l@part
+  \let\savedchapterline\l@chapter  %% remove if article/scrartcl class
+  \let\savedsectionline\l@section
+  \let\savedsubsectionline\l@subsection 
+  % and so on if \subsubsection, etc... is used
+  % 
+  % for the book or article classes:
+  \etocsetstyle{part}{}{}
+    {\savedpartline{\etocnumber\hspace{1em}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  % for the scrbook or scrartcl classes:
+  \etocsetstyle{part}{}{}
+    {\savedpartline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  % identical in book/article/scrbook/scrartcl classes:
+  \etocsetstyle{chapter}{}{}   %%% only for book and scrbook
+    {\savedchapterline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  \etocsetstyle{section}{}{} 
+    {\savedsectionline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  \etocsetstyle{subsection}{}{}
+    {\savedsubsectionline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  % etc... if further sectioning units are used
+  % (see the text for what to do with the memoir class)
+  \etocstandarddisplaystyle % this is for the title, page-marks, etc...
+  \tableofcontents     
+  \endgroup}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+Of course if the document has only one table of contents then there is no need
+to put the commands inside a macro, or even inside a group.\footnote{and if
+moreover one just wants to keep the same layout as in the default, one may
+question why using \etoc... there is \emph{one} good reason: numbers and names
+are separately \texttt{hyperref} links, whereas normally there is only one link
+holding both the number and the name corresponding to one toc entry.} With these
+commands 
+\etoc will construct a TOC completely identical to what would have been done by
+one of the document class: |article|, |book|, |scrartcl|, |scrbook|. \footnote{For the
+|memoir| class, one needs a bit more: each of the command \csa{booknumberline},
+\csa{partnumberline} and \csa{chapternumberline} will have to be saved with a
+\csa{let}, and, one then specifies:
+\centeredline{%
+\csa{etocsetstyle\{chapter\}\{\}\{\}\{\string\savedchapterline\{%
+\string\savedchapternumberline}}
+\hbox to \linewidth{\hfil\hfil \ttfamily 
+        \{\csa{etocnumber}\}\csa{etocname}\}\{\csa{etocpage}\}\}\{\}\hfil} 
+(and analogously for |part|, respectively |book|).}
+The number and the name of each entry are each separately an |hyperref| link, as
+is always the case with \etoc, when not in compatibility mode. Replacing
+\csa{etocnumber} with \csa{etocthenumber} will give a TOC where the numbers are
+not links anymore, but the names still are. Or one may decide to use \csa{etocthename}
+and keep an hyperlinked number with
+\csa{etocnumber}. 
+
+Here is a subtler example where one only marginally modifies the
+sections (adding color to the number and removing the |hyperref| link) and keeps
+the subsections as in the default, \emph{except} for those of one specific
+section, for which the layout is completely modified:
+\MyQuasiStandardTOC{\ref{toc:overview}}
+\bigskip
+This example only has sections and subsections, and the code used in \csa{MyStandardTOC} was:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}{}
+  {\ifnum\etocthenumber=3
+      \etocsetstyle{subsection}
+        {\par\nopagebreak\begingroup
+         \leftskip1.5em \rightskip\@tocrmarg \parfillskip\@flushglue 
+         \parindent 0pt \normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+         % \columnsep1em
+         % \begin{minipage}{\dimexpr\linewidth-\leftskip-\rightskip\relax}%
+         % \begin{multicols}{2}%
+         \etocskipfirstprefix}
+        {\allowbreak\,--\,}
+        {\etocname\ \textup{(\etocnumber)}}
+        {.\par\endgroup}%
+        % {.\par\end{multicols}\end{minipage}\par\endgroup}%
+    \else
+      \etocsetstyle{subsection}
+       {}{}
+       {\savedsubsectionline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}
+       {}%
+    \fi} 
+  {\savedsectionline{\numberline{{\color{cyan}\etocthenumber}}\etocname}{\etocpage}}
+  {}%
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Notice the page head-mark added by this standard TOC. Sections and subsections
+are printed exactly as in the default (except for the subsections of one
+specific user-chosen section and except for the color of the section numbers),
+with no need to specify explicitely any length, font or other formatting
+instructions. But we had to examine the |scrartcl| sources to determine what to
+use for \csa{leftskip} and \csa{rightskip} for our customized section
+entries.
+
+
+\section{The TOC as a tree}\label{tocastree}
+
+Using |tikz|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/pgf}} and the package
+|forest|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/forest}} we shall display the table
+of contents of this part as a tree. The technique is to
+use the \etoc modified command \csa{tableofcontents} not for typesetting, but to
+prepare a macro, or rather here a \emph{token list} variable, with all the
+instructions to be executed later. \textsc{Leslie Lamport}'s book has no mention
+whatsoever of token lists, and \LaTeX{} gives the impression to not really
+expect the general user to ever hear about them (or delimited macros); this
+whole section and the next are thus for 
+advanced users.
+
+Putting the \csa{etocnumber} and \csa{etocname}
+commands in \csa{treetok} would be of no use: to which number or name would they
+then refer to, in a delayed execution? 
+
+We need to store, not the macro names, but the macro contents. And also we wish
+to maintain the correct |hyperref| hyperlinks.\footnote{This manual up to the
+version of May 14, 2013 used package |tikz-qtree| but there were problems with
+hyperlinks. No such problem arises either when using |forest| or the native
+|tikz| syntax for trees (which will be illustrated in the next section).} The
+hyperlink information put by \etoc inside \csa{etocname}, etc\dots, is just a
+pointer, not storable for later use; but the package provides
+\csa{etocthelinkednumber}, \csa{etocthelinkedname}, and \csa{etocthelinkedpage}
+whose contents contain the hyperlink in a form which can be stored and later
+reused.
+
+For this |forest| tree we have designed very special \etoc styles for sections
+and subsections. They use a token list register called |\treetok| and a
+macro |\appendtotok| whose r\^ole is to append to a given token list variable
+the contents of a macro given as second argument. All this will happen in
+reaction to a |\tableofcontents| command, but \emph{nothing} has yet been
+printed in the process.\footnote{There is always a \csa{par}, which here is not
+a problem, but can be suppressed if need be via the command \csb{etocinline} or
+its synonym \csb{etocnopar}.} This is the later job of a |forest| environment
+which will be given the contents of |\treetok|.
+
+\newtoks\treetok
+\newtoks\tmptok
+
+\newcommand*\appendtotok[2]{% #1=toks variable, #2=macro, expands once #2
+  #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+    {\expandafter\the\expandafter #1#2}}
+
+
+% 7 mars: j'utilise \etocthelinkedname défini à partir de 1.07f
+% mais bien sûr je sais que ça ne marche pas (sauf dans l'arbre pour le lien de
+% la section du bas) dans un QTree. Mais ça marche parfaitement dans un arbre
+% TikZ natif.
+
+% 9 septembre 2013: je remplace QTree par Forest, et il n'y a pas de problème
+% avec les hyperliens, ça marche out of the box (une fois que j'ai appris un peu
+% de sa syntaxe et de celle de TikZ).
+
+\newcommand*\PrepareSectionNode{%
+  \tmptok {\centering\bfseries}%
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{2cm}{\the\tmptok}}}% 
+}
+
+% 7 mars: j'utilise maintenant \etocthelinkedname
+\newcommand*{\PrepareSubsectionNode}{%
+  \tmptok {\raggedright}%  j'ai essayé aussi avec \sloppy
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{6cm}{\the\tmptok}}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSubsectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\treetok{[{\hyperref[part:overview]{Overview}}}}
+    {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+
+% 11 octobre
+% forest ne veut pas @\the\treetok avec un \treetok vide, donc
+% il faut lui donner une valeur par défaut.
+\treetok{[{run latex again}]}
+
+% 12 octobre
+% pour que varioref fonctionne bien, je dois mettre la \tableofcontents
+% au plus près de l'environnement forest
+
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+ \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+     \tableofcontents \label{toc:forest}\ref{toc:overview}
+     \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \bracketset{action character=@}
+     \begin{forest} 
+                  for tree={anchor=center,child anchor=west,
+                            grow'=east,draw,thick,
+                            edge={draw,thick,dashed,color=teal}},
+                  where={level()==1}{circle,thick,fill=blue!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=3cm}}{},
+                  where={level()==2}{fill=red!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=6cm}}{},
+                  % je trouve ce truc pour une position absolue. OK!
+                  rectangle, thick, fill=cyan!5, inner sep=6pt,
+     @\the\treetok 
+     \end{forest}
+     \centeredline{A table of contents displayed as a |forest| tree.}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+The resulting tree has been put in a \hyperref[toc:forest]{float}, which
+appears \vpageref[above]{toc:forest}. Here is the 
+code used for its production:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtoks\treetok
+\newtoks\tmptok
+
+\newcommand*\appendtotok[2]{% #1=toks variable, #2=macro, expands once #2
+  #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+    {\expandafter\the\expandafter #1#2}}
+
+\newcommand*\PrepareSectionNode{%
+  \tmptok {\centering\bfseries}%
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{2cm}{\the\tmptok}}}% 
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\PrepareSubsectionNode}{%
+  \tmptok {\raggedright}%
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{6cm}{\the\tmptok}}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSubsectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\treetok{[{\hyperref[part:overview]{Overview}}}}
+    {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+% forest does not like @\the\treetok if \treetok is empty. On first latex
+% run, this will be the case because the TOC style defined above will not
+% have been executed, as the label {toc:overview} does not refer to a valid 
+% TOC yet. So we must give a safe default value to \treetok
+\treetok{[{run latex again}]}
+
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+     \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+     \tableofcontents \label{toc:forest}\ref{toc:overview}
+     \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \bracketset{action character=@}
+     \begin{forest} 
+                  for tree={anchor=center,child anchor=west,
+                            grow'=east,draw,thick,
+                            edge={draw,thick,dashed,color=teal}},
+                  where={level()==1}{circle,thick,fill=blue!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=3cm}}{},
+                  where={level()==2}{fill=red!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=6cm}}{},
+                  rectangle, thick, fill=cyan!5, inner sep=6pt,
+     @\the\treetok 
+     \end{forest}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Why |\hypersetup{hidelinks}|? as explained in
+\autoref{ssec:hidelinks}, I prefer the links in TOCs not to be
+colorized, nor framed, so this document inserts a command
+%\csa{hypersetup}\texttt{\{hidelinks\}} % ok pour hyphénation
+%\csa{hypersetup}|{hidelinks}| % pas ok
+|\hypersetup{hidelinks}| % ok maintenant 12 octobre 2013
+ in the |.toc| file. But at the time the
+|\treetok| contents are unpacked the |\hyperlink| commands
+originating in
+|\etocthelinkedname|, etc\dots{} will be executed in the normal
+environment for links (which, in this document, is to colorize
+them). Rather than having \etoc's code try to guess what the current ``style''
+for links is (a concept not really provided by |hyperref| it
+seems) and store it in |\etocthelinkedname|, etc\dots, I opted for
+the simpler solution to leave it up to the user to recreate
+whatever conditions are desired. So here  it is necessary to re-issue
+|\hypersetup{hidelinks}| in the |figure| environment.
+
+There are some other examples in this documentation where
+|\tableofcontents| is used to prepare material for later
+typesetting:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item printing the statistics at the start of each Part (see
+  \autoref{ssec:statistics}) is done using save boxes (so the problem of the
+  appearance of the links does not arise then).
+\item the typesetting of the TOC as a table in the pre-|1.08| way (see
+  \autoref{ssec:tocastableold}); there we also have to issue
+  |\hypersetup{hidelinks}| after having collected the names, numbers and
+  page numbers in a token list register.
+\item and the two additional tree examples in the next section.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\section{The TOC as a molecule}\label{ssec:molecule}
+
+It is also possible to construct a TOC tree obeying the TikZ
+syntax for trees: but this is a more complicated task for the
+\etoc line styles for reasons related to the way braces are
+handled by \TeX{} (they need, when filling up the token list to be
+always balanced at each step, else complicated tricks must be
+employed.)
+
+The simplest strategy is to allocate a token list (or use a macro) for each
+level used: we may need a \csa{parttok}, a \csa{chaptertok}, a
+\csa{sectiontok} and a \csa{subsectiontok}, to help in the task of filling
+up the total \csa{treetok}. As we are interested here in the table of
+contents of this (or another) document part, only a \csa{sectiontok} and a
+\csa{subsectiontok} will be needed.
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+% \newtoks\treetok % already done earlier
+\newtoks\sectiontok \newtoks\subsectiontok \newcommand*{\treenode}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\appendchildtree}[2]{% token list t1 becomes: t1 child {t2}
+   \edef\tmp{\the#1 child {\the#2}}%
+   #1\expandafter{\tmp}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\preparetreenode}{%
+  \tmptok\expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}% expanded one time (mandatory)
+  \edef\treenode{node {\the\tmptok}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode \sectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode \subsectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\hyperref[part:overview]{Overview}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+
+% moved to the inside of the figure environment for correct \pageref{toc:molecule}
+% \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+% \tableofcontents \label{toc:molecule} \ref{toc:overview}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\newtoks\sectiontok
+\newtoks\subsectiontok
+\newcommand*\treenode {}
+
+\newcommand*{\appendchildtree}[2]{% token list t1 becomes: t1 child {t2}
+   \edef\tmp{\the#1 child {\the#2}}%
+   #1\expandafter{\tmp}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\preparetreenode}{%
+  \tmptok\expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \edef\treenode{node {\the\tmptok}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode
+   \sectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode
+   \subsectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\hyperref[part:overview]{Overview}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+   \tableofcontents \label{toc:molecule}\ref{toc:overview}
+   \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+   \begin{tikzpicture}
+              [grow cyclic,
+               level 1/.style={level distance=4cm,sibling angle=72},
+               level 2/.style={level distance=2cm,sibling angle=60},
+               every node/.style={ball color=red,circle,text=SkyBlue},
+               edge from parent path={[dashed,very thick,color=cyan]
+                           (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}
+   \centeredline{A table of contents as a ``molecule.''}
+\end{figure}
+
+% Pour que \pageref fonctionne correctement, je dois mettre
+% le \tableofcontents dans la figure. 
+
+
+The |\tableofcontents| command appears just above the
+|tikzpicture| environment in a figure float (for the label of the
+table of contents to certainly
+refer to the same page as the one where the picture will actually be printed).
+We thus get the table of contents as a ``\hyperref[toc:molecule]{molecule}'',
+which  
+appears \vpageref[above]{toc:molecule}. Here is the code actually
+producing it:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+   \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+   \tableofcontents \label{toc:molecule} \ref{toc:overview}
+   \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+   \begin{tikzpicture}
+              [grow cyclic,
+               level 1/.style={level distance=4cm,sibling angle=72},
+               level 2/.style={level distance=2cm,sibling angle=60},
+               every node/.style={ball color=red,circle,text=SkyBlue},
+               edge from parent path={[dashed,very thick,color=cyan]
+                           (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+
+This \hyperref[toc:molecule]{TikZ TOC} is fully hyperlinked, like the
+previous 
+\hyperref[toc:forest]{Forest TOC}.
+
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\autoref{part:globalcmds}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+
+\noindent  
+\parbox{4cm}{\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+    \begin{tikzpicture}
+              [grow cyclic,
+               level 1/.style={level distance=2.5cm,sibling angle=60},
+               level 2/.style={level distance=1cm,sibling angle=45},
+               every node/.style={ball color=red!50,circle,text=black},
+               edge from parent path={[very thick,color=cyan]
+                       (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\dimexpr\linewidth-4cm\relax}
+  On the side, the (fully hyperlinked) table of contents of
+  \autoref{part:globalcmds}.
+  \def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\small\hyphenchar\font-1 \baselineskip10pt\relax}%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\autoref{part:globalcmds}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\noindent  
+\parbox{4cm}{\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+   \begin{tikzpicture}
+      [grow cyclic,
+       level 1/.style={level distance=2.5cm,sibling angle=60},
+       level 2/.style={level distance=1cm,sibling angle=45},
+       every node/.style={ball color=red!50,circle,text=black},
+       edge from parent path={[very thick,color=cyan]
+               (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}}%
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+
+
+\section{The TOC as a table}
+\label{sec:tocastable}
+
+With release |1.08| it is easier to typeset a TOC as a table. It is
+possible to open a tabular in the title part of the TOC (first argument
+to \csb{etocsettocstyle}) and then close it after the contents (second
+argument to \csb{etocsettocstyle}), and specify in the line styles how
+to use the tabulation |&| and tabular end of row |\\|. There are some
+conditions and a few caveats:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item it is mandatory to issue \csb{etocglobaldefs} for \etoc's
+  definitions to have global scope,
+\item use \csb{etocthelinkedname},
+  \csb{etocthelinkednumber} and \csb{etocthelinkedpage} in preference to
+  \csb{etocname}, \csb{etocnumber}, \csb{etocpage}: if |hyperref| is
+  present, this is mandatory, and if it is not present, it does not hurt
+  and gives the same output,
+\item it is impossible to start one of the \meta{start}, \meta{prefix},
+  \meta{contents} or \meta{finish} specification with a sole |\hline|,
+  \emph{i.e.} one not preceded by a |\\| (it is however possible to put
+  |\\| at the end of \meta{prefix} and the |\hline| at the start of
+  \meta{contents}).
+\item as is explained next, it is recommended to use the  |\\| at
+  the start of the \meta{prefix} or \meta{contents}
+  specifications to close the \emph{previous} row, not at the end
+  to close the \emph{current} row; when the TOC is a partial one (a
+  \csa{localtableofcontents}) this advice becomes (in almost all
+  situations) mandatory.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Here is an example of a TOC as a |longtable|, as is possible relatively
+simply now with |1.08|. The code follows.
+
+\begingroup
+\etocglobaldefs % necessary for \etocthename etc... to survive &
+
+% we must use \etocthelinkednumber and not \etocnumber if hyperref is
+% present, because \etocnumber does not incorporate a fully expanded
+% hyperlink destination specification, hence that part gets lost when a
+% & is encountered
+
+% observe the locations of the \\
+\etocsetstyle{part}
+  {}
+  {\\\hline}
+  {\strut\etocthelinkednumber &\bfseries\etocthelinkedname 
+                              &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {}
+  {\etociffirst{\etocifnumbered{\\\hline}{\\\hline\hline}}{\\}}
+  {\etocthelinkednumber&\etocthelinkedname &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {}
+  {\\}
+  {&\makebox[1cm][c]{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+    \parbox[t]{\dimexpr6cm-\tabcolsep\relax}
+              {\sloppy\itshape\etocthelinkedname\strut}%
+   &\itshape\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \begin{longtable}{|>{\bfseries}c|p{7cm}|r|}
+     \hline
+     \multicolumn{3}{|c|}{\Large\bfseries\strut\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}%
+     }
+    {\\\hline\end{longtable}}
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\etocglobaldefs % necessary for \etocthename etc... to survive &
+
+% we must use \etocthelinkednumber and not \etocnumber if hyperref is
+% present, because \etocnumber does not incorporate a fully expanded
+% hyperlink destination specification, hence that part gets lost when a
+% & is encountered
+
+% observe the locations of the \\
+\etocsetstyle{part}
+  {}
+  {\\\hline}
+  {\strut\etocthelinkednumber &\bfseries\etocthelinkedname 
+                              &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {}
+  {\etociffirst{\etocifnumbered{\\\hline}{\\\hline\hline}}{\\}}
+  {\etocthelinkednumber&\etocthelinkedname &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {}
+  {\\}
+  {&\makebox[1cm][c]{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+    \parbox[t]{\dimexpr6cm-\tabcolsep\relax}
+              {\sloppy\itshape\etocthelinkedname\strut}%
+   &\itshape\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \begin{longtable}{|>{\bfseries}c|p{7cm}|r|}
+     \hline
+     \multicolumn{3}{|c|}{\Large\bfseries\strut\strut TABLE OF CONTENTS}%
+     }
+    {\\\hline\end{longtable}}
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Examining the code above the reader will wonder why the |\\| are
+always given first in \meta{prefix+contents} and not, as is more
+intuitive, rather last. In many cases one may indeed construct
+TOC-as-tables with the |\\| located at the end of the style
+specifications (but almost never for a \csa{localtableofcontents}).
+The problem in the previous example was with the positioning of the
+|\hline|'s.
+
+Due to technical aspects of how \TeX{} constructs alignments any
+definition or assignment done after an |\\| starts a new row, and
+thus makes |\hline| an illegal token (this shows as a |misplaced
+\noalign| error.) Not only does \etoc have to do such definitions
+to construct \csb{etocname} etc..., it is furthermore the case that
+some packages put things in the |.toc| file and as a result there
+is never any guarantee that between two \csa{contentsline} there
+will not be such a token like |\relax| which in the contexts of
+alignments forces \TeX{} to start a cell and thus makes it
+impossible then to insert an |\hline|.
+
+The safest way is to start with an |\\| each line style
+specification. We had a little problem with the fact that we wanted
+parts not only to have a rule above them (easy, they do |\\\hline|)
+but also below them: after each part there is a section, thus the
+section which are first of their kind used the \csb{etociffirst}
+conditional branching. The attentive reader will notice one last
+subtlety: the title was supposed to be followed not by one, but by
+two |\hline|'s.
+
+To solve this we could have used a one-time macro redefining itself, but
+we noticed that the title was followed by the unnumbered Abstract, thus
+the \csb{etocifnumbered} switch came to the rescue.
+
+Last technical note: because we put the |\\| inside the branches, there
+was no need to employ the expandable variants \csb{etocxiffirst} and
+\csb{etocxifnumbered}.
+
+For the hardliner's old way of obtaining the exact same result, see
+\autoref{ssec:tocastableold}.
+
+Here is also a much simpler example. It is a local table of
+contents.
+
+\begin{center}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+             {}
+             {\etociffirst{\\\hline\hline}{\\\hline}}
+             {\etocthelinkedname& 
+              \etocthelinkednumber& 
+              \etocthelinkedpage }
+             {}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+   {\hypersetup{hidelinks}\begin{tabular}{|p{4cm}|c|c|}\hline
+    \multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\bfseries Section}&
+    \bfseries number&
+    \bfseries page}
+   {\\\hline\end{tabular}}
+
+\etocglobaldefs % MANDATORY !!
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+
+\tableofcontents\ref{toc:overview}
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+             {}
+             {\etociffirst{\\\hline\hline}{\\\hline}}
+             {\etocthelinkedname& 
+              \etocthelinkednumber& 
+              \etocthelinkedpage }
+             {}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+   {\hypersetup{hidelinks}\begin{tabular}{|p{4cm}|c|c|}\hline
+    \multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\bfseries Section}&
+    \bfseries number&
+    \bfseries page}
+   {\\\hline\end{tabular}}
+
+\etocglobaldefs % MANDATORY !!
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+
+\tableofcontents\ref{toc:overview}
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The commands \csbhyp{etocglobaldefs} and \csbhyp{etoclocaldefs}}
+\label{etocglobaldefs}
+\label{etoclocaldefs}
+
+In \LaTeX{} the meaning of a command defined via |\newcommand\foo{...}| inside
+an environment (or group) vanishes from \TeX's memory on exit from this
+environment (or group). At times however it is needed to make definitions with
+global scope, for this \TeX{} has the primitive prefix |\global|.
+
+By default \etoc's definitions of \csb{etocname} etc... are local. This causes
+problems in certain contexts such as seen here with TOC as tables, but also
+with |enumitem| \emph{inline} variants of its standard environments, because
+the command |\item| then closes a group.
+
+After \csb{etocglobaldefs}, \etoc will make its definitions of \csb{etocname}
+etc... have global scope. For normal use this is not necessary. It does not hurt
+either to activate it systematically. 
+
+To return to the default, use \csb{etoclocaldefs}. Note that both
+\csb{etocglobaldefs} and \csb{etoclocaldefs} actions are local to the
+environment or group where they are used.
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {linestyles}
+
+\part{Commands for the toc line styles}
+\label{part:linestyles}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=.75cm, label=\etocifnumbered
+      {{\fboxrule1pt\fcolorbox{green}{white}{\etocnumber}}}{}]}
+% Dec 7, 2012. I hit upon a problem whose origin I found was
+% with xcolor, as xcolor modifies \fbox
+% (try \section{\fbox{A}} with and without xcolor). The fix
+% was to \protect the \fbox used in the |enumitem| label.
+% Strangely enough, with |hyperref| active, the problem did
+% not show up. Anyhow I now use \fcolorbox rather than \fbox
+% and there is no problem anymore. Also I don't have now to
+% use \normalcolor which already needed protection.
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (page \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=0cm, label=\etocnumber]}
+{\normalfont \item}
+{\etocname{} (p.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}
+{\par\nobreak\begingroup\normalfont\footnotesize\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\allowbreak\,--\,}
+{\etocname}
+{.\hfil\par\endgroup\pagebreak[3]}
+
+% 27 janvier 2013 22:30
+% je définis les macros (non protégées) 
+% \etocthename, \etocthenumber, \etocthepage
+
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\etocfontminusone\color{green}%
+     \fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1ex
+     \framebox[\linewidth]
+              {\normalcolor\hss Contents of \autoref{part:linestyles}\hss}}
+
+\localtableofcontents \label{toc:a}
+
+\section{The \csbhyp{etocsetstyle} command}
+\label{etocsetstyle}
+
+\subsection{The \csbhyp{etocname} and \csbhyp{etocpage} commands}
+\label{etocname}
+\label{etocpage}
+
+Let us explain how \etoc was used to produce the table of
+contents displayed at the beginning of this second part.
+This
+is a local table of contents, and we used the command \localtoc.
+
+
+We shall distinguish between the \emph{line styles} and the
+\emph{toc display style}. The line styles were (essentially)
+obtained in the following manner:%
+\footnote{the present document has
+  {\ttfamily\string\renewcommand\string{%
+      \string\familydefault\string}\string{\string\sfdefault\string}}
+  in its preamble, hence \csa{normalfont} switches to the
+  |sans| typeface; so in the section line-style, I wrote
+  \csa{rmfamily} instead.}
+
+\begingroup\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}}
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (page \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{\begin{enumerate}}
+{\normalfont\item}
+{\etocname{} (p.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}
+{\par\nobreak\begingroup\normalfont
+        \footnotesize\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\allowbreak\,--\,}
+{\etocname}
+{.\hfil\par\endgroup\pagebreak[3]}
+\end{verbatim}
+\endgroup
+
+These provisory style definitions rely on the automatic
+numbering generated by the |enumerate| environments but it is
+much better to use the further command \csb{etocnumber} inside
+the item label, which gives the real thing. The improved
+definitions will thus be explained later.
+
+With this style, one would have 
+to be imaginative to design something then for paragraph and
+subparagraph entries! perhaps as superscripts? Well, usually
+one does not need paragraphs and subparagraphs numbered and
+listed in the TOC, so our putative user here chose a design
+where no provision is made for them and added the definitive:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{paragraph}{}{}{}{}
+\etocsetstyle{subparagraph}{}{}{}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+This is also the situation with the default package line styles!
+
+Each \csb{etocsetstyle} command has five mandatory arguments:\\
+\hbox to \linewidth
+{\hfil\csb{etocsetstyle}\color{blue}\marg{levelname}%
+  \marg{start}\marg{prefix}\marg{contents}\marg{finish}\hfil}
+The initially recognized \meta{levelname}'s are the sectioning
+levels of the standard document classes: from \emph{part} (or
+\emph{book} which is used by the |memoir| class) down to
+\emph{subparagraph}.
+
+The \meta{start} code is executed when a toc entry of that level is
+encountered and the previous one was at a higher level. The
+\meta{finish} code is executed when one again encounters a higher
+level toc entry. In the mean-time all entries for that level are
+typeset by executing first the \meta{prefix} code and then the
+\meta{contents} code. 
+
+The (robust) commands \csb{etocname}, \csb{etocnumber} and \csb{etocpage} are
+provided for use inside the \meta{prefix} and \meta{contents} parts of the
+\csa{etocsetstyle} specification. They represent of course, the name, number,
+and page number of the corresponding toc entry. If package |hyperref| is
+active in the document and has added hyperlinks to the TOC data, then these
+links are kept in the commands \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber} and
+\csa{etocpage} (this last one will have a link only if |hyperref| was passed
+option \emph{linktoc=all}.)
+
+\subsection{The \csbhyp{etocskipfirstprefix} and \csbhyp{etociffirst} commands}
+\label{etocskipfirstprefix}
+\label{etociffirst}
+\label{etocxiffirst}
+
+The chosen |subsubsection| style made use of the command
+\csb{etocskipfirstprefix}, which instructs \etoc to \emph{not} use
+for the first item the specified \meta{prefix} code.\footnote{With
+versions earlier than |1.08| it had to be the very last token in
+the \meta{start} code. It may now appear anywhere therein.}
+
+The command \csb{etociffirst}\marg{YES CODE}\marg{NO CODE} (new
+with |1.08|) is a more flexible way to customize the \meta{prefix}
+(and \meta{contents}) specifications. It executes the \meta{YES
+CODE} branch if this is the first unit at that level (inside a
+lower level) and the \meta{NO CODE} if not. This is a robust
+command which survives to expansion (for example in an |enumitem| label).
+
+The variant \csb{etocxiffirst} does the same, but is expandable.
+
+
+\subsection{The \csbhyp{etocnumber} command}
+\label{etocnumber}
+
+So far, our specifications would use the numbering generated
+by the |enumerate| environments, but of course we generally want
+the actual numbers as found in the |.toc| file. This is
+available via the \csb{etocnumber} command. To get the labels
+in the |enumerate| list to use it we can proceed with the
+syntax {\ttfamily label=\char32} from the package |enumitem|:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}[label=\etocnumber]}
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (page \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Rather than just \csa{etocnumber} we then used something like
+|\fbox{\etocnumber}|. Note that \csa{etocnumber} is a robust
+command which explains why it can be used inside the label specification
+without needing an added |\protect|.
+
+
+\subsubsection{The \csbhyp{etocifnumbered} switch}
+\label{etocifnumbered}
+\label{etocxifnumbered}
+
+The \csa{fbox} would give an unaesthetic result in the case of
+an unnumbered section (which ended up in the table of
+contents via an \csa{addcontentsline} command).\footnote{as
+  seen we use \csa{fcolorbox} rather than \csa{fbox}. Due
+  to some redefinition made by package |xcolor|, had we used
+  \csa{fbox} (and not used |hyperref|) we would have needed
+  \csa{protect}\csa{fbox}.}
+
+The \csb{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B} command executes
+\meta{A} if the number exists, and \meta{B} if not. So we use
+it in the code which was finally chosen for the |section| level:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=.75cm, label=\etocifnumbered
+      {{\fboxrule1pt\fcolorbox{green}{white}{\etocnumber}}}{}]}
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (page \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=0cm, label=\etocnumber]}
+{\normalfont \item}
+{\etocname{} (p.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If we had changed only the |section| level, and not the
+|subsection| level, an error on compilation would have occurred
+because the package style for subsections expects to start `in
+vertical mode'. An additional \csa{par} token in the
+\meta{contents} part of the |section| level would have fixed
+this: |{...(page \etocpage)\par}|.
+
+The command \csb{etocifnumbered} is robust;  \csb{etocxifnumbered}
+(new with |1.08|) has the same effect but is expandable.
+
+
+\subsection{The \csbhyp{etocthename}, \csbhyp{etocthenumber}, and
+\csbhyp{etocthepage} commands}
+\label{etocthename}
+\label{etocthenumber}
+\label{etocthepage}
+
+It is sometimes desirable to have access to the name, number and page
+number without the hyperref link data: something similar to the starred
+variant of the \csa{ref} command, when package |hyperref| is used. For
+example one may wish to use the unit or page number in some kind of
+numeric context, or change its formatting. This is provided by
+\csb{etocthename}, \csb{etocthenumber}, and \csb{etocthepage}.
+
+
+These commands are not protected, so in moving argument
+contexts (for example in a label specification) they should be
+preceded by |\protect|.
+
+\subsection{The \csbhyp{etoclink} command}
+\label{etoclink}
+
+The command \csb{etoclink}\marg{linkname} can be used in the line style
+specifications in a manner analogous to the argument-less
+commands \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber} and \csa{etocpage}. It
+creates a link (if such a link was added by |hyperref| to the
+|.toc| file entry) whose destination is the corresponding document
+unit and whose name is the given argument. 
+Hence |\etoclink{\etocthename}| is like the original
+|\etocname|.
+Notice that if |hyperref| was not instructed to put a link in the page number
+(via 
+its option \emph{linktoc=all}) then \etoc's \csa{etocpage} contains no link
+either, but |\etoclink{\etocthepage}| does. 
+
+
+The command \csa{etoclink} is robust.
+
+\subsection{The \csbhyp{etocthelinkedname}, \csbhyp{etocthelinkednumber},
+\csbhyp{etocthelinkedpage} and \csbhyp{etocthelink} commands}
+\label{etocthelinkedname}
+\label{etocthelinkednumber}
+\label{etocthelinkedpage}
+\label{etocthelink}
+
+
+This is for advanced uses by advanced users. 
+The \csa{etocthename} macro has
+been mentioned before; using it in instructions such as
+|\global\let\lastone\etocthename| in an \etoc line style will
+define the macro |\lastone| to expand to the last name seen at the
+corresponding level. But no facilities was previously available to
+do the same with the link data.
+
+The package now provides \csa{etocthelinkedname} to do the similar
+thing, with the link data included. It was used in this
+documentation when doing the
+\hyperref[tocastree]{examples with trees}.
+
+Also provided with the similar goal: \csa{etocthelinkednumber},
+\csa{etocthelinkedpage} (which contains a link only if |hyperref|
+added one to the page number) and \csa{etocthelink}\marg{linkname}
+which allows to make a link with an arbitrary name.
+
+All these commands are fragile. 
+
+Example of \begingroup
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, and }}]}
+          {\global\let\TmpEtocNumber\etocthelinkednumber
+           \global\let\TmpEtocName\etocthelinkedname 
+           \global\let\TmpEtocPage\etocthelinkedpage }
+          {\item [{\bfseries\TmpEtocNumber.}]\TmpEtocName\ 
+                 (\emph{p. \TmpEtocPage})}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {a table of contents done as an inline 
+                          \texttt{enumitem} environment: }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Example of \begingroup
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, and }}]}
+          {\global\let\TmpEtocNumber\etocthelinkednumber
+           \global\let\TmpEtocName\etocthelinkedname 
+           \global\let\TmpEtocPage\etocthelinkedpage }
+% (the above needed as \item closes a group in enumitem inline environments)
+          {\item [{\bfseries\TmpEtocNumber.}]\TmpEtocName\ 
+                 (\emph{p. \TmpEtocPage})}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {a table of contents done as an inline 
+                          \texttt{enumitem} environment: }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\etoc |1.08| offers a simpler way to the same result:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Example of 
+\begingroup\etocglobaldefs % <-- NEW mit etoc 1.08.
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, und }}]}
+          {}
+          {\item [{\bfseries\etocthelinkednumber.}]
+                 \etocthelinkedname\ (\emph{p. \etocthelinkedpage })}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {a table of contents done as an inline
+                       \texttt{enumitem} environment: }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{verbatim}
+Example of 
+\begingroup\etocglobaldefs % <-- NEW mit etoc 1.08.
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, und }}]}
+          {}
+          {\item [{\bfseries\etocthelinkednumber.}]
+                 \etocthelinkedname\ (\emph{p. \etocthelinkedpage })}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {a table of contents done as an inline
+                       \texttt{enumitem} environment: }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+
+\section{The \csbhyp{etocsetlevel} command}
+\label{etocsetlevel}
+
+As already explained in \autoref{part:surprising}, one
+can inform \etoc of a level to associate to a given sectioning
+command with \csa{etocsetlevel}. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetlevel{cell}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{molecule}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{atom}{2}
+\etocsetlevel{nucleus}{3}
+\end{verbatim}
+In compatibility mode, it will be assumed that the macros |\l@cell|,
+|\l@molecule|, ..., have been defined somewhere either by the user or a class:
+doing only |\etocsetlevel| is not enough for the corresponding level to work
+out-of-the-box in compatibility mode.
+
+However, if no table of contents is typeset in compatibility mode, then all that
+matters  is that the various line styles have been set. If, for example
+|section| is at level |1|, then there is no need to do some
+\csa{etocsetstyle}|{molecule}{..}{..}{..}{..}| after
+\csa{etocsetlevel}|{molecule}{1}| if
+\csa{etocsetstyle}|{section}{..}{..}{..}{..}| has already been done (and it has
+been done by the package itself in its definition of its own line styles).
+ 
+The accepted levels run from |-2| to |6| inclusive.  Anything else is
+mapped to |6|, which is a dummy level, never displayed. The package
+does:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetlevel{book}{-2}
+\etocsetlevel{part}{-1}
+\etocsetlevel{chapter}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{section}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{subsection}{2}
+\etocsetlevel{subsubsection}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{paragraph}{4}
+\etocsetlevel{subparagraph}{5}
+\end{verbatim}
+\etoc own custom styles are activated by \csa{etocdefaultlines}. They
+are illustrated by the main table of contents of this
+document. 
+
+These level assignments can be modified at anytime: see
+\autoref{part:surprising} for various applications of this
+technique. As one 
+further example, let's mention here that the \hyperref[toc:main]{main table of
+contents} of this document was typeset following these instructions:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsettocdepth {subsubsection} % set the initial tocdepth
+\etocdefaultlines % use the package default line styles. At this early stage in
+                  % the document they had not yet been modified by \etocsetstyle
+                  % commands, so \etoctoclines could have been used, too.
+\etocmarkboth\contentsname
+\etocmulticolstyle[1]                   % one-column display
+    {\pdfbookmark[1]{Table of contents}{MAINTOC}% create a bookmark in the pdf
+     \noindent\bfseries\Large
+     \leaders\hrule height1pt\hfill
+     \MakeUppercase{Table of Contents}}
+\begingroup                             % use a group to limit the scope of the
+  \etocsetlevel{subsection}{3}          %   subsection level change.
+  \etocsetlevel{subsubsection}{4}       % anything > tocdepth=3.
+  \tableofcontents \label{toc:main}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+In this way, the subsections used the style originally designed for
+subsubsections, the subsubsections were not printed. Without this modification,
+the appearance would have been very different: the package line styles were
+targeted to be employed in documents with many many sub-sub-sections, in a
+two-column layout, giving thus a more compact output that what is achieved by
+the default \LaTeX{} table of contents. But here, we have few sub-sub-sections
+and it is more interesting to drop them and print in a visually different manner
+sections and subsections. 
+
+
+\section{Scope of commands added to 
+         the \texorpdfstring{\texttt{.toc}}{.toc} file}
+
+\begingroup % pour \small et \MacroFont en particulier.
+\small
+
+\subsection{Testing the scope}
+
+Let us switch to the color red, and also add this command to the |.toc| file:
+
+\color{red!50}
+\addtocontents{toc}{\string\color{red!50}}
+
+\def\MacroFont{\ttfamily \footnotesize\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \color{red!50}                             % changing text color
+   \addtocontents{toc}{\string\color{red!50}} % and also in the .toc file
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{This is a (pale) red subsection for illustrative purposes}
+
+Actually, this title here was printed black, due to the way the |scrartcl| class
+works (it would have been red in the |article| class), but we are more
+interested in how it looks in the tables of contents: it does appear red in the
+\hyperref[toc:main]{main table of contents} at the beginning of
+this document, and also in the \hyperref[toc:a]{table of
+contents for this part}. Both entries obey as expected the
+|\color{red!50}| command inserted in the |.toc| file.
+
+But let us now close this subsection and start a section.
+
+
+\section{Am I also red?}
+
+The question is about how it appears in the tables of contents: the answer is
+that, yes it is red in the \hyperref[toc:main]{main TOC}, and no
+it is not red in the \hyperref[toc:a]{local TOC for this part}.
+The reason is that the \meta{finish} code for the subsection level closed a
+group, as it used |\end{enumerate}|.
+
+This illustrates the discussion from \autoref{ssec:limitations}. 
+
+The default package line styles do not contain group opening and closing
+instructions: the influence of a command added to the |.toc| file will propagate
+until cancelled by another explicit such command inserted in the |.toc|
+file.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \normalcolor
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\string\normalcolor}
+\end{verbatim}
+\endgroup
+
+\normalcolor
+\addtocontents{toc}{\string\normalcolor}
+
+Back to black. Note that this scope problem arises in real life in a
+multi-lingual document, as the |babel| package writes to the |.toc| file the
+language changes occurring in the document. 
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {globalcmds}
+
+\part{Commands for the toc display style}
+\label{part:globalcmds}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocstandardlines
+\localtableofcontents \label{toc:globalcmds}
+
+
+\section{Specifying the toc display style}
+
+
+The \emph{toc display} style says whether the TOC appears with
+multiple columns or just one, whether the title is typeset as
+in the |article| or |book| class, or should be centered above
+the entries, with rules on its sides, or if the entire TOC
+should be put in a frame. For example, to opt for a ruled
+heading and single column layout, one issues commands of the
+following type:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{Title} \tableofcontents    (or \localtableofcontents)
+shortcuts:         \etocruled[1]{Title}  (or  \etoclocalruled[1]{Title})
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The command \csbhyp{etocsettocstyle}}
+\label{etocsettocstyle}
+
+This is a command with two mandatory arguments:\\
+\centerline{\csb{etocsettocstyle}\marg{before\_toc}%
+\marg{after\_toc}}
+The \marg{before\_toc} part is responsible for typesetting the
+heading, for example it can be something like
+\starit{section}|{\contentsname}|. 
+
+Generally speaking this heading
+should leave \TeX{} in ``vertical mode'' when the actual
+typesetting of the contents will start: the line styles (either
+from the standard classes or the package default line styles)
+all expect to get started in `vertical mode'.
+
+The first argument to \csb{etocsettocstyle} can also contain
+instructions to mark the page headings.  Or
+it could check (book class) to see if two-column mode is on,
+and switch to one-column style, and the \meta{after\_toc} part
+would then reenact the two-column mode.
+
+The commands to be described next \csb{etocmulticolstyle},
+\csb{etocruledstyle}, and \csb{etocframedstyle} all call
+\csa{etocsettocstyle} as a lower-level routine, to start a 
+\texttt{multi\-cols} environment in \marg{before\_toc} and close it in
+\marg{after\_toc}. 
+
+\subsection{The commands \csbhyp{etocmulticolstyle}, \csbhyp{etocmulticol}, and \csbhyp{etoclocalmulticol}}
+\label{etocmulticolstyle}
+\label{etocmulticol}
+\label{etoclocalmulticol}
+
+This is a command with one optional and one mandatory argument:\\
+\centerline{\csb{etocmulticolstyle}%
+  \oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}} The
+\meta{number\_of\_columns} can go from 1 to 10 (it defaults to 2; if its
+value is 1, naturally no |multicols| environment is then created). The
+\meta{heading} will typically be some `vertical' material like:
+  \meta{heading} = |\section*|\marg{title}
+but one may also have horizontal material like |\fbox{Hello World}| (\etoc
+adds automatically a |\par| at the end of this ``heading'' argument to
+\csb{etocmulticolstyle}). Here is for example
+how the main table of contents of this document was
+configured:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocmulticolstyle{\noindent\bfseries\Large
+                   \leaders\hrule height1pt\hfill
+                   \MakeUppercase{Table of Contents}}
+\end{verbatim}
+After \csa{etocmulticolstyle} all future \csa{tableofcontents} will use the
+specified style, if it does not get changed in-between. A shortcut for
+just one table of contents and 
+no impact on the styles of later TOCs is:\\
+\centerline{\csa{etocmulticol}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}}
+And there is also
+\csa{etoclocalmulticol}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}.
+
+\subsubsection{The command \csbhyp{etoctocstyle}}
+\label{etoctocstyle}
+
+\centeredline{\csb{etoctocstyle}\oarg{kind}%
+\marg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}}
+\centeredline{=
+\csb{etocmulticolstyle}|[|{\itshape number\_of\_columns}|]|%
+|{\kind*{|\itshape title\upshape|}}|}
+where |kind| is one of |chapter|, |section|, . . . and defaults
+to |chapter| or |section| depending on the document class.
+
+\paragraph{\texorpdfstring{\csbhyp{etoc\-toc\-style\-with\-marks}}{etoctocstylewithmarks}}%
+\leavevmode\unskip{\color{blue}\oarg{kind}\marg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\marg{mark}}
+\label{etoctocstylewithmarks}
+\label{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}
+
+\centeredline
+{=\csb{etocmulticolstyle}|[|{\itshape number\_of\_columns}|]|%
+|{\kind*{|\itshape title \ttfamily\upshape\string\markboth%
+|{\MakeUppercase{|{\rmfamily\itshape mark}|}}}}|} 
+where |kind| is one of |chapter|, |section|, ... The
+actual display of the marks depends on the settings of the
+page style. There is variant \csb{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}
+which does not uppercase.
+
+
+\paragraph{Do we really want paragraph entries in the TOC?}
+
+\paragraph{really?}
+
+\subsection{The commands  \csbhyp{etocruledstyle}, \csbhyp{etocruled} and \csbhyp{etoclocal\-ruled}}
+\label{etocruledstyle}
+\label{etocruled}
+\label{etoclocalruled}
+
+The general format of \csa{etocruledstyle} is:\\
+\centerline{\csb{etocruledstyle}%
+\oarg{number of columns}\marg{title of the toc}}
+\noindent 
+The title is horizontal material (the |LR| mode of 
+\emph{\LaTeX{}, a document preparation system}): if it
+does not fit on one line it should be put in a \csa{parbox}  of
+a given width.
+The green frame for the heading of the table of contents at
+the \hyperref[toc:a]{start of the second part of this
+  document} was obtained with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\etocfontminusone\color{green}%
+     \fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1ex
+     \framebox[\linewidth]
+              {\normalcolor\hss Contents of this part\hss}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+As a shortcut to set the style with \csb{etocruledstyle} and
+then issue a
+\csa{tableofcontents}, all inside a group
+so that  future table of contents will not be
+affected, there is:\\
+\centerline{\csb{etocruled}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}}
+And the local form will be \csb{etoclocalruled}.
+
+\subsection{The commands \csbhyp{etocframedstyle},  \csbhyp{etocframed}, and \csbhyp{etoclocal\-framed}}
+\label{etocframedstyle}
+\label{etocframed}
+\label{etoclocalframed}
+
+Same mechanism:\\
+\centerline{\csb{etocframedstyle}%
+  \oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}}
+and the accompanying shortcut:\\
+\centerline{\csb{etocframed}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}} The
+shortcut is used if one does not want to modify the style of the next
+TOCs (the other way is to put the whole thing inside braces or a
+|\begingroup...\endgroup|; there is also \csa{etoclocalframed} for a
+local table of contents).
+
+The entire table of contents is framed. The title itself is not framed:
+if one wants a frame one should set it up inside the \meta{title}
+argument to \csa{etocframedstyle} or \csa{etocframed}. The colors for
+the background and for the components (top, left, right, bottom) of the
+border are specified via suitable |\renewcommand|'s (see
+\autoref{ssec:customdisplay}).
+
+A |minipage| is used, hence the produced table of contents isn't
+compatible with a page break. For allowing page breaks, use of
+the commands of
+\href{http://ctan.org/pkg/mdframed}{mdframed}\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/mdframed}}
+or 
+\href{http://ctan.org/pkg/tcolorbox}{tcolorbox}\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tcolorbox}}
+in the arguments of \csb{etocsettocstyle}  
+is recommended.
+
+Examples in this document are on pages \pageref{toc:d},
+\pageref{toc:floating}, \pageref{toc:b}, and \pageref{toc:clone}.
+
+
+\subsection{Headings, titles, \csbhyp{etocoldpar}, \csbhyp{etocinnertopsep}}
+\label{etocinnertopsep}
+\label{etocoldpar}
+
+For \csb{etocmulticolstyle} the mandatory \meta{heading} argument can be
+either 
+vertical mode material like |\section*{\emph{Table of Contents}}| or
+horizontal mode material like in the simple |\etocmulticolstyle{Hello World}|.
+
+No explicit |\par| or empty line can be inserted in the mandatory
+argument of \csb{etocmulticolstyle}, but \etoc provides \csb{etocoldpar}
+as a substitute: it does |\let\etocoldpar\par| before the |multicols|
+environment and inserts this |\etocoldpar|\footnote{this command
+  \csa{etocoldpar} (= working \csa{par} in the argument to
+  \csa{etocmulticolstyle}) is not related to the switch \csb{etocinline}
+  whose purpose is to tell \etoc not to do a \csa{par} before the table
+  of contents.} at the end of the heading, then does a vertical skip of
+value \csa{etocinnertopsep}. The command \csb{etocoldpar} can also be
+used explicitely if needed in the mandatory argument to
+\csa{etocmulticolstyle} (it is not allowed to insert an empty line
+in this argument).
+
+On the other hand the commands \csb{etocruledstyle} and
+\csb{etocframedstyle} expect an argument ``in LR mode'' (to use the
+terminology from \emph{LaTeX, a document preparation system}). This
+means that multiline titles are only possible if enclosing
+them inside something like a \csa{parbox}.
+
+
+
+An important dimension used by all three of \csb{etocmulticolstyle},
+\csb{etocruledstyle} and \csb{etocframedstyle} is
+\csb{etocinnertopsep}. It gives the amount of separation
+between the heading and the start of the contents. Its default
+value is |2ex| and it is changed with
+|\renewcommand*{\etocinnertopsep}|\marg{new\_value}, not with
+|\setlength|. 
+
+
+
+\subsection{The compatibility mode \csbhyp{etocstandarddisplaystyle}}
+\label{etocstandarddisplaystyle}
+
+\etoc will then emulate what the document class would have
+done regarding the global display style of the table of
+contents, in its absence. All customizing from inside the
+class should be obeyed, too.
+
+\subsection{The command \csbhyp{etoc\-inline}}
+\label{etocinline}
+\label{etocnopar}
+\label{etocdisplay}
+
+With \csb{etocinline}, or its synonym |\etocnopar|, the
+|\tableofcontents| command and its variants do \emph{not} first issue a
+|\par| to close the previous paragraph. Hence, the table of contents can
+be printed in an inline style; or, if used only for preparing some token
+list or macro, it will leave nothing in the token stream on execution.
+
+Issue \csb{etocdisplay} to return to the default situation that
+|\tableofcontents| and variants issue a |\par| to switch to vertical
+mode before typesetting the TOC title and contents.
+
+\section{Starred variants of the \csbhyp{tableofcontents}  etc... commands}
+\label{tableofcontents*}
+\label{localtableofcontents*}
+\label{etocbeforetitlehook}
+\label{etocaftertitlehook}
+\label{etocaftercontentshook}
+\label{etocmemoirtoctotocfmt}
+
+The \toc, \localtoc, \csa{etocmulticol}, and all their cousins and
+variants have starred variants (the star must be before the other
+arguments). For all but the |memoir| class, they are like the original.
+For the |memoir| class, the original prints an entry in the |.toc| file,
+as is the usage for the original \toc command in that class, whereas the
+starred variants do not, as is the habit in that class.
+
+As soon as one starts using local table of contents one
+discovers that the default |memoir| thing which is to create a
+|chapter| entry for each TOC is not convenient. The command
+\csb{etocmemoirtoctotocfmt}\marg{kind}\marg{name} will change
+the format (\meta{kind} is |chapter|, |section|, |subsection|... and
+\meta{name} can be for example \csa{contentsname}.) The initial set-up
+is with |chapter| and |\contentsname|. 
+
+The format of the actual heading of the TOC should also be set
+appropriately (for example with \csa{etoctocstyle}), to use the
+identical division unit as in the first argument to
+\csa{etocmemoirtoctotocfmt}. 
+
+A weird situation arises when one has two successive
+\csa{localtableofcontents} (obviously this is not a truly real
+life situation), just after a \csa{part} for example. The first
+one creates (if the default has not been modified as indicated
+above) a Chapter heading which is
+written to the |.toc|. Then the second one thinks to be local
+to this chapter . . . and as a result it displays nothing. The
+fix is to define the second one to be a clone of the first
+one.
+
+Independently of the situation with the |memoir| class there is
+generally speaking a hook macro called
+\csb{etocaftertitlehook} which is inhibited by using the
+starred variants of the displaying commands. Except for the
+|memoir| class, this hook is initially defined to do nothing.
+
+There is \csb{etocaftercontentshook}, similarly defined to do
+nothing. And \csb{etocbeforetitlehook} is also initially defined to do
+nothing. They can be used for some special effects.
+
+\section{Table of contents for this part}
+
+
+\subsection{Testing the compatibility mode}
+
+As a third example we now print the local table of contents
+for this part. First we will test the compatibility mode.\footnote{the
+present document uses the |scrartcl| class, and we check here that
+the \etoc compatibility mode does respect the customizing done via the
+class commands.}   The original was invisibly defined with a label at the
+beginning of this \autoref{part:globalcmds}.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\KOMAoptions{toc=left}
+\etocstandarddisplaystyle % necessary for the display to obey toc=left
+\etocstandardlines
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{verbatim}
+\KOMAoptions{toc=left}
+\etocstandarddisplaystyle
+\etocstandardlines
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+
+\subsection{A framed display}
+
+We now opt for a ``framed'' style, using the package default
+line styles and some colors added (it has been put in a float which appears
+\vpageref{toc:b}).\footnote{inside the |figure| environment and before the
+  framed toc, which uses |multicols|, we added \csa{normalcolor} as work-around
+  to an interaction bug (related to the \csa{color\{red\}} command we added to
+  the |.toc| file) between |multicols|, |color| and the |figure|
+  environment. This bug has nothing to do with \etoc.}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocdefaultlines
+\begingroup 
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{1.5em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{1.5em}
+% specify a background color for the toc contents
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{yellow!10}}
+% set up the top and bottom rules 
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% set up the left and right rules
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% use \fcolorbox to set up a colored frame for the title
+\fboxrule1pt
+\renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{0pt\relax}
+\etocframedstyle {\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fcolorbox{red}{white}{\parbox{.8\linewidth}{\centering
+      This is a table of contents \`a la \etoc, but just for
+      the sections and subsections in this part. As it is put
+      in a frame, it has to be small enough to fit on 
+      one page. It has the label |toc:b|.}}}
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+\normalcolor % work-around to a bug involving color and multicols (and figure)
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:b} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{figure}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+\begingroup 
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{1.5em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{1.5em}
+% specify a background color for the toc contents
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{yellow!10}}
+% set up the top and bottom rules 
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% set up the left and right rules
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% use \fcolorbox to set up a colored frame for the title
+\fboxrule1pt
+\renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{-.5\baselineskip\relax}
+\etocframedstyle {\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fcolorbox{red}{white}{\parbox{.8\linewidth}{\centering
+      This is a table of contents \`a la \etoc, but just for
+      the sections and subsections in this part. As it is put
+      in a frame, it has to be small enough to fit on 
+      one page. It has the label |toc:b|.}}}
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+\normalcolor % work-around to a bug involving color and multicols (and figure)
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:b} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{figure}
+\endgroup
+
+% Il y a un color leak du framed mais uniquement lorsqu'il est mis dans le
+% float. 2013/10/13, qui révèle un bug (?? NON) du style framed je vais regarder
+% mais bon. Le leak apparaît avec ruled aussi, et même avec juste multicolstyle
+% MAIS PAS EN UNE SEULE COLONNE (même framed ou ruled). il semble qu'il y aie
+% donc un problème d'interaction avec multicol là. à voir. Pas le temps
+% maintenant.
+
+% 2013/10/14
+% il s'agit en fait d'un bug de color+multicols+figure qui n'a rien à voir avec
+% etoc: 
+% http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/138783/color-leak-from-multicols-within-a-figure
+% J'ai trouvé le work-around qui consiste simplement à ajouter un \normalcolor
+% _avant_ le multicols à l'intérieur de figure
+
+\subsection{A (crazy) inline display}
+
+Let us finally make some crazy inline display of the table of
+contents of this entire document. We will typeset the subsections as
+footnotes... This kind of style is suitable for a hyperlinked
+document, probably not for print! (although I like it, but my personal taste in
+many matters does not seem to be widely shared).
+
+%%%% Note: 27 april 2014 
+
+%%%% except for a miraculous situation depending from the quantity of previous
+%%%% material this TOC will have links extending accross pagebreaks, which
+%%%% dvipdfmx does not know how to handle completely. Apart from that the output
+%%%% is ok, thus no need to try seriously to avoid them. 
+
+\begingroup
+\newsavebox{\forsubsections}
+\etocsetstyle{part}{\upshape. \etocskipfirstprefix}{. \upshape}{\bfseries\etocname:~~}{}
+\etocsetstyle{section}{\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }{\mdseries\etocname}{}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+   {\begin{lrbox}{\forsubsections}\upshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+   {; }
+   {\etocname}
+   {\end{lrbox}\footnote{\unhbox\forsubsections.}}
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{ (\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {, }{\etocname}{\/\upshape)}
+\etocsettocstyle{Here is the inline table of contents. }{.\par}
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:crazyinline}
+\endgroup
+
+The code used:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\newsavebox{\forsubsections}
+\etocsetstyle{part}{\upshape. \etocskipfirstprefix}{. \upshape}
+                      {\bfseries\etocname:~~}{}
+\etocsetstyle{section}{\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }
+                      {\mdseries\etocname}{}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+   {\begin{lrbox}{\forsubsections}\upshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+   {; }{\etocname}{\end{lrbox}\footnote{\unhbox\forsubsections.}}
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}
+  { (\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }{\etocname}{\/\upshape)}
+\etocsettocstyle{Here is the inline table of contents. }{.\par}
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {custom}
+
+\part{Using and customizing \etoc}
+\label{part:custom}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height2pt depth0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{red}}
+
+\etocruledstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\fboxrule1pt\color{red}%
+  \fbox{\parbox{.8\linewidth}{\centering\normalcolor This is a table of
+      contents for the sections and
+      subsections in this part. It carries the label |toc:c|}}} 
+
+\localtableofcontents \label{toc:c}
+
+
+\section{Summary of the main style commands}
+
+\subsection{Setting up local styles}
+
+\hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1em
+\setbox0\hbox{\csa{etocthename}, \csa{etocthenumber}, \csa{etocthepage}, \csa{etoclink}\marg{linkname}}%
+\framebox[\linewidth][c]
+{\vbox{\hsize\wd0\normalcolor\noindent
+\csa{etocsetstyle}\marg{levelname}%
+  \marg{start}\marg{prefix}\marg{contents}\marg{finish}\\
+\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber}, \csa{etocpage},
+\csa{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B}\\
+\csa{etocthename}, \csa{etocthenumber}, \csa{etocthepage}, \csa{etoclink}\marg{linkname}
+}}}
+
+\subsection{Setting up toc display styles}
+
+\medskip
+\hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1em
+\setbox0\hbox{\csa{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}\oarg{kind}%
+\marg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\marg{mark}}%
+\framebox[\linewidth][c]
+{\vbox{\hsize\wd0
+\normalcolor\noindent
+\csa{etocmulticolstyle}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}\\
+\csa{etoctocstyle}\oarg{kind}\marg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\\
+\csa{etoctocstylewithmarks}\oarg{kind}\marg{number\_of\_columns}%
+\marg{title}\marg{mark}\\
+\csa{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}\oarg{kind}\marg{number\_of\_columns}%
+\marg{title}\marg{mark}\\
+\csa{etocruledstyle}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\\
+\csa{etocframedstyle}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\\
+\csa{etocsettocstyle}\marg{before\_toc}\marg{after\_toc}}}}
+
+\subsection{Displaying tables of contents}
+
+
+\medskip \hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1em
+  \setbox0\hbox{\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber},
+    \csa{etocpage}, \csa{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B}}%
+  \framebox[\linewidth][c]
+  {\vbox{\hsize\wd0\normalcolor\noindent
+      \toc\\
+      \localtoc\\
+      \csa{etocmulticol}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}\\
+      \csa{etoclocalmulticol}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}\\
+      \csa{etocruled}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\\
+      \csa{etoclocalruled}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\\
+      \csa{etocframed}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\\
+      \csa{etoclocalframed}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\\
+      \hbox{}{\itshape\ttfamily\ \ \ \  and their starred variants}
+   }}}
+
+\subsection{Labels and references}
+
+The commands (starred or not) to actually display the table of contents
+can be followed with optional labels or references:\par
+
+\medskip \hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1em
+  \setbox0\hbox{\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber},
+    \csa{etocpage}, \csa{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B}}%
+  \framebox[\linewidth][c]
+  {\vbox{\hsize\wd0\normalcolor\noindent
+      \toc \csa{label}|\{toc:here\}|\\ 
+      \toc \csa{ref}|\{toc:far\}| \\
+      \toc \csa{label}|\{toc:here\}| \csa{ref}|\{toc:far\}| \\
+      \localtoc \csa{label}|\{toc:here\}|\\
+      \hbox{}{\itshape\ttfamily\ \ \ \ similarly with\ }%
+      \csa{etocmulticol}{\itshape\ttfamily\ etc . . . }
+   }}}
+
+
+\medskip The commands for local tables of
+contents do \emph{not} react to a \csa{ref} following them. 
+
+When re-displaying another toc, only its contents are transferred:
+both the line styles and the toc display style are the ones
+currently defined, not the ones from the cloned toc.
+
+
+\section{The package default line styles: \csbhyp{etocdefaultlines}}
+\label{etocdefaultlines}
+
+These line styles were written at an early stage in the
+development of the package; although the next section explains how
+to customize the font choicess or vertical spaces, etc\dots, used
+by these line styles, most other changes would require copying
+them from the sources and modify them directly. Admittedly they
+have been written at a rather scary low-\TeX{} level, and will not
+serve as a very friendly starting point. 
+
+Activating their use is done via \csa{etocdefaultlines}, or
+\csa{etoctoclines} if the line styles have not been modified with
+\csa{etocsetstyle}. Sections and sub-sections are printed in
+essentially the same manner, except that the leading for
+sub-sections is a bit smaller (with document classes lacking a
+\csa{chapter} command, the sections are printed in bold typeface;
+this is the case in the present document). Sub-sub-sections are
+printed inline, in one paragraph, with no numbers or page numbers.
+This style was designed and tested with documents having lots of
+sub-sub-sections, and should be used on a two-column layout: it
+provides (only in that situation with many sub-sub-sections) a
+more compact presentation than what is achieved by the \LaTeX{}
+default.\footnote{and there will never be a Part or Chapter entry
+  alone at the bottom of a column or page (except if it has no
+  sub-unit).} On the other hand, used with a one-column layout,
+and with few sub-sub-sections, the style is a bit more spread out
+vertically than the \LaTeX{} default, sub-sections are not
+visually much different from sections (especially for document
+classes with a \csa{chapter} command), so the result is less
+hierarchical in appearance than in the \LaTeX{} default.
+
+In this document, for the \hyperref[toc:main]{main table of contents}, we did 
+|\etocsetlevel{subsection}{3}| hence the sub-sections were printed with the
+sub-sub-section inline style. 
+
+Let us, to the contrary, typeset now this main table of contents as if the
+document had been done with a class having the \csa{chapter} command: we will
+print sections as chapters, and subsections as sections. We use
+\csa{etocsetlevel} for that, and also we need to change the font style of
+``sections'' (which in truth are our subsections) to use not the bold but the
+medium series; we modify the \csa{etocfontone} command for that. Also we use dot
+leaders which are less spread out than in the package default.
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocruledstyle[2]{\normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fbox{\parbox{.6\linewidth}{
+      \leftskip 0pt plus .5fil
+      \rightskip 0pt plus -.5fil
+      \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil This is the global table of
+      contents on two columns, using \etoc default line styles, but with
+      sections as chapters, and subsections as sections.
+      }}}
+\etocdefaultlines
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+\begingroup
+\etocsetlevel{section}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{subsection}{1}
+\renewcommand*{\etocfontone}{\normalfont \normalsize}
+\renewcommand*{\etoctoclineleaders}
+        {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to 1ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\etocruledstyle[2]{\normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fbox{\parbox{.6\linewidth}{
+      \leftskip 0pt plus .5fil
+      \rightskip 0pt plus -.5fil
+      \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil This is the global table of
+      contents on two columns, using \etoc default line styles, but with
+      sections as chapters, and subsections as sections.
+      }}}
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+
+\begingroup
+\etocsetlevel{section}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{subsection}{1}
+\renewcommand*{\etocfontone}{\normalfont \normalsize}
+\renewcommand*{\etoctoclineleaders}
+        {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to 1ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+
+\section{Customizing \etoc}
+
+\subsection{Customizing  the \etoc pre-defined line styles}
+
+We will simply list the relevant commands as defined in the
+package. Customizing them goes through suitable
+\csa{renewcommand}s:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand*\etocfontminustwo{\normalfont \LARGE \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfontminusone{\normalfont \large \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfontzero{\normalfont \large \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfontone{\normalfont \normalsize \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfonttwo{\normalfont \normalsize}
+\newcommand*\etocfontthree{\normalfont \footnotesize}
+
+\newcommand*\etocsepminustwo{4ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepminusone{4ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepzero{2.5ex plus .4ex minus .4ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepone{1.5ex plus .3ex minus .3ex}
+\newcommand*\etocseptwo{.5ex plus .1ex minus .1ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepthree{.25ex plus .05ex minus .05ex}
+
+\newcommand*\etocminustwoleftmargin{1.5em plus 0.5fil}
+\newcommand*\etocminustworightmargin{1.5em plus -0.5fil}
+\newcommand*\etocminusoneleftmargin{1em}
+\newcommand*\etocminusonerightmargin{1em}
+
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadminustwo{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadminusone{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadzero{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadone{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadtwo{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadthree{.9}
+\newcommand*\etoctoclineleaders
+    {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to 2ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\newcommand*\etocabbrevpagename{p.~}  % initial of "page"
+\newcommand*\etocpartname{\partname}  % utilisateurs de frenchb: attention
+                                      % car donne "partie" sans majuscule.
+\newcommand*\etocbookname{Book} % to be modified according to language
+\end{verbatim}
+
+No customizing of the standard line styles is possible from
+within \etoc. As already explained, when
+\csa{etocstandardlines} has been issued, the package just makes
+itself very discrete and acts only at the global level, and
+the TOC entries are (hopefully) formatted as would have
+happened in the absence of \etoc.\footnote{with the
+  KOMA-script classes, we noticed that
+  \csa{etocstandarddisplaystyle} was apparently needed for the
+  KOMA options |toc=left| to be active at the level of the line entries.}  
+
+
+The \csa{etocstandardlines} compatibility mode will work also with
+sectioning commands made known to \etoc via \csa{etocsetlevel},
+under the condition of course that these sectioning commands
+are accompanied with all the relevant definitions for
+typesetting toc entries in the \LaTeX{} default manner
+(existence of the macros \csa{l@something} . . .).
+
+Using the command \csa{etocsetstyle}, be it in the preamble or
+in the body of the document, has the secondary effect of
+switching off the compatibility mode.
+
+\subsection{Customizing the toc display styles}
+\label{ssec:customdisplay}
+
+Again we list the relevant macros, what they do should be
+legible from their names. Note that \csa{renewcommand}'s and
+not \csa{setlength}'s have to be used for what appear to be
+lengths, and that color commands are not just color
+specifications, they must include \csa{color}, and are canceled
+by re-defining them to do \csa{relax}.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand*\etocabovetocskip{3.5ex plus 1ex minus .2ex} 
+\newcommand*\etocbelowtocskip{3.5ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}
+
+\newcommand*\etoccolumnsep{2em}
+\newcommand*\etocmulticolsep{0ex}
+\newcommand*\etocmulticolpretolerance{-1}
+\newcommand*\etocmulticoltolerance{200}
+\newcommand*\etocdefaultnbcol{2}
+\newcommand*\etocinnertopsep{2ex}
+\newcommand*\etoctoprule{\hrule}
+\newcommand*\etoctoprulecolorcmd{\relax}
+
+% for the framed style only:
+\newcommand*\etocinnerleftsep{2em}
+\newcommand*\etocinnerrightsep{2em}
+\newcommand*\etocinnerbottomsep{3.5ex}
+
+\newcommand*\etocleftrule{\vrule}
+\newcommand*\etocrightrule{\vrule}
+\newcommand*\etocbottomrule{\hrule}
+\newcommand*\etocleftrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+\newcommand*\etocrightrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+\newcommand*\etocbottomrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+
+\newcommand*\etocbkgcolorcmd{\relax}
+
+% hooks
+\newcommand\etocframedmphook{\relax}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \csa{etocframedmphook} is positioned immediately
+after the beginning of a minipage environment where the
+contents of the framed TOC are typeset. 
+
+The \csa{...colorcmd} commands are initially set to expand to
+\csa{relax} (hence do not require package |color| or |xcolor|
+to be loaded). If one has modified a command such as
+\csa{etocbkgcolorcmd} to expand to a color command and wants
+to reset it to do nothing, one \emph{must} use
+|\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\relax}| and not
+\csa{let}\csa{etocbkgcolorcmd}\csa{relax}.
+
+Regarding the dimensions of the top rule they can be specified
+in |ex|'s or |em|'s as in this example:
+\centeredline{|\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 1ex}|} 
+The package code is done in such a manner
+that it is the font size in instance at the end of typesetting
+the title argument to \csa{etocruledtoc} or
+\csa{etocframedtoc} which will be used for the meaning of the
+`1ex'. Of course also the other rule commands can have their
+dimensions in font relative units, but their values are
+decided on the basis of the font in effect just before the
+table of contents.
+
+The top and bottom rules do not have to be rules and can be
+horizontal \emph{leaders} (of a specified height) in the general
+\TeX{} sense. However the left and right rules are not
+used as (horizontal) leaders but as objects of a given specified
+width. Note that \emph{only} the Plain \TeX{} syntax for rules is
+accepted here. 
+
+\section{One more example of colored TOC layout}
+\label{ssec:tocclone}
+
+The command \csa{etocframedstyle} puts the title on the top
+rule in a centered position. This is not very convenient for
+this example so we included the title as part of the
+\meta{start} code at section level, to get it \emph{inside}
+the frame.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\definecolor{subsecnum}{RGB}{13,151,225}
+\definecolor{secbackground}{RGB}{0,177,235}
+\definecolor{tocbackground}{RGB}{212,237,252}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 1cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width .5cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerbottomsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand\shiftedwhiterule[2]{%
+    \hbox to \linewidth{\color{white}%
+    \hskip#1\leaders\vrule height1pt\hfil}\nointerlineskip\vskip#2}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\shiftedwhiterule{\leftskip}{6pt}}
+  {\sffamily\footnotesize
+     \leftskip2.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+     \hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+     \color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+     \rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+     \nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\shiftedwhiterule{1.5cm}{6pt}}
+  {\sffamily\small
+     \leftskip1.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+     \hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+     \color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+     \rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+     \nointerlineskip\vskip6pt}
+  {}
+
+\newcommand{\coloredstuff}[2]{%
+            \leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parskip0pt
+            \fboxsep0pt % \colorbox uses \fboxsep also when no frame!
+       \noindent\colorbox{secbackground}
+               {\parbox{\linewidth}{%
+                    \vskip5pt
+                    {\noindent\color{#1}#2\par}\nointerlineskip
+                    \vskip3pt}}%
+       \par\nointerlineskip}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+     {\hfil \hyperref[toc:b]{\bfseries\large I am a twin of  
+     that other TOC (click me!)}\hfil}}
+{\vskip3pt\sffamily\small}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+    {\leftskip1.5cm\rightskip.5cm\parfillskip-\rightskip
+     \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocnumber\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+     \etocname\hfill\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocpage\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+ \vskip6pt }
+{}
+
+\etocframedstyle[1]{}
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:clone} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begingroup
+\definecolor{subsecnum}{RGB}{13,151,225}
+\definecolor{secbackground}{RGB}{0,177,235}
+\definecolor{tocbackground}{RGB}{212,237,252}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 1cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width .5cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerbottomsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand\shiftedwhiterule[2]{%
+    \hbox to \linewidth{\color{white}%
+    \hskip#1\leaders\vrule height1pt\hfil}\nointerlineskip
+\vskip#2}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{\leftskip}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\footnotesize
+\leftskip2.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+\hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{1.5cm}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\small
+\leftskip1.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+\hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip6pt}
+{}
+
+\newcommand{\coloredstuff}[2]{%
+            \leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parskip0pt
+            \fboxsep0pt % \colorbox uses \fboxsep also when no frame!
+       \noindent\colorbox{secbackground}
+               {\parbox{\linewidth}{%
+                    \vskip5pt
+                    {\noindent\color{#1}#2\par}\nointerlineskip
+                    \vskip3pt}}%
+       \par\nointerlineskip}
+
+% v1.07l on the occasion of traduction into German documentation 
+     % APRIL 26, 2014 Improvement in the section style for better placement of
+     % page number when the section name is more than one line long. Use of
+     % \makebox rather than \hbox, to be more LaTeX like.
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+     {\hfil \hyperref[toc:b]{\bfseries\large I am a twin of  
+     that other TOC (click me!)}\hfil}}
+{\vskip3pt\sffamily\small}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+    {\leftskip1.5cm\rightskip.5cm\parfillskip-\rightskip
+     \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocnumber\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+     \etocname\hfill\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocpage\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+ \vskip6pt }
+{}
+
+\etocframedstyle[1]{}
+
+\begin{figure}[ht!]\centering
+    \tableofcontents \label{toc:clone} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{figure}
+\endgroup
+
+The TOC has been put in a \hyperref[toc:clone]{float} which appears
+\vpageref{toc:clone}. The coding is a bit involved\footnote{and reveals the
+  author's preference for the \TeX{} syntax...} as it does not use any
+additional package. Also, it was written at some early stage and I have not
+revised it since.
+
+A better solution would be to use some package to set
+up a background color possibly extending accross pages, as the
+framed style (which we used to get this background
+color) can only deal with material short enough to fit on one
+page.
+
+Regarding colors, generally speaking all color commands inside
+\etoc are initially defined to do nothing, and the choice to
+use or not colors is left to the user.
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {tips}
+
+\part{Tips}
+\label{part:tipsandtricks}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+%%%% \invisiblelocaltableofcontents \label{toc:tipsandtricks}
+
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocstandardlines
+\localtableofcontents
+
+\section{... and tricks}
+
+\subsection{Hacking  framed parboxes}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocdefaultlines
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule{\hrule height 2pt depth 2pt}
+\etocruled{\color{green}\fboxrule2pt\fboxsep1ex
+               \fbox{\raisebox{-\fontdimen22\textfont2}
+                    {\color{blue}\parbox{.5\linewidth}
+                       {\normalfont This text is perfectly centered
+                        vertically with respect to the
+                        surrounding horizontal rules.}}}}
+\ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule{\hrule height 2pt depth 2pt}
+
+\etocruled{\color{green}\fboxrule2pt\fboxsep1ex
+              \fbox{\raisebox{-\fontdimen22\textfont2}
+                    {\color{blue}\parbox{.5\linewidth}
+                       {\normalfont This text is perfectly centered
+                        vertically with respect to the
+                        surrounding horizontal rules.}}}}
+              \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+
+
+\subsection{Interverting the levels}
+\label{subsec:interverting}
+
+Let us display and count all subsections occurring in this
+document (see \autoref{part:surprising} for other uses of
+this technique):  
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{2}
+\begingroup
+\etocsetlevel{part}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{section}{3}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+    {\small\begin{enumerate}[itemsep=0pt,label=,leftmargin=0pt]}
+    {\normalfont\bfseries\item}
+    {\roman{enumi}. \mdseries\etocname{} (\etocnumber, p.~\etocpage)}
+    {\end{enumerate}}
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2.75em}
+\renewcommand{\columnseprule}{1pt}
+\etocmulticol[3]{\subsection{All subsections of this document}}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{2}
+
+\begingroup
+\etocdefaultlines
+\etocstandarddisplaystyle
+\etocsetlevel{book}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{part}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{chapter}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{section}{3}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\small
+\begin{enumerate}[itemsep=0pt,label=,leftmargin=0pt]}
+{\normalfont\bfseries\item}
+{\roman{enumi}. \mdseries\etocname{} (\etocnumber, p.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2.75em}
+\renewcommand{\columnseprule}{1pt}
+
+%%\etocmarkbothnouc{List of all subsections}
+%% le mark (\markright) est fait par \subsection
+
+\etocmulticol[3]{\subsection{All subsections of this document}\label{toc:allsubsections}}
+
+
+\endgroup
+
+\subsection{Displaying statistics}\label{ssec:statistics}
+
+Each part of this document starts with a paragraph telling how many
+sections and subsections it has. Well, each one of this paragraph is a
+table of contents! We designed a macro \csa{thispartstats} to do that.
+It uses ``storage'' boxes to keep the information about the first and
+last section or subsection. Using boxes is the simplest manner to
+encapsulate the |hyperref| link for later use (whether there is one or
+none). However, one cannot modify then the font or the color (using the
+\TeX{} primitive \csa{setbox} rather than the \LaTeX{} \csa{sbox} would
+allow to change the color of the un-boxed saved box). If such a need
+arises, one must switch from using boxes to using macros, and store the
+|hyperref| data for later use as was done in the code presented in
+\autoref{ssec:molecule}. We present also this second method.
+
+But first, the code of \csa{thispartstats}:\par
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newsavebox\firstnamei  \newsavebox\firstnumberi
+\newsavebox\lastnamei   \newsavebox\lastnumberi
+\newsavebox\firstnameii \newsavebox\firstnumberii
+\newsavebox\lastnameii  \newsavebox\lastnumberii
+\newcounter{mycounti}   \newcounter{mycountii}
+\newcommand*{\thispartstatsauxi}{} \newcommand*{\thispartstatsauxii}{}
+\newcommand*{\oldtocdepth}{}
+\newcommand*{\thispartstats}{%
+  \setcounter{mycounti}{0}%
+  \setcounter{mycountii}{0}%
+  \def\thispartstatsauxi{%
+         \sbox{\firstnamei}{\etocname}%
+         \sbox{\firstnumberi}{\etocnumber}%
+         \def\thispartstatsauxi{}}%
+  \def\thispartstatsauxii{%
+         \sbox{\firstnameii}{\etocname}%
+         \sbox{\firstnumberii}{\etocnumber}%
+         \def\thispartstatsauxii{}}%
+  \begingroup
+  \etocsetstyle{subsection} {} {}
+    {\thispartstatsauxii
+     \stepcounter{mycountii}%
+     \sbox{\lastnameii}{\etocname}%
+     \sbox{\lastnumberii}{\etocnumber}} {}%
+  \etocsetstyle{section} {} {}
+    {\thispartstatsauxi
+     \stepcounter{mycounti}%
+     \sbox{\lastnamei}{\etocname}%
+     \sbox{\lastnumberi}{\etocnumber}}
+    {Here are some statistics for this part: it contains \arabic{mycounti}
+    section\ifnum\value{mycounti}>1 s\fi{} and \arabic{mycountii}
+    subsection\ifnum\value{mycountii}>1 s\fi. The name of the first section is
+    \unhbox\firstnamei{} and the corresponding number is \unhbox\firstnumberi. 
+    The name of the last section is \unhbox\lastnamei{} and its number is
+    \unhbox\lastnumberi. The name of the first subsection is \unhbox\firstnameii{}
+    and the corresponding number is \unhbox\firstnumberii. The name of the last
+    subsection is \unhbox\lastnameii{} and its number is \unhbox\lastnumberii.}%
+  \etocinline % cancels the automatic \par automatically before the TOC
+  \etocsettocstyle {}{}
+  \etocsetnexttocdepth{2}%
+  \localtableofcontents  % to be used at the top level of a Part.
+  \endgroup
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+And now, the variant with macros rather than boxes (this variant as it
+stands here is for using within a section).
+\begin{verbatim}
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand*\firstsubname   {}  \newcommand*\lastsubname    {}
+\newcommand*\firstsubnumber {}  \newcommand*\lastsubnumber  {}
+\newcommand*\thisspecialstatsaux{}
+\newcommand*{\thisspecialstats}{%
+  \setcounter{mycounti}{0}%
+  \def\thisspecialstatsaux{%
+         \let\firstsubname\etocthelinkedname
+         \let\firstsubnumber\etocthelinkednumber
+         \def\thisspecialstatsaux{}}
+  \begingroup
+  \etocsetstyle{subsection} {} {}
+    {\thisspecialstatsaux
+     \stepcounter{mycounti}%
+     \let\lastsubname\etocthelinkedname
+     \let\lastsubnumber\etocthelinkednumber }
+    {Here are some statistics for this section. It contains \arabic{mycounti}
+      subsections. The name of its first is \emph{\firstsubname{}} and the 
+      corresponding number is {\firstsubnumber}. The name of the last 
+      subsection is \emph{\lastsubname{}} and its number is {\lastsubnumber}.}% 
+   \etocsettocstyle {}{}
+   \etocinline
+   \etocsetnexttocdepth {1}%
+   \localtableofcontents % to be used within a section
+  \endgroup
+}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Using depth tags}
+\label{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}
+
+We want a TOC which will have a heading for each |\part| (except
+the last part with the code source, which we decide not to
+include), and will additionally open up \autoref{part:globalcmds}
+up to paragraphs. To achieve this we added to this source various
+\csb{etocdepthtag.toc} commands, and it remains now to set the
+levels for each tag using \csb{etocsettagdepth} (this was used
+earlier in this document, in \autoref{sec:secondexample}, within a
+group hence it did not affect the other tables of contents).
+
+However, the package line styles do not display paragraphs, and the
+standard line styles of the document class give too much vertical
+spacing (in this context) when displaying a Part heading in the TOC. So
+we cook up our own, quickly designed line styles, in the style of
+\autoref{sec:firstexample} (but with a way to put page numbers on the
+right which is more like the method used by \LaTeX2e's
+|\@dottedtocline|; and multi-line headings now leave empty the area
+underneath the numbers contrarily to the code from
+\autoref{sec:firstexample}). And after a few minutes for choosing
+lengths (now that this has been done once, it can be recycled easily) we
+get:
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {all}
+\begingroup
+\parindent 0pt
+\leftskip 0cm
+\rightskip 0.75cm
+\parfillskip -\rightskip
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMargin}
+    {\nobreak\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par}
+\renewcommand*\etoctoclineleaders
+    {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+    {\nobreak\leaders\etoctoclineleaders\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par }
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\large\llap{\makebox[1cm][r]{\etocnumber\ \ }}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMargin\smallskip}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.75cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[.75cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 2.75cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 4cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.25cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {paragraph}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 5.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.5cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{part}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {paragraph}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule {\hrule height 3pt\relax }
+\renewcommand\etoctoprulecolorcmd {\color{blue}}
+\renewcommand\etocaftercontentshook 
+   {\medskip\begingroup \color{blue}\hrule height 3pt \endgroup }
+\etocruledstyle [1]{\Large\bfseries 
+                    \fbox{\makebox[8cm]{A TOC using depth tags}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {all}
+\begingroup 
+\parindent 0pt \leftskip 0cm \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip -\rightskip
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMargin}
+    {\nobreak\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par}
+\renewcommand*\etoctoclineleaders
+    {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+    {\nobreak\leaders\etoctoclineleaders\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par }
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\large\llap{\makebox[1cm][r]{\etocnumber\ \ }}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMargin\smallskip}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.75cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[.75cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 2.75cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 4cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.25cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {paragraph}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 5.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.5cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{part}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {paragraph}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule {\hrule height 3pt\relax }
+\renewcommand\etoctoprulecolorcmd {\color{blue}}
+\renewcommand\etocaftercontentshook 
+   {\medskip\begingroup \color{blue}\hrule height 3pt \endgroup }
+\etocruledstyle [1]{\Large\bfseries 
+                    \fbox{\makebox[8cm]{A TOC using depth tags}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+\endgroup
+
+\subsection{Typesetting the TOC as a table (the old way)}
+\label{ssec:tocastableold}
+
+Due to, among other things, the fact that alignment cells create and close
+groups, and that by default definitions of \csb{etocname}, \csb{etocnumber},
+\csb{etocpage} made by \etoc are local, it was not easy to typeset a TOC as
+table with \etoc, prior to release |1.08|. 
+
+Not only \csb{etocname} etc... caused a problem, but also the basic
+redefinition of \csa{contentsline} was made by \etoc only after the
+first argument to \csb{etocsettocstyle} had been executed, hence if this
+argument were to open a tabular, the \etoc redefinition of
+\csa{contentsline} would be done in the first cell of the first row and
+get lost thereafter.
+
+Thus one had to resort to the technique explained in \autoref{tocastree}
+of using the execution of \csa{tableofcontents} as a way to store data
+which was then displayed later.
+
+For the record, here is how the TOC from \autoref{sec:tocastable} was
+coded in the old days. We don't have here the problems with the
+positioning of |\hline|'s we face with the newer method; on the other
+hand we must manipulate token registers which are not familiar to most
+\LaTeX{} users (macros could be used, but would be more cumbersome,
+except perhaps if using the \eTeX{} \csa{unexpanded}).
+
+The method here is the most powerful because it filters out of the
+|.toc| file only the data we want (the other things are not ignored,
+they are executed but hopefully do not create havoc; typically they are
+language changing instructions, or updates to certain counters, etc...),
+and we are less susceptible to fall potential victims of various
+external macros inserted in the |.toc| file by other packages.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtoks\toctabletok
+\newcommand*\appendtotok[2]{% #1=toks variable, #2=macro, expands once #2
+  #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter {\expandafter\the\expandafter #1#2}}
+
+\newcommand*\PreparePart{%
+  \toks0 \expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \toks2 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedname}%
+  \toks4 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedpage}%
+  \edef\toctablepiece {\noexpand\hline
+                      \noexpand\strut\the\toks0 &\noexpand\bfseries\the\toks2 
+                                 &\the\toks4 \noexpand\\\noexpand\hline}% 
+}
+\newcommand*\PrepareSection{%
+  \toks0 \expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \toks2 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedname}%
+  \toks4 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedpage}%
+  \edef\toctablepiece {\the\toks0 &\the\toks2 &\the\toks4 \noexpand\\}% 
+}
+% new version for 1.07k, 2014/03/06
+\newcommand*{\PrepareSubsection}{%
+  \toks0 \expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \toks2 \expandafter{\expandafter\itshape\etocthelinkedname\strut}%
+  \toks4 \expandafter{\expandafter\itshape\etocthelinkedpage}%
+  \edef\toctablepiece{&\noexpand\makebox[1cm][c]{\the\toks0}%
+                      \noexpand\parbox[t]{\dimexpr6cm-\tabcolsep\relax}
+                                         {\noexpand\sloppy\the\toks2}%
+                      &\the\toks4 \noexpand\\}%
+}
+
+\begingroup
+\etocsetstyle{part}{}{}{\PreparePart \appendtotok\toctabletok\toctablepiece}{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}{}{}{\PrepareSection \appendtotok\toctabletok\toctablepiece}{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{}{}{\PrepareSubsection\appendtotok\toctabletok\toctablepiece}{}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\toctabletok{\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+                 \begin{longtable}{|>{\bfseries}c|p{7cm}|r|}\hline
+                 \multicolumn{3}{|c|}{\Large\bfseries\strut TABLE OF CONTENTS}%
+                 \\\hline\hline}}
+    {\global\toctabletok\expandafter{\the\toctabletok\hline\end{longtable}}}
+\etocsettocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents
+\the\toctabletok
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Compatibility with other packages}
+\label{etocaftertochook}
+
+The contents of the |.toc| file (if it already exists) are read into memory by
+\etoc once, at the time of |\begin{document}|.\footnote{New with |1.07m|.
+    Earlier versions read the |.toc| file at the time of
+    \csa{usepackage\{etoc\}}. Thanks to Denis Bitouzé who signaled a Babel
+    related problem, which turned out to be caused by this.}
+
+\begin{framed}
+  One should load \etoc \emph{after} \texttt{babel}. This is in order for
+  |babel|'s shorthands to be active at the time when \etoc loads the |.toc|
+  file.
+\end{framed}
+
+The |.toc| file remains available
+  to other packages for read operations until the location of the first table
+  of contents at which time a write stream is opened by \etoc and from that
+  point the file is erased until its contents are again written to the disk by
+  \LaTeX{} at the end of the compilation.
+
+\etoc loads the package |multicol|. 
+
+\etoc requires the |.toc| file to use the |\contentsline| macro (possibly
+patched by other packages). It is thus incompatible with the |beamer| class.
+However, if |beamer| is used in an article mode, i.e., with the article class
+in conjunction with the |beamerarticle| package, then \etoc should work.
+
+\etoc is |hyperref| aware and hopefully |hyperref| compatible: the macros
+\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber}, and \csa{etocpage} contain the |hyperref|
+links, if present (note that the \emph{linktoc=all} option of |hyperref| tells
+it to put a link also in the page number corresponding to a given toc entry).
+For example, the tables of contents of the present document are all fully
+linked. It doesn't matter whether \etoc or |hyperref| is loaded first.
+
+Release |1.07k| adds compatibility with package
+|tocloft|:\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tocloft}} steps are
+taken to prevent the redefinition of |\tableofcontents| done by
+|tocloft| at |\begin{document}|.
+%
+As long as \etoc is left in compatibility mode the customization done by
+|tocloft| will be obeyed, for both the line styles and the TOC title.
+One may still benefit from the \emph{depth tags} management by \etoc,
+from its |\localtableofcontents|, from its |\label+\ref| mechanism. One
+may use |\etocsetstyle| to define via \etoc the layout for one TOC and
+then use rather |tocloft| for another one, if |\tableofcontents| follows
+\csb{etocstandardlines} and \csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle}. In this
+compatibility mode |\etocsetlevel{division unit}{6}| will render
+invisible the chosen division level, but exchanging levels is otherwise
+not possible.
+
+\begin{framed}
+  One should load \etoc \emph{after} \texttt{tocloft}. A warning is
+  issued if otherwise.
+\end{framed}
+
+Release |1.07l| has also improved the compatibility with the |memoir| class: its
+|appendix| level has been made known to \etoc. It is at the same level as
+|chapter|, thus the chapter line style should possibly do a test for some user
+defined boolean whose activation may be added to the |.toc| file at the suitable
+location via |\addtocontents{toc}{..}|, if one needs to distinguish the two
+kinds of divisions.
+
+\etoc can not really cohabit with packages modifying the \csa{tableofcontents}
+  command: some sort of truce can be achieved if \etoc is loaded last, hence is
+  the winner. 
+
+  \begin{framed}
+    Do not modify the |\tableofcontents| command like this:
+    \centeredline{|\let\oldtableofcontents\tableofcontents|}
+    \centeredline{|\renewcommand\tableofcontents{\oldtableofcontents\mystuff}|}
+    as this will make the |\label/\ref| mechanism impossible. Rather you may do
+    \centeredline{|\renewcommand\etocaftertochook{\mystuff}|} and there is
+    also \csb{etocaftercontentshook} which is executed a bit
+    earlier\footnotemark{}
+    just before
+    the 
+    closing part of the toc display style (and thus still within a group.)
+  \end{framed}
+\footnotetext{contrarily to \csa{etocaftertochook},
+      \csa{etocaftercontentshook} is not executed if the |tocdepth| did not
+      allow the printing of the TOC.}
+
+  \etoc used to be incompatible with package
+  |tocvsec2|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tocvsec2}}; it now cohabits, sort
+  of, as it deactivates |tocvsec2|'s modification of |\tableofcontents| (done in
+  the style above) and also cancels its other |toc|-related macros, but
+  reimplements partially their functionality with \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}. By
+  the way, at least two latex runs are necessary for new uses of this command in
+  a document to have an effect in tables of contents.
+
+When a \localtoc is inserted by the user in the document, a
+line containing an \etoc inner command and an identification
+number is added to the |.toc| file. The correct local table of
+contents will be displayed only on the next |latex| run.
+
+It is possible to customize (using package |tocloft| for
+example) throughout the document the macros \csa{l@section},
+\csa{l@subsection} ... and the effect will be seen in the next
+table of contents typeset by \etoc in compatibility mode.
+
+It is possible to use simultaneously \etoc and
+{\color{niceone}|tableof|}\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tableof}}. Release
+|1.08| of \etoc requires at least version |1.4a| of |tableof|. If
+\csb{etocglobaldefs} is put in the preamble, this must be after the loading of
+package |tableof|. {\color{niceone}|tableof|} command \csa{nexttocwithtags}
+should work as expected. 
+
+{\color{niceone}|tableof|} commands \csa{tableof}, \csa{tablenotof}, ... will
+typeset the (a priori global) table of contents according to the document
+class defaults, obeying the \etoc depth tags; as explained in the |tableof|
+documentation they do not typeset a TOC title. They should \emph{not} be used
+in case \csb{etocglobaldefs} was issued before, except if its scope has been
+terminated since then, or \csb{etoclocaldefs} has cancelled its influence.
+
+\subsection{\TeX nical matters}
+
+The \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber}, \csa{etocpage} commands are protected against
+premature expansion. They contain suitable |hyperref| links if package
+|hyperref| is loaded and active for the TOC. The commands \csa{etoclink} and
+\csa{etocifnumbered} are also protected against premature expansion.
+
+On the other hand \csa{etocthename}, \csa{etocthenumber},
+\csa{etocthepage} do not represent |hyperref| links, and are
+\emph{not} protected against expansion.
+
+The commands such as \csa{etocsetstyle}, \csa{etocsetlevel},
+\csa{etocsettocstyle}, \csa{etocmulticolstyle},
+\csa{etocruledstyle}, \csa{etocframedstyle} obey \LaTeX{}'s
+groups. All TOCs are typeset inside groups.
+
+\subsection{Errors and catastrophes}
+
+  After using \csa{etocsetstyle} for one level, the remaining
+  uncustomized levels use the \etoc default styles (those
+  which are activated by \csa{etocdefaultlines}). One has to
+  make sure that all levels needed for the next table of
+  contents are mutually compatible: in particular the \etoc
+  default line styles expect each to be started in ``vertical mode''.
+
+  When using multiple \toc commands in a document, one should beware from adding
+  typesetting instructions directly in the |.toc| file, as they will be executed
+  by \etoc for all TOCs: even for a \localtoc it doesn't matter if that
+  instruction seems to concern material outside of its scope, it will get
+  executed nevertheless. If absolutely necessary (but this should never be)
+  these instructions should be done in such a way that they can be activated or
+  deactivated easily from the document source, as need be.
+
+  As is usual with toc and labels, after each change, one has
+  to run latex a certain number of times to let the produced
+  document get its final appearance (at least twice).\par
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {code}
+
+\part{The code}
+
+\section{Timestamp}
+
+This is the documentation as of \texttt{\etocdocdate}, printed from the
+source file with the time stamp \texttt{\etocdtxtimestamp}. The package
+version is \texttt{\etocpkgversion}, of \texttt{\etocpkgdate}.
+
+% STOP ENGLISH VERSION
+^^Afi
+
+^^Acatcode92 12
+
+^^Aifnum^^AForDeutsch=1
+
+    ^^Acatcode92 0
+
+
+% START GERMAN (DEUTSCH) VERSION
+\bookmark[named=FirstPage,level=1]{Titelseite}% 10 octobre 2013. 
+
+\begin{center}
+  {\normalfont\Large Das \etoc-Paket}\\
+  \textsc{Jean-François Burnol}\par
+  \footnotesize \ttfamily jfbu (at) free (dot) fr\\
+  Paketversion: \etocDEpkgversion\ (\etocDEpkgdate) \let\thefootnote\empty
+  \footnote{Original Dokumentationzeitstempel: ``\etocDEdocdate''.\par
+    Übersetzt ins Deutsche von Felix Baral-Weber, Jenny Rothkrämer-Vogt, Daniel
+    Büttner, Claudia Dahl, Christian Otto und Christine Römer (FSU Jena).
+    Hinweise zur Übersetzung an Christine\_Roemer at t-online dot de.}\par
+\end{center}
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}
+
+\etocdepthtag.toc {preamble}
+%----
+% MAIN TOC
+%
+\etocsettocdepth {subsubsection}
+\etoctoclines
+\etocmarkboth\contentsname
+\etocmulticolstyle[1]
+     {\pdfbookmark[1]{Inhaltsverzeichnis}{MAINTOC}%
+      \noindent\bfseries\Large
+      \leaders\hrule height1pt\hfill
+      \MakeUppercase{Inhaltsverzeichnis}}
+\begingroup
+  \etocsetlevel{subsection}{3}
+  \etocsetlevel{subsubsection}{6}
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:main}
+\endgroup
+
+\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\abstractname}
+\begin{abstract}
+  Das \etoc-Paket gibt dem Nutzer lückenlose Möglichkeiten, die Einträge des
+  Inhaltsverzeichnis individuell über \emph{Name}, \emph{Nummer}, und
+  \emph{Seitenzahl} für jede gliedernde Einheit zu setzen. Dieses wird durch die
+  Definition von \emph{Zeilenstilen (line-styles)} für jede Unterteilungsstufe
+  des Dokuments realisiert. Das Paket bietet darüber hinaus seinen eigenen
+  Zeilenstile. Einfachere werden als Beispiele in dieser Dokumentation
+  angeboten. Die einfachste Nutzung wird durch die Verwendung der
+  Layout-Hilfsmittel, von Paketen die sich mit Listen-Umgebungen beschäftigen,
+  gewährt.
+  
+  In Hinsicht auf das \emph{globale Inhaltsverzeichnis} bietet \etoc\
+  vordefinierte Stile, die auf der Mehrspaltenansicht mit optionalen,
+  unterstrichenen Titeln oder eingerahmten Inhalten basieren.
+
+  Der \csa{tableofcontents}-Befehl kann beliebig mehrfach benutzt werden. Er hat
+  die Variante \csa{localtableofcontents}, welche die Inhaltsangabe 'local' zur
+  aktuellen Dokumenten-Sektion ausgibt. Eine Erweiterung der
+  \csa{label}/\csa{ref}-Syntax erlaubt die Reproduktion (mit anderem Layout)
+  einer lokalen Inhaltsangabe, die irgendwo anders im Dokument definiert wurde.
+
+  Mit "`tiefen Tags"' erhält man noch feinere Kontrolle über jede Inhaltsangabe
+  und darüber, welche unterteilende Einheit angezeigt werden soll, oder nicht.
+
+  Mit \emph{Kompatibilismus} wird die Formatierung der Dokumentklasse geerbt
+  (die womöglich von anderen Paketen verändert wurde); und die Formatierung, die
+  von der Dokumentklasse (die womöglich von anderen Paketen verändert wurde)
+  geerbt wird.
+
+  Die Zuweisung von Ebenen zu den unterteilenden Einheiten kann zu jeder Zeit
+  geändert werden und \etoc kann dadurch in einer ziemlich generellen Weise
+  genutzt werden, um selbsterstellte 'Listen von' zu erzeugen. Keine
+  Zusatzdateien werden zusätzlich zu der Standard-|.toc|-Datei benutzt.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Vorwort}
+
+Andere populäre Pakete, die sich mit Inhaltsangaben befassen, sind
+|tocloft|, |titletoc| und |minitoc|. Warum also ein anderes? 
+Ich habe \etoc erst für mich selbst entwickelt und  
+später von den anderen Paketen erfahren.
+
+Wie es auch in der |tocloft|-Dokumentation erklärt wird, ist das
+Standard-\LaTeX -Layout für Inhaltsangaben in den Klassen-Definitionen
+begraben. Im Besonderen sind die meisten Längen hart codiert und der 
+einzige Weg für den Benutzer, sie zu ändern, ist, die Klasse in den
+Dokumenten-Ordner zu kopieren und dann die Längen zu ändern.
+Die vernünftigere Alternative ist die Benutzung eines auf das Veränderungsziel
+gerichteten Pakets, wie |tocloft| oder eine andere flexible Dokumentklasse.
+
+Freilich, obwohl jetzt hoffentlich nichts mehr hart codiert ist, 
+muss man noch immer das Paket oder die Klassen-Definitionen durchgehen.
+Das bedeutet, dass man sich viele (vermutlich große) Menge an Makros
+merken muss, die nur dieser Aufgabe dienen. Und man wird immer
+auf die Anpassung eines zu Anfang gegebenen Layouts eingeschränkt sein.
+
+Der Sinn von \etoc ist ein anderer. Der Nutzer wird sich mit 
+\emph{Name}, \emph{Nummer} und der \emph{Seitenzahl} beschäftigen. 
+Diese korresponieren mit jeder Dokumenten-Unterteilung (und können in
+einer Zeile der |.toc|-Datei gefunden werden). Sie können, wenn gewünscht,
+durch die Befehle \csb{etocname}, \csb{etocnumber} und \csb{etocpage} 
+abgerufen werden. 
+
+\etoc scheint (mindestens teilweise) mit den Dokument-Klassen |article|, 
+|book|, |report|, |scrartcl|, |scrbook|, |scrreprt| und |memoir| 
+kompatibel zu  sein. Seit der Version |1.07k| ist es möglich \etoc 
+gleichzeitig mit |tocloft| zu benutzen.
+
+\section{Lizenz}
+
+\begingroup\ttfamily\small\hyphenchar\font -1
+           \parindent0pt 
+           \obeyspaces\obeylines
+\etocLicense\endgroup
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocsettocdepth {subsection}
+
+\etocdepthtag.toc{overview}
+
+\part{Überblick}\label{part:overview}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\invisiblelocaltableofcontents \label{toc:overview}
+
+\section{Muss ich Computerfreak sein, um \etoc benutzen zu können?}
+
+Nicht wirklich. Der einfachste Weg ist die Benutzung von 
+|enumerate|-Umgebungen mit den Anpassungsmöglichkeiten von 
+Paketen wie |enumitem|, \footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/enumitem}} 
+um von \etoc aus der |.toc|-Datei die abgerufenen Daten anzuzeigen.
+Die Daten bestehen aus \emph{Name} (\csb{etocname}), \emph{Gliederungsnummer}
+(\csb{etocnumber}) und \emph{Seitenzahl} (\csb{etocpage}).
+
+Dieses wird \hyperref[toc:a]{zu Beginn} von \autoref{part:linestyles}
+gezeigt. Anspruchsvollere Beispiele würden anspruchsvollere
+|enumitem|-Optionen benutzen. Man könnte nun sagen, dass der Nutzer
+sich einige Anpassungen merken muss. Und das ist auch so, aber die 
+Syntax und Optionsbezeichnungen, die es zu behalten gilt, sind
+in keinster Weise ähnlich.
+
+Die Methode wird \hyperref[sec:firstexample]{später} 
+(\autoref{sec:firstexample}) erklärt. Dafür ist ein wenig Wissen über
+|\leftskip|, |\rightskip| usw. notwendig. Und eine Ausarbeitung , deren 
+Code kann man hier (\autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}) finden, die Nachahmung des 
+Standardaussehens einer Inhaltsangabe. 
+
+Wie Sie beim Lesen dieser Anleitung noch sehen werden, ist \etoc
+ziemlich vielfältig (ganz besonders, weil es erlaubt, die Hierarchie jeder 
+unterteilenden Einheit des Dokuments zu re-definieren) und man kann damit 
+überraschende Effekte erreichen: \autoref{part:surprising} handelt davon. Mehr 
+davon gibt es noch in \autoref{part:tipsandtricks}.
+
+\begin{framed}
+\setcounter{mycounti}{0}%
+  \etocinline
+\etocsetlevel{part}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{chapter}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}
+\etocsetstyle{visibletoc}
+    {}
+    {\stepcounter{mycounti}}
+    {}
+    {}
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{0}
+\tableofcontents
+Ein ganz besonders wichtiger Aspekt von \etoc ist, dass es darauf ausgelegt ist,
+viele Inhaltsangaben in dem selben Dokument zu erzeugen, \emph{Mit nur einer
+  |.toc|-Datei.} Die gegenwärtige Dokumentation enthält \arabic{mycounti}
+sichtbare Inhaltsangaben (und ein paar unsichtbare). Sie benutzt dabei nur eine
+|.toc|-Datei!\footnotemark{} Darum sollte man zweimal nachdenken, bevor man
+manuell extra Befehle zu der |.toc|-Datei hinzufügt (siehe
+\autoref{sec:addingtotoc}).
+\end{framed}
+
+\footnotetext{Das Selbstzählen wurde durch eine Inhaltsangabe erreicht, die 
+in einen gerahmten Paragraphen eingesetzt wurde! \dots Die Technik für diese Art
+von Effekt wird später erklärt.}
+
+
+\subsection{Beschränkungen in der Benutzung von Listen-Umgebungen für
+Inhalsangaben}
+\label{ssec:limitations}
+
+Es gibt ein paar Einschränkungen für das Nutzen von Listen-Umgebungen
+beim Setzen der TOCs. Eine davon liegt dem 
+Geltungsbereichsbeschränkungen der Umgebungen inne. Die |.toc|-Datei
+könnte neben den Informationen zum Stil einige andere Befehle
+beinhalten, die Probleme hervorrufen können
+(\LaTeX -Umgebungen schaffen Gruppen.).
+
+Darum machen die eingebauten "`Zeilenstile"' (line styles), wie sie von \etoc
+vorgeschlagen werden (die durch die \hyperref[toc:main]{Hauptinhaltsangabe} in
+diesem Dokument gezeigt werden) keinen Gebrauch von Umgebungen. Tatsächlich
+nutzt in dieser Gebrauchsanweisung nur die \hyperref[toc:a]{Inhaltsangabe} zu
+Beginn von \autoref{part:linestyles} und in \autoref{toc:allsubsections}
+e\texttt{numerate}-Umgebungen, um Zeilenstile anzugeben.
+
+\section{Zeilenstile und Stile der Inhaltsangabe (toc display style)}
+
+Eine Unterscheidung muss zwischen den \emph{Zeilenstilen},
+\emph{z.\,B.} der Art und Weise wie Namen, Kapitelnummern und 
+Seitenzahlen auf jedem Level angezeigt werden und dem
+\emph{Inhaltsangabenstil} (mangels einer besseren Bezeichnung)
+gemacht werden. Dieser sagt, wie die Titel gesetzt werden sollen,
+ob oder nicht ein Eintrag in die |.toc|-Datei gemacht werden soll,
+ob oder nicht der Inhalt mit mehreren Spalten gesetzt werden soll,
+usw..., der letztere wird von \csa{etocsettocstyle} (oder einem
+höherrangigen Befehl) geregelt. Das erste wird von 
+\csa{etocsetstyle} initialisiert.
+
+\subsection{\csbhyp{etocsetstyle} für den Zeilenstil}
+
+Das ist der Befehl, der \etoc sagt, was es mit \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber},
+und \csa{etocpage} machen soll. Er hat fünf Pflichtargumente: Das erste ist der
+Name der unterteilenden Einheit: Im Vorhinein bekannte Namen sind |book|,
+|part|, |chapter|, |section|, |subsection|, |subsubsection|, |paragraph|,
+|subparagraph| und viele weitere können anhand dem \csb{etocsetlevel}-Befehl
+einem (numerischen) Level zugewiesen werden.\footnote{Mit der
+  \texttt{memoir}-Dokumentklasse kennt \etoc \texttt{Appendix} als
+  Kapitelüberschrift.}
+
+
+%% Änderungen zur Übersetzung ins Deutsche:
+%% jf b has added here forgotten emphasized text for 2)&3) and 
+%% removed various \newline. 
+Die vier anderen Argumente von \csb{etocsetstyle}
+spezifizieren:
+1) \emph{Was zu tun ist, wenn dieses Level zuerst nach einem höheren
+  auftritt,}
+2) \& 3) (Zwei Argumente, ein 'Präfix' und ein 'Inhalt')
+\emph{Was zu tun ist, wenn ein neuer Eintrag dieses Typs gefunden wird,}
+und 4) \emph{Das letzte Argument ist der Code, der ausgeführt
+  wird, wenn eine unterteilende Einheit von höherer Wichtigkeit wieder von oben
+  getroffen wird.}
+
+
+\subsection{\csbhyp{etocsettocstyle} für den Stil der Inhaltsangabe}
+
+Der \csb{etocsettocstyle}-Befehl erlaubt es festzulegen,
+was vor und nach den Zeileneinträgen eines Inhaltsverzeichnis
+passieren soll, und im Speziellen wie die Titel ausgegeben
+werden sollen. Er hat zwei Argumente. Das erste wird vor
+der Inhaltsangabe ausgeführt (typischerweise wird es Inhalte
+ausgeben und definiert passende Markierungen für die
+Seitenüberschriften). Der Zweite wird nach der Inhaltsangabe
+ausgeführt.
+
+\etoc bietet vier (anpassbare) höhere Inhaltsabgabenstile:
+\csb{etocmulticolstyle}, \csb{etoctocstyle},
+\csb{etocruledstyle} und \csb{etocframedstyle}.
+Alle nutzen das |multicol|-Paket mit standardmäßig zwei
+Spalten (Einspaltenmodus kann durch das optionale Argument 
+ |[1]| erreicht werden). 
+
+Diese Befehle müssen entweder von \toc oder \localtoc gefolgt sein.
+
+\subsection{Kompatibilismus}\label{ssub:compat}
+\label{etoctoclines}
+\label{etocstandardlines}
+
+Vor den "`Zeilenstilen"' und den "`Inhaltsangabenstilen"' besteht
+die Möglichkeit in den Kompabilitätsmodus zu wechseln, der die
+Standardeinstellungen der Dokumentenklasse nimmt.
+\footnote{Für den "`Inhaltsangabenstil"' überprüft \etoc, ob
+es die Klassen kennt, wenn nicht, fällt es zur |article|-Klasse
+zurück. Es wird auch überprüfen, ob \texttt{tocloft} die
+Inhaltsangaben-Datei verändert hat.}
+Dieses wir wie folgt aktiviert:\\
+\makebox[5.2cm][l]{\csb{etocstandardlines}}
+ |% `Zeileneinträge' wie ohne \usepackage{etoc}|\\
+\makebox[5.2cm][l]{\csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle}}
+ |% `Inhaltsstil'  wie ohne \usepackage{etoc}|
+
+Wenn der Befehl \csa{etocsetstyle} \emph{noch nicht in der Präambel benutzt 
+worden ist}, wird das Paket in |\begin{document}| sitzen (in diesem
+Kompatibilismus). Folglich sollte \csa{usepackage\{etoc\}} hoffentlich
+nichts am Aussehen eines im Vorhinein vorhandenen Dokuments der Klassen 
+|article|, |book|, |report|, |scrartcl|, |scrbook|, |scrreprt| und |memoir|
+ändern.
+
+Jede Benutzung von \csa{etocsetstyle} in der \emph(Präambel des Textkörpers) des
+Dokuments schaltet den Kompabilitäsmodus für Zeilenstile aus, behält ihn aber 
+für den Inhaltsabgabenstil.
+ 
+Man kann ihn für Zeilenstile anhand von \csb{etocstandardlines}
+wieder aktivieren. \csb{etoctoclines} reaktiviert Zeilenstile wie
+Sie mit der Hilfe von \csa{etocsetstyle} definiert wurden, wenn deren
+Gültigkeitsbereich nicht auf eine Gruppe oder eine Umgebung beschränkt 
+war.
+  
+Der Befehl \csb{etocdefaultlines} setzt den Zeilenstil darauf zurück,
+wie er intern von \etoc in \autoref{etocdefaultlines} beschrieben wurde.
+  
+Sogar wenn \csb{etocsetstyle} benutzt wurde, bleibt der globale Stil 
+zu Beginn, wie er in der Dokumentenklasse definiert wurde (oder von dem
+|tocloft| Paket). Man muss den Befehl \csb{etocsettocstyle} oder seine
+Varianten setzen, um diesem Kompatibilitätsmodus auf dem 
+"`Inhaltsangebenstil"'-Level zu beenden. Er wird reaktiviert,
+wenn \csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle} benutzt wird.
+
+\section{Ein erstes Beispiel}
+\label{sec:firstexample}
+
+Hier sehen sie ein erstes Beispiel zur Beschreibung der Zeilenform.
+Wir fügen die Quelldatei direkt nach dem Start von \autoref{part:overview} ein:
+
+\centeredline{|\invisiblelocaltableofcontents \label{toc:overview}|} 
+%
+Dieses erstellt ein Label |toc:overview|, das wir von jeder Stelle im Dokument
+benutzen können:
+%
+\centeredline{|\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}|} 
+%
+Und da wir |\invisible...|,\footnote{Das ist eine Abkürzung, um die |tocdepth|
+  temporär auf |-3| zu setzen. Dieses sagt \etoc, die Inhaltsangabe und die
+  Überschrift nicht auszugeben.} benutzt haben, existiert die lokale
+Inhaltsangabe nur durch seine Klone anderswo im Dokument.
+
+Anhand von \csb{etocdefaultlines} oder dem Stil der Standard-Dokumentklasse,
+anhand von \csb{etocstandardlines}, könnten wir auch die Zeilenform benutzen,
+die von \etoc definiert wird. Hier waren wir jedoch ein wenig ehrgeiziger und
+wollten unser eigenen Stil anlegen. Die Technik ist einfach: Jede Überschrift
+ist an sich ein eigener Paragraph, der sich über mehrere Zeilen erstrecken kann;
+es ist für seinen |\leftskip| selbst verantwortlich.
+
+\begingroup
+\parindent 0pt
+\parfillskip 0pt
+\leftskip 0cm
+\rightskip 1cm
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 0cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\makebox[.5cm][l]{\etocnumber.}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\mdseries\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip .5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\bfseries \Large Mein erstes \etoc: TOC von
+  \autoref{part:overview} (\nameref{part:overview})}
+\tableofcontents \ref {toc:overview}
+\endgroup
+
+Dieses ist ein einfaches Design, das keine Maßnahmen zum Zeilenumbruch
+bereitstellt. Diese sollten zwischen Abschnitten und Unterabschnitten, etc.
+unterbunden werden, da wir es nur für die Inhaltsangabe von diesem Abschnitt
+nutzen. Durch die Abschnitte als höchste Ebene entstand keine Notwendigkeit,
+einen Stil für den ganze Teil zu erstellen. (Wir definierten einen
+Unterabschnitt-Zeilenstil, aber wie sich herausstellt, gibt es keine
+Unterabschnitte in diesem Teil). Die zwei Befehle, die benutzt wurden,
+spezifizieren den Zeilen-Stil (\csb{etocsetstyle}) und den globalen
+Inhaltsausgabestil (\csb{etocruledstyle}).
+
+Das |\rightskip| wird von allen angewandt und schafft Platz, wo die Seitenzahlen
+gedruckt werden. Einzelheiten dieser Technik werden in dem
+\autoref{sec:secondexample} und \autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags} benutzt. Hier
+wird eine Inhaltsangabe mit Abschnitten und Paragraphen verwendet. Beide
+erlauben mehrzeilige Überschriften und nutzen einer Technik, die Seitenzahlen
+mit dem richtigen Seitenabstand auszugeben. Dieses wurde von der Funktionsweise
+von Makros aus \LaTeX2e's |\@dottedtocline| inspiriert.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup\parindent 0pt \parfillskip 0pt \leftskip 0cm \rightskip 1cm
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 0cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\makebox[.5cm][l]{\etocnumber.}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\mdseries\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip .5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}%
+               \etocname\nobreak\hfill\nobreak
+               \rlap{\makebox[1cm]{\etocpage}}\par}
+              {}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\bfseries \Large My first \etoc: TOC von
+  \autoref{part:overview} (\nameref{part:overview})}
+\tableofcontents \ref {toc:overview}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Ein zweites Beispiel}
+\label{sec:secondexample}
+
+Dieses zweite Beispiel zeigt nur den Inhalt von \autoref{part:linestyles} und
+\autoref{part:globalcmds}. Diese Auswahl wird durch die Technik von \emph{depth
+  tags} realisiert, die in \autoref{etocsettagdepth} und
+\autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags} beschrieben wird. Dessen Layout ist in etwa wie
+das von der \hyperref[toc:main]{Hauptinhaltsangabe}, obwohl die Zeilenstile ganz
+anders programmiert sind.
+
+\begingroup
+\newcommand*{\DotsAndPage}
+{\nobreak\leaders\hbox{\bfseries\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}%
+         \hfill\nobreak
+         \makebox[\rightskip][r]{\bfseries\normalsize\etocpage}\par}
+
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+{\parindent 0pt
+ \nobreak
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\pagebreak[3]\bigskip}
+{\large\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape\centering
+  \etocifnumbered{Part \etocnumber{} -- }{}\etocname\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \nobreak\medskip
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \pagebreak[1]\smallskip}
+{\normalsize\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape
+ \etocnumber. \etocname\DotsAndPage }
+{\parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax }
+
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+{\leftskip1cm\rightskip .75cm \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax 
+ \nobreak\smallskip}
+{}
+{\footnotesize\sffamily\mdseries\itshape
+ \etocname{} (\etocnumber, p. \etocpage). }
+{\par\medskip}
+
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{none}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+
+\etocsettocstyle {\centering\LARGE\textsc{\contentsname}\par\nobreak\medskip}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+
+Der Code:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\newcommand*{\DotsAndPage}
+{\nobreak\leaders\hbox{\bfseries\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}%
+         \hfill\nobreak
+         \makebox[\rightskip][r]{\bfseries\normalsize\etocpage}\par}
+
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+{\parindent 0pt
+ \nobreak
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\pagebreak[3]\bigskip}
+{\large\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape\centering
+ \etocifnumbered{Part \etocnumber{} -- }{}\etocname\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \nobreak\medskip
+ \etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\leftskip 0pt \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip-\rightskip
+ \pagebreak[1]\smallskip}
+{\normalsize\rmfamily\bfseries\scshape
+ \etocnumber. \etocname\DotsAndPage }
+{\parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax }
+
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+{\leftskip1cm\rightskip .75cm \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax 
+ \nobreak\smallskip}
+{}
+{\footnotesize\sffamily\mdseries\itshape
+ \etocname{} (\etocnumber, p. \etocpage). }
+{\par\medskip}
+
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{none}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {subsection}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+
+\etocsettocstyle {\centering\LARGE\textsc{\contentsname}\par\nobreak\medskip}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Verlinkte Liste der Hauptbefehle}
+% 16 octobre
+
+\begingroup\raggedcolumns
+\advance\linewidth18pt
+\begin{multicols}{3}\parindent0pt\relax
+  \csb{etocaftercontentshook}\par
+  \csb{etocaftertitlehook}\par
+  \csb{etocaftertochook}\par
+  \csb{etocbeforetitlehook}\par
+  \csb{etocdefaultlines}\par
+  \csb{etocdepthtag.toc}\par
+  \csb{etocdisplay}\par
+  \csb{etocframedstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocframed}\par
+  \csb{etociffirst}\par
+  \csb{etocifnumbered}\par
+  \csb{etocignoredepthtags}\par
+  \csb{etocignoretoctocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocinline}\par
+  \csb{etoclink}\par
+  \csb{etoclocalframed}\par
+  \csb{etoclocalmulticol}\par
+  \csb{etoclocalruled}\par
+  \csb{etocmulticolstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocmulticol}\par
+  \csb{etocname}\par
+  \csb{etocnumber}\par
+  \csb{etocobeydepthtags}\par
+  \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocpage}\par
+  \csb{etocruledstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocruled}\par
+  \csb{etocsetlevel}\par
+  \csb{etocsetnexttocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocsetstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocsettagdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}\par
+  \csb{etocsettocdepth}\par
+  \csb{etocsettocstyle}\par
+  \csb{etocskipfirstprefix}\par
+  \csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle}\par
+  \csb{etocstandardlines}\par
+  \csb{etocthelinkedname}\par
+  \csb{etocthelinkednumber}\par
+  \csb{etocthelinkedpage}\par
+  \csb{etocthelink}\par
+  \csb{etocthename}\par
+  \csb{etocthenumber}\par
+  \csb{etocthepage}\par
+  \csb{etoctoccontentsline}\par
+  \csb{etoctoclines}\par
+%\vspace{5\baselineskip}\hrule height 0pt
+\end{multicols}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\clearpage
+% 15 octobre, je teste les tags
+\etocdepthtag.toc {arbitrarily}
+
+\part{Beliebig viele TOCs und lokale Versionen davon}
+% 13 octobre, ceci était une section avant
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocstandardlines
+\localtableofcontents
+
+\section{Beschriften und anderswo wieder benutzen}
+
+\etoc  erlaubt beliebig viele \csa{tableofcontents}-Befehle in
+ihrem Dokument. Die Zeilen- und Inhaltsangabenstile können
+natürlich dazwischen geändert werden. Außerdem setzt 
+\csa{localtableofcontents} lokale Inhaltsangaben: \emph{z.\,B.} alle 
+Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte innerhalb eines bestimmten 
+Kapitels oder alle Unterabschnitte und tiefer innerhalb eines gegebenen 
+Unterabschnitt usw. 
+
+\etoc erlaubt das Labeln von Inhaltsangaben, beispielsweise mit
+\csa{label\{toc:A\}}, und wird es woanders
+\csa{tableofcontents}\csa{ref\{toc:A\}}, wenn gewollt, wieder anzeigen. Das
+eigentliche Layout (inklusive Titel) wird lokal bestimmt. Die Zeilen- und
+Inhaltsangabenstile (inklusive Titel) sind die aktuellen und der Wert von
+|tocdepth| leistet Folge. Hier ein Beispiel: Die Inhaltsangabe von
+\autoref{part:custom} ist innerhalb eines \hyperref[toc:d]{float}, der auf
+dieser Seite erscheint: \vpageref{toc:d}.
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+  \begingroup
+  \etocstandardlines 
+  \renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{green!5}}
+  \renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{0pt\relax}
+  \fboxsep1ex 
+  \etocframedstyle [1]{\fbox{\makebox[.5\linewidth]{\etocfontminusone
+        \hyperref[toc:c]{Ich bin von weit her}}}}
+  \tableofcontents \label{toc:d} \ref{toc:c}
+  \endgroup
+\end{figure}
+
+Wir benutzen dies:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+  \begingroup
+  \etocstandardlines 
+  \renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{green!5}}
+  \renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{0pt\relax}
+  \fboxsep1ex 
+  \etocframedstyle [1]{\fbox{\makebox[.5\linewidth]{\etocfontminusone
+        \hyperref[toc:c]{I am from far away}}}}
+  \tableofcontents \label{toc:d} \ref{toc:c}
+  \endgroup
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+Wichtig: Man sollte \toc|\ref{toc:d}| nicht woanders benutzen. Um wieder zu 
+Klonen, muss man eine Refernz zum Original-Label benutzen: \toc|\ref{toc:c}|.
+
+\section{Eine mächtige Funktionsweise von \etoc: Die Wieder\-zuweisung von 
+Levels mit von \csbhyp{etocsetlevel}}
+
+Die intrinsischen Level, die durch \etoc manipuliert wurden, sind numerisch: von
+|-2| (welches |book| aus der |memoir|-Klasse entspricht) bis hinab zu |5|
+(|subparagraph|). Jedoch kann die Zuweisung eines numerischen Level zu einem
+gegebenen Namen zu jeder Zeit mit de Befehl
+\csb{etocsetlevel}\marg{level\_name}\marg{number} abgeändert werden. Daraus und
+aus der Benutzung des \LaTeX -|tocdepth|-Zählers resultieren mächtige
+Anwendungszwecke: \meta{level\_name} muss sich nicht mit dem eigentlichen
+Unterteilungsbefehls des Dokuments überschneiden. Außerdem kann \etoc genutzt
+werden, um beliebige "`Listen von Dingen"' ohne weitere Hilfsdateien, außer der
+|.toc|-Datei, zu erstellen. Dieses wird in \autoref{part:surprising} weiter
+erklärt.
+
+\begin{framed}
+  Es wird oft gesagt, dass Unterteilungslevel von |\part| in den
+  Standardklassen, die keinen |\chapter|-Befehl haben, gleich |0| sind, und in
+  denen mit |\chapter|-Befehl gleich |-1| ist. Das ist auch \emph{richtig}, wenn
+  man die \emph{automatische Nummerierung}, gesteuert durch den Wert des
+  |secnumdepth|-Zählers, betrachtet. Aber es ist \emph{falsch}, wenn man den
+  Effekt des |tocdepth|-Zählers sieht. Setzt man |tocdepth| in der |article|
+  -Klasse direkt vor |\tableofcontents| auf |-1|, verhindert das \emph{nicht},
+  dass Abschnitte in der Inhaltsangabe aufzutauchen. Man muss es dafür auf |-2|
+  stellen, ganz egal ob in der |article|- oder der |book|-Klasse.
+
+  Die kanonischen Level, grundsätzlich bekannt aus \etoc, sind 
+  von Relevanz für den \textbf{|tocdepth|}-Zähler in den Standardklassen
+  und werden in der folgenden Tabelle rekapituliert:
+  
+  \centeredline{
+    \fbox{\begin{tabular}{rc}
+        (|memoir| class) book&-2\\ part&-1\\ chapter&0 \\
+        section&1\\ subsection&2 \\
+        subsubsection&3 \\ paragraph&4 \\ subparagraph& 5
+    \end{tabular}}}
+
+\smallskip Mit \etoc kann der Nutzer innerhalb einem gegebenen Unterabschnitt
+einfach lokale Inhaltsangaben ausgeben. Darin werden, wenn gewollt,
+Unterabschnitte in dem Stil von Abschnitten, Paragraphen in dem Stil von
+Unterabschnitten und Unterparagraphen im Stil von Unter-Unterabschnitten
+gedruckt. Demnach kann man entscheiden alles auf das Level |6| zu setzen (wird
+von \etoc nie angezeigt), außer z.\,B. Paragraphen, die auf Level |1| befördert
+werden. So erstellt man eine schöne Inhaltsangabe aller Paragraphen eines
+Dokuments. (|tocdepth| mindestens |1|)\footnotemark
+\end{framed}
+
+\footnotetext{Normalerweise sollte man diese Inhaltsangabe der Paragraphen
+nicht im Kompabtibilitätsmodus ausgeben. Der würde darauf bestehen, einen 
+gigantischen Abstand nach rechts einzufügen.}
+
+\section{Die \csbhyp{etoc\-set\-toc\-depth}- und  
+  \csbhyp{etoc\-set\-next\-toc\-depth}-Befehle} 
+\label{etocsettocdepth}
+\label{etocsetnexttocdepth}
+
+Der |tocdepth|-Zähler hat keinen Einfluss darauf, was in die |.toc|-Datei
+geschrieben wird; dessen Einfluss ist ausschließlich auf das Setzen der
+Inhaltsangabe gerichtet. In der Standardklasse ist nur ein |\tableofcontents|
+möglich, wobei mit \etoc beliebig viele erlaubt sind. Dadurch könnte man
+|tocdepth| immer und immer wieder auf einen passenden Wert ändern (der
+entscheidet, wie tief die Abschnitte angezeigt werden sollen) bis die
+Inhaltsangabe gesetzt werden muss.
+
+\etoc bietet \csb {etocsettocdepth}\marg{level} an, wessen verpflichtendes
+Argument entweder (von |-3| bis |5|) oder einen Unterteilungstyp wie
+|subsection| oder |subsubsection| oder alle anderen, die davor in \etoc mit
+\csb{etocsetlevel} (die Schlüsselworte |all| und |none| erkannt werden,
+allerdings nicht in Zusammenhang mit der Dokumentenunterteilung) deklariert
+wurden. Das tut das passende |\setcounter{tocdepth}{numeric_level}|.
+
+Wie in dem nächsten Unterabschnitt erklärt wird, wird |tocdepth| von |hyperref|
+benutzt. Man muss die folgenden Schritte befolgen, um den Einfluss von
+|hyperref|`s Änderungen auf die Lesezeichen zu verhindern. \etoc hat \csb
+{etocsetnexttocdepth}\marg{level}. Dessen Einfluss endet direkt nach der
+nächsten Inhaltsangabe. Daraus folgt, dass
+\texttt{\textbackslash\foreignlanguage{english}{invisibletableofcontents}}
+essenziell für |\etocsetnexttocdepth{none}\tableofcontents| ist.
+
+Der einfachste Weg ist also, eine einfache Instanz des
+\csb{etocsettocdepth}-Befehl nach |\begin{document}| und vor dem ersten
+  |\tableofcontents| mit dem tiefsten Level als Argument zu setzen. -- Dieses
+  dann lokal zu benutzen, wo es gebraucht wird, anhand von
+  \csb{etocsetnexttocdepth} vor |\tableofcontents| oder |\localtableofcontents|.
+
+\subsection{Die hyperref-Option \emph{bookmarksdepth}}
+\label{ssec:bookmarksdepth}
+
+Wenn man den Zähler |tocdepth| verändert, um \toc oder \localtoc
+mehrfach zu benutzen, sollte man gewahr sein, dass das Paket
+|hyperref| standardmäßig den Wert des \emph{aktuellen} Wertes
+der |tocdepth|-Zählers berücksichtigt, um zu entscheiden, ob die |pdf|-Datei 
+Lesezeichen, korrespondierend mit den Unterteilungsbefehlen, die in der
+Quelldatei vorgefunden wurde, anzeigt. Dadurch muss man typischer Weise
+den |tocdepth|-Zähler auf seinen vorigen Wert zurücksetzen, nachdem man
+ihn temporär für eine  gegebene Inhaltsangabe modifiziert hat.
+
+Alternativ gibt es die \emph{bookmarksdepth=n}-Option des |hyperref|-Pakets.
+Dabei ist \emph{n} die gewünschte maximale Lesezeichen-Tiefe. Diese kann
+numerisch sein oder der Name eines Levels, das |hyperref| bekannt ist.
+
+Wir sind in dieser Dokumentation schon an |bookmarksdepth=3| vorbeigekommen. Es
+war eine Option von |hyperref|. Auch wenn |tocdepth| nach dem Ausgeben einer
+Inhaltsangabe aus Nachlässigkeit auf |1| stehen gelassen wurde, so wurden der
+Lesezeichenbaum der |pdf|-Datei nicht verändert. Da \csb{etocsetnexttocdepth}
+jetzt zu dem Paket hinzugefügt wurde, ist keine Verwendung mehr für
+|bookmarksdepth=3|.
+
+\section{Der Befehl \csbhyp{etoc\-set\-toc\-dep\-th.toc}}
+\label{etocsettocdepth.toc}
+
+Dieser Befehl \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} implementiert einige Funktionalitäten
+von Paket |tocvsec2|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tocvsec2}. Ich danke D.B.
+  meine Aufmerksamkeit auf die Inkompatibilität dieses Pakets mit \etoc
+  gerichtet zu haben.}. Dieses Paket war inkompatibel mit \etoc. Es kann nun
+noch für seine mit |secnumdepth| in Verbindung stehenden Befehle genutzt werden,
+alle mit |toc| in Verbindung stehenden Aktivitäten werden jedoch durch \etoc
+abgebrochen.
+
+Das Handeln von \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} ist grundlegend verschieden zu
+\csb{etocsettocdepth}. Anstatt den |tocdepth|-Zähler direkt zu verändern,
+fügt es der |.toc|-Datei eine Linie an, die, wenn ausgeführt, in einer
+Inhaltsangabe diese Veränderung ausführen wird.
+
+Der Befehl \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} akzeptiert, wie
+\csb{etocsettocdepth}, Namen und numerische Argumente.
+In dem Fall eines Namen als Argument ist der tatsächliche numerische
+Wert noch nicht festgelegt, wenn |.toc|-Datei erstellt wird. Es wird
+der Wert sein, der aktuell für das benannte Level der Inhaltsangabe 
+(ohne |\etocignoretoctocdepth| gemacht zu haben) bei
+jeder Erstellung einer Inhaltsangabe spezifiziert wird.
+
+Der |tocdepth|-Zähler wird niemals auf einen Wert gesetzt, der feiner
+als der ist, mit dem er zu Beginn der Inhaltsangabe initialisiert wurde.
+Also ist das Hinzufügen von \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} im Dokument ein Weg 
+die Tiefe einer lokalen Inhaltsangabe einzugrenzen. Zum Beispiel,
+um die Einfügung von Unter-unter-Abschnitten  oder eines gegebenen
+Kapitels zu unterbinden.
+
+
+Dieses
+{\fbox{wird in allen Inhaltsangaben ausgeführt.}}
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocobeytoctocdepth} und \csbhyp{etocignoretoctocdepth}}
+\label{etocobeytoctocdepth}
+\label{etocignoretoctocdepth}
+
+
+Also wird \csb{etocignoretoctocdepth} gesetzt, um den
+\csa{etocsettocdepth.toc}-Mecha\-nismus abzubrechen, wenn 
+benötigt; und \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth} wird es
+reaktivieren. Das Paket führt \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth} zu Beginn aus.
+
+
+\section{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etoc\-depth\-tag.toc} und \csbhyp{etocsettagdepth}}
+\label{etocdepthtag.toc}
+\label{etocsettagdepth}
+
+Wie oben erwähnt, wenn das Argument für \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} kein
+numerisches sondern ein Namen-Level ist, wird durch die tatsächliche Nummer bei
+der Erstellung der Inhaltsangabe entschieden. Dadurch und anhand der
+\emph{Schiebe-Mechanismen von \etoc} kann man einen sehr flexiblen Aufbau
+erreichen: Man erklärt mit \csb{etocsetlevel} zuerst ein paar Platzhaltelevel,
+z.\,B. |partIII|, und weist ihm das unsichtbare Level |6| zu. Dann, vor dem
+dritten |\part| Befehl, fügt man \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}|{partIII}| ein. An
+dem Ort, an dem der Effekt enden soll, setzt man
+\csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}|{all}| ein. Es ist nun möglich, jedes Mal, wenn man
+eine Inhaltsangabe setzen will, das feinste Level der Einträge aus dem dritten
+Teil zu spezifizieren. Man muss z.\,B. nur \csa{etocsetlevel}|{partIII}{1}|
+schreiben. Es wird die Abschnitte limitieren (sofern |tocdepth| mindestens auf
+diesem Level war, wenn die Inhaltsangabe ausgegeben wurde).
+
+Die Methode hat ein paar Beschränkungen:
+\begin{enumerate*}[label={(\roman*)}]
+  \item Das zweite Argument von \csb{etocsetlevel} muss numerisch sein;
+  \item es kann nicht auf |-3| gesetzt werden (was nötig wäre, wenn man ganze
+  Bücher aus der Inhaltsangabe streichen wöllte in den Klasse |memoir|);
+  \item es ist ein bisschen getrickst, seit |partIII| kein richtiger unterteilender
+  Abschnitt ist sondern nur ein \emph{tag}.
+\end{enumerate*} 
+
+Version |1.07h| enthält den Befehl \csb{etocdepthtag.toc}, der
+es einfacher macht, diese variable lokale Kontrolle des |tocdepth| zu erreichen,
+wenn die Inhaltsangabe erstellt wird.
+
+
+Es wird als \csb{etocdepthtag.toc}\marg{tag\_name} genutzt, wo der
+\meta{tag\_name} irgendetwas ist, das wird den Tag in die |.toc|-Datei setzen.
+Wenn die Inhaltsangabe erstellt wird, initiiert das eine Reihe von Befehlen
+\csb{etocsettagdepth}\marg{tag\_name}\marg{level}, wo das \meta{level} entweder
+numerisch (von |-3| bis |5|) oder ein Name einer unterteilenden Einheit, die
+\etoc bekannt ist, oder |none| oder |all|. Der Effekt von den Tags innerhalb der
+|.toc|-Datei ist es, den |tocdepth|-Zählers auf den gewünschten Wert zu setzen
+(das kann wie schon erwähnt, nicht feiner sein als der initiale Wert des
+|tocdepth|-Zählers).
+
+Die hinzugefügte Flexibilität wirkt sich insofern aus, dass \csb{etocsetlevel}
+nicht mehr mit dieser getricksten Methode, bei der man Level-Tiefen und |none|
+und |all| benutzt hat.
+
+Wie immer, wenn die Tag-Tiefen gesetzt wurden, bleiben sie wirkend, bis sie
+wieder definiert werden oder ihr Wirkungsgebiet beendet wird, indem die
+umschließende Gruppe geschlossen wird. Für ein Beispiel, siehe hier:
+\autoref{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}.
+
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocobeydepthtags} und \csbhyp{etocignoredepthtags}}
+\label{etocobeydepthtags}
+\label{etocignoredepthtags}
+
+
+Nach \csb{etocignoredepthtags} werden die |.toc|-Tiefentags ignoriert
+(nach \csb{etocdepthtag.toc}  funktionieren sie jedoch noch). Das Paket
+führt zu Beginn \csb{etocobeydepthtags} aus. Dieses befielt \etoc auf die
+gefundenen Tags in der |.toc|-Datei zu reagieren.
+
+\section{Befehle zur \texorpdfstring{\texttt{.toc}}{.toc}-Datei hinzufügen}
+\label{sec:addingtotoc}
+
+Wir beschrieben oben die Befehle \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc} und
+\csb{etocdepthtag.toc}, welche beide Befehle in die |.toc|-Datei einfügen. Ein
+noch allgemeinerer Weg, um "`action tags"' in die |.toc|-Datei einzufügen, wäre
+vorstellbar, allerdings würde auch nur indirekt
+|\addtocontents{toc}{\something}| benutzt werden.
+
+Man sollte vorsichtig sein, wenn man auf diesem Weg Dinge zur |.toc|-Datei
+hinzufügt. Zum Beispiel das Einfügen von
+\csa{addtocontents}|{toc}{\string\clearpage}| direkt vor einem \csa{part} behebt
+den Fehler, dass Teileinträge in Inhaltsangaben vom Rest getrennt am Ende der
+Seite auftauchen, kann aber auch Probleme mit mehreren Inhaltsangaben haben:
+\csa{clearpage} wird jedes Mal ausgeführt, wenn \etoc über ein \toc oder
+\localtoc stolpert. Die schlauere Methode wäre es:
+{\csa{addtocontents}|{toc}{\string\myclearpage}|,} den |\let\myclearpage\relax|,
+man hätte den Befehl |\let\myclearpage\relax| zu Beginn des Dokuments und wenn
+benötigt, benutzt man etwas wie:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\let\myclearpage\clearpage
+\tableofcontents
+\let\myclearpage\relax
+\end{verbatim}
+Die |memoir|-Klasse besitzt den Befehl \csa{settocdepth}, der einen
+\csa{changetoc\-depth}-Befehl in die |.toc|-Datei setzt. Dieses
+beeinflusst die Schriftsetzung von \etoc bei \emph{allen} Inhaltsangaben mit
+möglichen unvorhersehbaren Ergebnissen: Stellen Sie sich vor, irgendwo im Dokument
+stünde \csa{settocdepth}|{chapter}|, um die Abschnitte von Unterabschnitten
+nicht in der Hauptinhaltsangabe aufzulisten. In diesem Fall würde eine
+lokale Inhaltsangabe in einem dieser Kapitel einen Titel ohne jeden Eintrag ausgeben. 
+
+Da die |memoir|-Klasse von Haus aus schon mehrfache \toc erlaubt, tritt dieser
+Fehler schon viel früher, und unabhängig von \etoc, auf. Siehe Seite 170 der
+|memoir|-Anleitung.
+
+Für diesen Spezialfall gibt es folgende Befehle: \csb{etocsettocdepth.toc},
+\csb{etocignoretoctocdepth}, \csb{etocobeytoctocdepth} oder deren
+Varianten \csb{etocdepthtag.toc} und \csb{etocsettagdepth}.
+
+Nebenbei, jeder |\setcounter{tocdepth}{n}|-Befehl fügt direkt in die
+|.toc|-Datei hinzu. Es scheint so, dass seine Wirkung ist (seit der Version
+|1.07g|), beendet den Abschluss jedes Inhaltsverzeichnis zu beenden, automatisch
+wird ein |\setcounter{tocdepth}{previous_value}| genommen, mit dem Wert, aktiv
+ein Inhaltsverzeichnis zu nehmen.
+
+\subsection{Die hyperref-Option \emph{hidelinks}}\label{ssec:hidelinks}
+
+Die farbigen Links (und auch die Kastenlinks) sind einwenig ärgerlich, wenn in
+Inhaltsverzeichnissen verwendet, insbesonders, wenn das Dokument \etoc verwendet
+und viele von ihnen beinhaltet! Man kann sich wünschen, farbige Links
+\emph{ausschließlich} für Inhaltsverzeichnisse! In der Tat, warum sollten in
+TOCs diese Dinge gerahmt oder farbig sein müssen, wenn der Benutzer
+\emph{bereits erwartet, dass dort Links sind}?
+
+Ich nehme den folgenden Trick: Entweder in der Präambel zu nehmen
+|\AtBeginDocument| oder danach |\begin{document}|, ich habe den Befehl   \centeredline{|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\hypersetup{hidelinks}}|}
+
+  \begin{framed}
+    Alle TOCs, die von \etoc gesetzt sind, haben ihre Inhalte in eine
+    Gruppierung getan, (wie in einer Umgebung eingeschlossen). So wird der
+    Befehl \csa{hypersetup}|{hidelinks}| ausgeführt von \emph{jedem} TOC, aber
+    sein Effekt wird limitiert zu dem TOC.
+  \end{framed}
+
+Experimentell habe ich herausgefunden, dass die Option |hidelinks| oftmals mit
+|\hypersetup| eingestellt werden kann (Dies ist nicht bei allen
+|hyperref|-Optionen der Fall).
+
+
+
+\section{Zwei Beispiele}
+
+\subsection{Eine wunderschöne Beispielthese}
+
+Hier ist noch ein relativ einfaches Beispiel für die Verwendung der
+Paket-Funktionsweisen. Lassen Sie uns einige Linienstile einrichten. Wir wählen
+einen Stil für Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte, welche für die Abschnitte und
+Unterabschnitte in einem durchschnittlichen Memoirenumfang geeignet wären. Die
+Linienstilspezifikationen haben eine gewisse Redundanz für die Klarheit, und sie
+interessieren sich nicht dafür, was bei möglichen Seitenumbrüchen zu tun ist.
+Auch sind sie nicht besorgt über die potentielle mehrspaltige Nutzung.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup % wir starten, um eine Gruppe zu behalten 
+\newlength{\tocleftmargin}    \setlength{\tocleftmargin}{5cm}
+\newlength{\tocrightmargin}   \setlength{\tocrightmargin}{1cm}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}              % wird vorgegeben, ein Kapitel zu sein
+{\addvspace{1ex}\parfillskip0pt
+ \leftskip\tocleftmargin            % (bereits im Titel getan)
+ \rightskip\the\tocrightmargin plus 1fil
+ \parindent0pt\color{cyan}}         % (bereits getan)
+{\bfseries\LARGE\upshape\addvspace{1ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{Chapter\hspace{.5em}{\etocnumber}\hspace{.75cm}}\etocname
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}           % wird vorgegeben, ein Abschnitt zu sein
+{}
+{\mdseries\large\addvspace{.5ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{\etocnumber\hspace{.75cm}}\textit{\etocname}%
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\def\tmptitle{My Beautiful Thesis}
+\etocsettocstyle{\color{cyan}\parindent0pt \leftskip\tocleftmargin
+  \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\ 
+  \huge\textit{\tmptitle}\par}{\bigskip}
+
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begingroup
+\newlength{\tocleftmargin}
+\setlength{\tocleftmargin}{5cm}
+\newlength{\tocrightmargin}
+\setlength{\tocrightmargin}{1cm}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\addvspace{1ex}\parfillskip0pt
+ \leftskip\tocleftmargin
+ \rightskip\the\tocrightmargin plus 1fil
+ \parindent0pt\color{cyan}}
+{\bfseries\LARGE\upshape\addvspace{1ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{Kapitel\hspace{.5em}{\etocnumber}\hspace{.75cm}}\etocname
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{}
+{\mdseries\large\addvspace{.5ex}\leavevmode}
+{\llap{\etocnumber\hspace{.75cm}}\textit{\etocname}%
+ \hfill\makebox[-\tocrightmargin][l]{\makebox[0pt]{\etocpage}}\par}
+{}
+
+\def\tmptitle{Meine wunderschöne These}
+
+\etocsettocstyle{\color{cyan}\parindent0pt\leftskip\tocleftmargin
+  \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\ 
+  \huge\textit{\tmptitle}\par}{\bigskip}
+
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}
+% And again, for the fun of it:
+% \def\tmptitle{My Very Beautiful Thesis}
+% \tableofcontents \ref{toc:c}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\subsection{Ein TOC  mit einer Hintergrundfarbe}\label{ssec:again}
+
+Lassen Sie uns nun einige anspruchsvollere Linienstile versuchen. Das Display
+wird den Paket-Befehl \csa{etocframedstyle} verwenden, damit das erzeugte
+Inhaltsverzeichnis auf eine einzige Seite passt. Wir wickeln es in eine
+\hyperref[toc:floating]{Figur-Umgebung}, damit es auf der aktuellen Seite
+angezeigt wird. \vpageref{toc:floating}.
+
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp!]\centering
+\colorlet{subsecnum}{black}
+\colorlet{secbackground}{green!30}
+\colorlet{tocbackground}{red!20!green!20}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 3cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width 1cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerbottomsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand\shiftedwhiterule[2]{%
+    \hbox to \linewidth{\color{white}%
+    \hskip#1\leaders\vrule height1pt\hfil}\nointerlineskip
+\vskip#2}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{\leftskip}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\footnotesize
+\leftskip2.3cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip.5cm\noindent
+\hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to .5cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.1cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{1.5cm}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\small
+\leftskip1.5cm\hangindent.8cm\rightskip.5cm\noindent
+\hbox to .75cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to .5cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.1cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+{}
+
+\newcommand{\coloredstuff}[2]{%
+            \leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parskip0pt
+            \fboxsep0pt % \colorbox uses \fboxsep also when no frame!
+       \noindent\colorbox{secbackground}
+               {\parbox{\linewidth}{%
+                    \vskip5pt
+                    {\noindent\color{#1}#2\par}\nointerlineskip
+                    \vskip3pt}}%
+       \par\nointerlineskip}
+
+% v1.07l on the occasion of traduction into German documentation:
+     % APRIL 26, 2014 Improvement in the section style for better placement of
+     % page number when the section name is more than one line long. Use of
+     % \makebox rather than \hbox, to be more LaTeX like.
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\coloredstuff{blue}
+     {\hfil \bfseries\large Inhalt von Teil Eins\hfil}}
+{\vskip3pt\sffamily\small}
+{\coloredstuff{blue}
+    {\leftskip1.5cm\rightskip.5cm\parfillskip-\rightskip
+     \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[.5cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+     \etocname\hfill{\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocpage\hspace{.1cm}}}}%
+ \vskip6pt }
+{}
+
+
+% attention car \ref{toc:floating} fera référence au compteur de
+% toutes les toc, pas visibletoc. 
+
+\etocframedstyle[1]{}
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:floating} \ref{toc:overview}
+\vspace{-\baselineskip}
+\centeredline{|\tableofcontents \ref{toc:overview}| 
+(\emph{cf.} \autoref{ssec:again} and \hyperref[toc:clone]{this other toc})}
+\end{figure}
+
+Das aktuelle Design ist nicht in \etoc vorgefertigt; sondern nutzt seine
+`eingerahmten' Stile mit einer Hintergrundfarbe. Die Rahmengrenzen wurden so
+gesetzt, dass die gleiche Farbe, wie die Hintergrundfarbe, für die gesamte Sache
+dienen soll. Dieses Design (mit anderen Farben) wird auch für
+\hyperref[toc:clone]{dieses andere Inhaltsverzeichnis} benutzt, und der Leser
+bezieht sich auf seine \hyperref[ssec:tocclone]{Unterabschnitte}, welche für die
+Kodierung vorgesehen sind.
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {surprising}
+\part{Überraschende Anwendungen von \etoc}
+\label{part:surprising}
+
+\thispartstats %% (pas de sous-section)
+
+% in dtx of release 1.07h there was here a \thisspecialstats, but it
+% originated from the period when this \part was only a \section. So its
+% effect was not the intended one, basically it had the same effect as this:
+\etocstandardlines
+\etocsettocstyle {}{}
+\localtableofcontents
+
+\section{Das TOC für TOCs}
+
+\begingroup % \endgroup just after the \tableofcontents command
+\etocinline
+\etocsetlevel{part}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}
+\etocsetstyle{visibletoc}
+    {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+    {, }
+    {{\color{niceone}\etocname}}
+    {}
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{visibletoc}
+
+Hier ist die nummerierte und verknüpfte Liste aller Tabellen von Inhalten, die
+in diesem Dokument dargestellt sind \footnote{Die Inhaltsverzeichnisse können
+  "`Schwimmer"' setzen, um die Reihenfolge zu ändern: die Zahlen werden in der
+  Reihenfolge der Inhaltsverzeichnisse in dem Dokument aufgeführt; aber die
+  Nummerierung selbst ist von der Reihenfolge der Inhaltsverzeichnisse in der
+  \emph{Quelle} dieses Dokumentes \ldots}
+\tableofcontents\endgroup. Und hier erhalten wir, was
+wir gerade geschrieben haben:\par\smallskip 
+{\leftskip1cm\rightskip2cm
+  \ttfamily\small\baselineskip11pt \noindent Hier ist die
+  nummerierte und verknüpfte Liste aller Tabellen von Inhalten, die in
+  diesem Dokument dargestellt sind:~\string\tableofcontents.\par}
+
+Die vorausgehenden Arbeiten waren wie folgt. Zuerst definierten wir einen Zähler
+|visibletoc|, dessen Berufung es ist, bei jedem angezeigten Inhaltsverzeichnis
+erhöht zu werden. \etoc hat einen eigenen Zähler, aber es zählen alle
+Inhaltsverzeichnisse, auch wenn diese nicht angezeigt werden, da die |tocdepth|
+Werte |-2| oder |-3| waren.
+
+Wir könnten manuell |\refstepcounter{visibletoc}| und |\label| an allen
+geeigneten Stellen im Dokument hinzufügen, und wir würden dann |\ref|- Befehle
+verwenden, aber dies stellt eine hohe manuelle Bearbeitung der Quelle dar.
+
+Es gibt eine viel bessere Möglichkeit: Es gibt einen Aufhänger
+\csb{etocaftertitlehook} und wir sagten, es erhöht sich der |visibletoc|-Zähler
+und wir schreiben eine Anlage zu der |.toc|-Datei, in analoger Weise zu dem
+Gliederungsbefehl, zum Beispiel |Kapitel|, |Abschnitt| oder |Unterabschnitt|.
+Wie \etoc seinen eigenen Zähler erhöht, noch bevor der Titel des
+Inhaltsverzeichnisses gesetzt wird, bietet diese (die meiste Zeit) einen
+besseren Link-Zielpunkt als jeder Zähler von \csa{etocaftertitlehook} (der Link
+wird nach dem Titel platziert). Anstatt mit |\refstepcounter{visibletoc}|,
+innerhalb von \csa{etocaftertitlehook}, formulieren wir
+|\stepcounter{visibletoc}|, dann folgt der Befehl
+\csb{etoctoccontentsline}|{visibletoc}{\thevisibletoc}|. Dieser \etoc-Befehl
+\csb{etoctoccontentsline}\marg{level\_name}\marg{name} hat die gleiche Wirkung
+wie: \centeredline{| ||\addcontentsline{toc}|\marg{level\_name}\marg{name}} aber
+sein Nutzen ist es \footnote{Mit \csa{addtocontents} anstatt
+  \csa{addcontentsline}.}, die Reparatur der automatischen Erstellung von
+Lesezeichen zu verhindern mit \csa{addcontentsline} bei dem |hyperref|-Paket,
+wie die pdf-Lesezeichen machen sie nicht viel Sinn hier (und würde eine
+Beschwerde bezüglich von |hyperref| eruieren, denn das Lesezeichen-Niveau ist
+`unbekannt').\footnote{ Das Paket bietet eine Stern-Variante
+  \staritb{etoctoccontentsline}, die zulässt, dass die Erstellung von
+  Lesezeichen und das Haben eines dritten obligatorischen Arguments, welches das
+  Lesezeichen-Niveau darstellt, funktioniert; abhängig vom Kontext kann die
+  Hauptrolle und die Nicht-Stern-Variante profitabel durch \csa{phantomsection}
+  sein.}
+ 
+Schließlich war in der Präambel des Dokuments |\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{6}|.
+Das Niveau |6| (oder etwas mit einer höheren Zahl) wird ignoriert, auch wenn
+|tocdepth| zum Beispiel den Wert |10| hat; das ist unabhängig davon, ob \etoc
+die Dokumentenklasse als Standardlinien oder als eigene Linienstile nutzt oder
+die, die vom Benutzer mit \csa{etocsetstyle} Befehl definiert wurden. Es gibt
+also keinen Grund zur Sorge, dass etwas schief gehen könnte.
+
+Dann haben wir hier nur |\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}| gesetzt. Und nur diese
+Art von Einträgen weisen wir vorübergehend eine |Teil|- und |Kapitel|-Ebene |1|
+zu (oder etwas höher als null) und setzen |tocdepth| auf den Wert |0|. Wir haben
+auch \csa{etocsetstyle\{visibletoc\}\{\string\etocskipfirstprefix\}\{,
+  \}\{\string\etocname\}\{\}}, welche eine innere Anzeige mit dem Komma als
+Trennzeichen definiert. Wie \etoc Aspekte |\par| automatisch als Standard das
+Inhaltsverzeichnis setzt, verwendeten wir den Befehl \csb{etocinline} (auch als
+\cs{etocnopar} bekannt), welches die Reaktion ausmacht .
+
+Hier sind die Details der Implementierung:
+
+\begingroup
+\begin{verbatim}
+ < in der Prämbel >
+\newcounter{visibletoc}
+\renewcommand{\etocaftertitlehook}
+   {\stepcounter{visibletoc}\etoctoccontentsline{visibletoc}{\thevisibletoc}}
+\etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{6}
+\begin{document}
+   < document body >
+\subsection{Surprising uses of etoc}
+\begingroup
+    \etocinline
+    \etocsetlevel{part}{1}
+    % \etocsetlevel{chapter}{1} % (keine Kapitel in scrartcl Klasse)
+    \etocsetlevel{visibletoc}{0}
+    \etocsetstyle{visibletoc}
+        {\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }{{\color{niceone}\etocname}}{}
+    \etocsettocstyle{}{}     % keine Titel, Regeln oder Rahmen festgelegt!
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth{visibletoc} % zeigt nur die `visibletoc' Einträge an aus .toc
+
+Hier ist die nummerierte und verknüpfte Liste aller Tabellen von Inhalten,
+die in diesem Dokument angezeigt werden: \tableofcontents.
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\endgroup
+
+Nach |\etocsetstyle{visibletoc}{..}{..}{..}{..}|, wird für alle zukünftigen 
+Inhaltsverzeichnisse (nicht im
+Kompatibilitätsmodus) der definierte Stil für das Niveau 
+|0| verwendet (was normalerweise der Pegel für ein Kapitel
+ist). Um diese Änderung auf die einfachste Art und Weise zu halten, muss man
+alles in eine Gruppe setzen.
+
+Der \autoref{subsec:interverting} gibt eine andere Verwendung
+von Verschachtelungsstufen an. 
+
+\section{Willkürliche "`Listen von \ldots "', \csbhyp{etoctoccontentsline}}
+\label{etoctoccontentsline}
+
+Die Idee der Internabwehr ist leistungsfähig und ermöglicht
+\etoc-Anzeigelisten, um beliebige Dinge in dem Dokument enthalten zu lassen.
+Und all das mit noch nichts anderem als der
+|.toc| Datei! 
+Beispiel: Stellen Sie sich ein Dokument mit Dutzenden von Übungen vor,
+vielleicht als |\newtheorem{exercise}{}[section]|.
+Lassen Sie uns erklären, wie man \etoc anweist, eine verlinkte Liste all dieser
+Übungen anzuzeigen. Dafür haben wir in der Präambel geschrieben:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newtheorem{exerci}{}[section] 
+    % the exercice number will be recoverable via \etocname: v--here--v
+ \newcommand*{\exercisetotoc}{\etoctoccontentsline{exercise}{\theexerci}}
+ \newenvironment{exercise}{\begin{exerci}\exercisetotoc}{\end{exerci}}
+ \etocsetlevel{exercise}{6}
+\end{verbatim}
+Auf diese Weise wird \csa{etocname} die Übungsnummer vergeben (aber
+\csa{etocnumber} wird leer sein). Hätten wir stattdessen
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand*{\exercisetotoc}
+    {\etoctoccontentsline{exercise}{\protect\numberline{\theexerci}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+verwendet, wäre die Übungsnummer via \csa{etocnumber} verfügbar und
+\csa{etocname} wäre leer gewesen. Es spielt keine Rolle, welches der beiden
+Verfahren verwendet wird. Der \etoc Befehl \csa{etoctoccontentsline}|{..}{..}|
+wird als Ersatz für \csa{addcon\-tentsline}|{toc}{..}{..}| verwendet: Das ist
+die, die durch das Reparieren von |hyperref| zu \csa{addcontentsline} verwendet
+wird, um in ihrem Prozess die Erstellung von Lesezeichen zu vermeiden. Wenn man
+|hyperref| ermächtigt, Lesezeichen auf einer bestimmten Ebene \meta{n} zu
+erschaffen, kann einer (hier mit \meta{n}$=$|2|) die Stern-Variante
+\starit{etoctoccontentsline} benutzen, welche ein zusätzliches Argument hat:
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\exercisetotoc}{\etoctoccontentsline*{exercise}{\theexerci}{2}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Der Zähler |exerci| wird bereits durch das |exerci|-Theoremumfeld erhöht und
+sorgt für den richtigen Ort für den Link zusätzlich zum Paket
+|hyperref|. Der Befehl \csa{exercisetotoc} fügt für jede Übung eine Zeile in die
+|.toc|-Datei, entsprechend einer fiktiven Dokumenteinheit
+mit dem Namen `|Übung|' ein. Eine
+Vier-Säulen-Liste, einschließlich der Abschnitte, kann dann erreichen mit 
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \etocsetnexttocdepth{2}     % Abschnitte sind auf Stufe 1 und werden anzeigen
+\begingroup
+  \etocsetlevel{exercise}{2}   % aber:
+  \etocsetlevel{chapter}{3}    %     keine Kapitel
+  \etocsetlevel{subsection}{3} %     keine Unterabschnitte
+  \etocsetlevel{part}{3}       %     keine Parts
+  \etocsetstyle{exercise}{}{}  % \etocname = exercise number
+    {\noindent\etocname\strut\leaders\etoctoclineleaders\hfill\etocpage\par}
+    {\pagebreak[2]\vskip\baselineskip}
+  \etocsetstyle{section}{}{}
+    {\noindent\strut{\bfseries\large\etocnumber\hskip.5em\etocname}\par
+     \nopagebreak[3]}{}
+  \etocruledstyle[4]{\Large\bfseries List of the exercises}
+  \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}
+  \tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+
+\section{Ein TOC mit einem extravagantem Layout}
+
+Hier ist ein Inhaltsverzeichnis, wo die Abschnitte aus einem bestimmten Kapitel
+durch einen Zahlenbereich dargestellt werden sollen
+(wie 18--22 bei einem bestimmten Kapitel, 42--49 für ein anderes \ldots\
+natürlich in das Inhaltsverzeichnis automatisch eingefügt wurden). 
+
+Dies ist kein Abbildungseinschluss, das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird von seiner
+ursprünglichen 
+|tex|-Quelle in dieses Dokument nach dem Austausch des
+|Teils|, |Kapitels| oder |Abschnitts| mit |Dummy-Teil|, |Dummy-Kapitel| und
+|Dummy-Abschnitt| (und da ist auch eine Dummy-Seitenzahl) produziert.  Wir
+kopierten die Linienstile, wie im Original verwendet, und
+das Inhaltsverzeichnis zeigt folgende Situation an:
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummypart}  {-1} \etocsetlevel{part}   {2}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummychapter}{0} \etocsetlevel{chapter}{2}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummysection}{1} \etocsetlevel{section}{2}
+                    \etocsetnexttocdepth{dummysection}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Jedes Kapitel zeigt die Zahl nur von dem ersten und dem letzten Abschnitt an.
+Siehe in der Quelldatei |etoc.dtx| für die Details nach, wie das gemacht wird.
+
+Eine andere Technik für diese Art der Dinge erläutert 
+  \autoref{ssec:statistics}.  
+
+\begingroup
+
+    \etocsetlevel{dummypart}{-1}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummychapter}{0}
+    \etocsetlevel{dummysection}{1}
+    \etocsetlevel{part}{2}
+    \etocsetlevel{chapter}{2}
+    \etocsetlevel{section}{2}
+
+    \newif\ifextraidone
+    \newif\ifextraiidone
+
+    \etocsetstyle{dummypart}
+    {}
+    {}
+    {\begin{center}\Large\bfseries TEIL \etocnumber
+    \ifextraiidone\\\etocname.\fi\end{center}
+    \ifextraidone\else
+    \noindent\hskip.7\linewidth
+        \hbox to .2\linewidth
+% février (ou janvier?) 2013
+% je modifie ici en ajoutant un \hss, pour compenser la plus petite
+% taille de txrm. Ok.
+       {\hss\small\textsc{\bfseries Kapitel.\hss Seite.}}\par\fi
+    \extraidonetrue
+    }
+    {}
+
+    \newcommand\mytocleaders{\hbox to .125\linewidth{...\hss}}
+    \etocsetstyle{dummychapter}
+    {}
+    {\par\noindent\etocifnumbered
+        {\makebox[.15\linewidth][r]{\bfseries\etocnumber.}}
+        {\hspace*{.15\linewidth}}}
+    {\hbox to .65\linewidth
+        {\hspace{1em}\etocname\leaders\mytocleaders\hss}%
+     \hskip-.1\linewidth
+     \hbox to .2\linewidth{\hspace{1.5em}...\hss
+                    \etocifnumbered
+                        {\etocpage}
+                        {\ifextraiidone\else\etocpage\fi}}%
+     \hskip-.2\linewidth
+    }
+    {}
+
+    \newbox\forsectionnumbers
+    \makeatletter
+% 21 février 2013: je rajoute \color@begingroup et \color@endgroup
+    \etocsetstyle{dummysection}
+    {\setbox\forsectionnumbers=\hbox to .1\linewidth
+        \bgroup\color@begingroup\hss\etocskipfirstprefix}
+    {\@gobble}
+    {\etocnumber---}
+    {\etocnumber\color@endgroup\egroup
+    % for reasons I do not quite understand, in some pdf viewers the dots
+    % do not completely disappear if here \fboxsep0pt is used.
+    % (problèmes liés à l'anti-aliasing, sur Mac OS X, Skim, Preview...)
+    % (j'ai maintenu ici la méthode de mon post sur stackexchange, mais
+    %  sans doute je pourrais réfléchir à une autre façon évitant d'avoir à
+    %  « effacer ») 
+        \fboxsep=.5pt\colorbox{white}{\box\forsectionnumbers}\par
+        \ifextraiidone\else
+            \begin{center}\bfseries Kongruenz.\end{center}
+            \noindent\makebox[.15\linewidth][r]{\textsc{\bfseries Übung.}}\par
+        \fi\extraiidonetrue
+    }
+    \makeatother
+
+    \renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+
+    \etocruledstyle[1]{%
+        \parbox{\linewidth}{%
+            \centering
+            \textsc{\bfseries\LARGE\MakeUppercase{Inhaltsverzeichnis}}\\
+            \rule{.2\linewidth}{2pt}}%
+    }
+        
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth{dummysection}
+
+    \tableofcontents
+   
+\makeatletter
+    \def\adddummysection {\stepcounter{dummysection}%
+      \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummysection}{\protect\numberline{\thedummysection}}%
+                   {\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+ 
+    \def\adddummychapter #1{\stepcounter{dummychapter}%
+      \advance\dummypage2
+      \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummychapter}{\protect\numberline{\thedummychapter}#1}%
+                   {\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+
+    \def\adddummychapno #1{\advance\dummypage2
+      \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummychapter}{#1}{\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+
+    \def\adddummypart #1{\stepcounter{dummypart}%
+       \advance\dummypage4
+       \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {dummypart}{\protect\numberline{\Roman{dummypart}}#1}%
+                     {\the\dummypage }%
+     %\ifEtoc@hyperref ou \ifdefined\hyperref si e-TeX
+     {\@currentHref }%
+     %\fi
+     }}
+\makeatother
+    
+    \newcount\dummypage \dummypage-1
+
+    \adddummypart {}
+    
+    \adddummychapno {Einleitung}
+
+    \newcount\tempcount
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<8
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Kongruenz von Subjekt und Verb}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<17
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Kongruenz von Substantiven und Adjektiven}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<22
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Kongruenz von Relativen und Antezendenten}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<25
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummypart {Government}
+
+    \adddummychapter {Der Akkusativ}
+
+    \adddummychapno {Allgemeine Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<30
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Besondere Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<37
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Verbrektion über zwei Akkusative}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<41
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Der Kausativ}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<49
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Der Instrumental}
+
+    \adddummychapno {Allgemeine Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<54
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Besondere Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<59
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Der Dativ}
+
+    \adddummychapno {Allgemeine Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<65
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Besondere Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<71
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Der Ablativ}
+
+    \adddummychapno {Allgemeine Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<75
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Besondere Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<86
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapter {Der Lokativ}
+
+    \adddummychapno {Allgemeine Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<92
+    \repeat
+
+    \adddummychapno {Besondere Anwendungen}
+
+    \loop\advance\tempcount by 1
+    \adddummysection
+    \ifnum\tempcount<100
+    \repeat
+\endgroup
+
+\section{Ein weiterer Kompatibilitätsmodus}
+
+Wie in \autoref{ssub:compat} erläutert, sagen die Befehle
+\csa{etocstandardlines} und \csa{etocstandarddisplaystyle} \etoc im
+Wesentlichen, wie man als Beobachter fungiert. Das Dokumentenklasse-Layout für
+das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird dann gehorchen. Es gibt keine Möglichkeit, dieses
+Standard-Layout aus dem Paket anzupassen (ändern von Schriftarten, Rändern,
+vertikalen Abständen, etc.) . Definieren Sie dazu ein Paket von dieser Funktion;
+weil entweder \etoc (vorübergehend vielleicht) im Kompatibilitätsmodus ohne
+Anpassung auf seinen Teil möglich ist oder der Benutzer hat das Layout in
+\csa{etocsetstyle}-Befehlen angegeben (und \csa{etocsettocstyle}) ist (angeblich
+\ldots ) in der kompletten Steuerung.
+
+Nun, es ist eigentlich eine Alternative. Es ist möglich, die Verwendung der
+\csa{etocsetstyle}-Befehle zu nutzen, um einen künstlichen Kompatibilitätsmodus
+neu zu erstellen, um Effekte zu erreichen, wie die folgenden, alle Dinge
+gleichen andererseits dem Dokumentenklassen-Standard:
+\begin{enumerate}[noitemsep]
+\item Enthält der |hyperref|-Link nur die Namen, aber nicht die Anzahl der
+  jeweils zu kapselnden Einträge der Inhaltstabellen;
+\item verwenden Sie den Dokumentenklassen-Stil für Kapitel und Abschnitte, aber
+  ändern Sie es nur für Teilbereiche;
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Hier ist beschrieben, wie Sie vorgehen müssen. Man nimmt in die Präambel:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\MyStandardTOC}{%
+  \begingroup
+  \let\savedpartline\l@part
+  \let\savedchapterline\l@chapter  %% remove if article/scrartcl class
+  \let\savedsectionline\l@section
+  \let\savedsubsectionline\l@subsection 
+  % and so on if \subsubsection, etc... is used
+  % 
+  % for the book or article classes:
+  \etocsetstyle{part}{}{}
+    {\savedpartline{\etocnumber\hspace{1em}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  % for the scrbook or scrartcl classes:
+  \etocsetstyle{part}{}{}
+    {\savedpartline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  % identical in book/article/scrbook/scrartcl classes:
+  \etocsetstyle{chapter}{}{}   %%% only for book and scrbook
+    {\savedchapterline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  \etocsetstyle{section}{}{} 
+    {\savedsectionline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  \etocsetstyle{subsection}{}{}
+    {\savedsubsectionline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
+  % etc... if further sectioning units are used
+  % (see the text for what to do with the memoir class)
+  \etocstandarddisplaystyle % this is for the title, page-marks, etc...
+  \tableofcontents     
+  \endgroup}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+Natürlich ist es so, wenn das Dokument nur ein Inhaltsverzeichnis hat, dann gibt
+es keine Notwendigkeit, die Befehle in ein Makro zu setzen oder sogar in eine
+Gruppe. \footnote{Und wenn darüber hinaus, um das gleiche Layout wie im Standard
+zu halten, kann man sich die Frage stellen, warum man \etoc benutzt \ldots\ Es
+gibt \emph{einen} guten Grund: Zahlen und Namen sind separate
+\texttt{hyperref}-Links, nach der Regel gibt es nur eine Verbindung, die sowohl
+die Nummer und den Namen auf einem toc-Eintrag entsprechen.} Mit dem Befehl
+\etoc ist ein Inhaltsverzeichnis völlig identisch zu einem von der
+Dokumentenklasse: |article|, |book|, |scrartcl|, |scrbook|. \footnote{Für die
+|memoir|-Klasse braucht man ein bisschen mehr: Jeder der Befehle
+\csa{booknumberline}, 
+\csa{partnumberline} und \csa{chapternumberline} müssen in ein
+\csa{let} gebettet werden und sie ergeben dann ein:
+\centeredline{%
+\csa{etocsetstyle\{chapter\}\{\}\{\}\{\string\savedchapterline\{%
+\string\savedchapternumberline}}
+\hbox to \linewidth{\hfil\hfil \ttfamily 
+        \{\csa{etocnumber}\}\csa{etocname}\}\{\csa{etocpage}\}\}\{\}\hfil} 
+(und analog für |part| und |book|).}
+Die Anzahl und die Namen der einzelnen Einträge sind jeweils separat in einem
+|hyperref|-Link, wie es immer der Fall bei \etoc ist, wenn man nicht im
+Kompatibilitätsmodus ist. Ersetzt man \csa{etocnumber} mit \csa{etocthenumber},
+dann ergibt es ein Inhaltsverzeichnis, wo die Zahlen nicht mehr verlinkt sind,
+aber die Namen noch. Oder man kann sich entscheiden, \csa{etocthename} zu
+verwenden und eine Hyperlink-Nummer mit \csa{etocnumber} zu erhalten.
+
+Hier ist ein subtiles Beispiel, wo nur geringfügig die "`sections"' modifiziert
+wurden (hinzufügen von Farbe für die Nummer und das Entfernen des
+|hyperref|-Links) und die Unterabschnitte, wie in der Standardeinstellung,
+\emph{mit Ausnahme} von einer bestimmte "`section"' im Layout komplett geändert
+wurde: \MyQuasiStandardTOC{\ref{toc:overview}} \bigskip Dieses Beispiel hat nur
+Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte und der in \csa{MyStandardTOC} verwendete Code
+war:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}{}
+  {\ifnum\etocthenumber=3
+      \etocsetstyle{subsection}
+        {\par\nopagebreak\begingroup
+         \leftskip1.5em \rightskip\@tocrmarg \parfillskip\@flushglue 
+         \parindent 0pt \normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+         % \columnsep1em
+         % \begin{minipage}{\dimexpr\linewidth-\leftskip-\rightskip\relax}%
+         % \begin{multicols}{2}%
+         \etocskipfirstprefix}
+        {\allowbreak\,--\,}
+        {\etocname\ \textup{(\etocnumber)}}
+        {.\par\endgroup}%
+        % {.\par\end{multicols}\end{minipage}\par\endgroup}%
+    \else
+      \etocsetstyle{subsection}
+       {}{}
+       {\savedsubsectionline{\numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}
+       {}%
+    \fi} 
+  {\savedsectionline{\numberline{{\color{cyan}\etocthenumber}}\etocname}{\etocpage}}
+  {}%
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Beachten Sie die Seite mit den Kopf-Zeichen, welche man dem Inhaltsverzeichnis
+hinzufügen kann. Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte sind genauso wie im Standard
+(mit Ausnahme der Unterabschnitte, welche von einem bestimmten
+Benutzer-Abschnitt aus gewählt wird und bis auf die Farbe der
+Abschnittsnummern), ohne das explizit die Länge, die Schriftart oder andere
+Formatierungsanweisungen gegeben werden. Aber wir mussten die |scrartcl|-Quellen
+untersuchen, um festzustellen, was zu nehmen ist für \csa{leftskip} und
+\csa{rightskip} für unsere Nutzer-sections-Einträge.
+
+\section{Das TOC als ein Baum}\label{tocastree}
+
+Mit |tikz|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/pgf}} und dem Paket
+|forest|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/forest}} wird das Inhaltsverzeichnis
+als Baum angezeigt. Die Technik ist, den von \etoc geänderten Befehl
+\csa{tableofcontents} nicht für den Satz zu verwenden, sondern ein Makro, oder
+besser hier eine \emph{symbolische Liste}-Variable vorzubereiten, mit allen
+Anweisungen, die später ausgeführt werden. \textsc{Leslie Lamport}'s Buch
+erwähnt überhaupt nicht die symbolische Liste und \LaTeX{} vermittelt den
+Eindruck, nicht wirklich darauf zu warten, dass die Mehrheit der Nutzer immer
+über sie (oder begrenzte Makros) etwas hört; die ganze Sache und der folgende
+Abschnitt sind daher für fortgeschrittene Anwender.
+
+Setzt man die \csa{etocnumber}- und \csa{etocname}-Befehle in \csa{treetok},
+dann würde das nichts nützen: Auf welche Zahl oder Namen würde sich das dann
+beziehen, in einer verzögerten Ausführung?
+
+Wir brauchen die Speicherung der Makro-Namen, aber nicht die Makro-Inhalte. Und
+wir wollen auch die korrekten |hyperref|-Hyper-Links erhalten.\footnote{Dieses
+Handbuch bis zu der Version vom 14. Mai 2013 verwendete das Paket |tikz-qtree|,
+aber es gab Probleme mit den Hyper-Links. Kein solches Problem entsteht mit
+|forest| oder mit der nativen Syntax |tikz| für Bäume (die im nächsten Abschnitt
+dargestellt sind).} Die Hyper-Link-Informationen von \etoc setzen innen
+\csa{etocname}, etc. \ldots, aber es ist nur ein Zeiger, nicht lagerungsfähig
+für die spätere Verwendung; aber das Paket bietet \csa{etocthelinkednumber},
+\csa{etocthelinkedname} und \csa{etocthelinkedpage}, deren Inhalte enthalten den
+Hyper-Link in einer Form, die gespeichert und später wiederverwendet werden
+können.
+
+Aus diesem |forest|-Baum haben wir ganz besondere \etoc-Stile für Abschnitte und
+Unterabschnitte konzipiert. Sie verwenden ein symbolisches Listenregister mit
+dem Namen |\treetok| und ein Makro |\appendtotok|, deren Aufgabe es ist, zu
+einer bestimmten symbolischen Listenvariablen den Inhalt eines Makros als
+zweites Argument anzuhängen. All dies wird in Reaktion auf einen Befehl
+|\tableofcontents| passieren, aber noch ist \emph{nichts} in deren
+Prozess.\footnote{Es gibt immer ein \csa{par}, welches kein Problem ist, es kann
+aber unterdrückt werden, wenn der Bedarf über den Befehl \csb{etocinline} oder
+dessen Synonym \csb{etocnopar} besteht.} Das ist der spätere Job einer
+|forest|-Umgebung, die den Inhalt von |\treetok| wiedergeben soll.
+\newtoks\treetok
+\newtoks\tmptok
+
+\newcommand*\appendtotok[2]{% #1=toks variable, #2=macro, expands once #2
+  #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+    {\expandafter\the\expandafter #1#2}}
+
+
+% 7 mars: j'utilise \etocthelinkedname défini à partir de 1.07f
+% mais bien sûr je sais que ça ne marche pas (sauf dans l'arbre pour le lien de
+% la section du bas) dans un QTree. Mais ça marche parfaitement dans un arbre
+% TikZ natif.
+
+% 9 septembre 2013: je remplace QTree par Forest, et il n'y a pas de problème
+% avec les hyperliens, ça marche out of the box (une fois que j'ai appris un peu
+% de sa syntaxe et de celle de TikZ).
+
+\newcommand*\PrepareSectionNode{%
+  \tmptok {\centering\bfseries}%
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{2cm}{\the\tmptok}}}% 
+}
+
+% 7 mars: j'utilise maintenant \etocthelinkedname
+\newcommand*{\PrepareSubsectionNode}{%
+  \tmptok {\raggedright}%  j'ai essayé aussi avec \sloppy
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{6cm}{\the\tmptok}}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSubsectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\treetok{[{\hyperref[part:overview]{Überblick}}}}
+    {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+
+% 11 octobre
+% forest ne veut pas @\the\treetok avec un \treetok vide, donc
+% il faut lui donner une valeur par défaut.
+\treetok{[{run latex again}]}
+
+% 12 octobre
+% pour que varioref fonctionne bien, je dois mettre la \tableofcontents
+% au plus près de l'environnement forest
+
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+ \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+     \tableofcontents \label{toc:forest}\ref{toc:overview}
+     \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \bracketset{action character=@}
+     \begin{forest} 
+                  for tree={anchor=center,child anchor=west,
+                            grow'=east,draw,thick,
+                            edge={draw,thick,dashed,color=teal}},
+                  where={level()==1}{circle,thick,fill=blue!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=3cm}}{},
+                  where={level()==2}{fill=red!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=6cm}}{},
+                  % je trouve ce truc pour une position absolue. OK!
+                  rectangle, thick, fill=cyan!5, inner sep=6pt,
+     @\the\treetok 
+     \end{forest}
+     \centeredline{Ein Inhalsverzeichnis in Form eines |forest|-Baums.}
+\end{figure}
+
+Der resultierende Baum wird in einem \hyperref[toc:forest]{Puffer} angelegt, welcher
+\vpageref[oben]{toc:forest} erscheint. Hier ist der zur Herstellung notwendige Code:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtoks\treetok
+\newtoks\tmptok
+
+\newcommand*\appendtotok[2]{% #1=toks variable, #2=macro, expands once #2
+  #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+    {\expandafter\the\expandafter #1#2}}
+
+\newcommand*\PrepareSectionNode{%
+  \tmptok {\centering\bfseries}%
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{2cm}{\the\tmptok}}}% 
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\PrepareSubsectionNode}{%
+  \tmptok {\raggedright}%
+  \appendtotok\tmptok\etocthelinkedname
+  \edef\foresttreenode{ [{\noexpand\parbox{6cm}{\the\tmptok}}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+  {\PrepareSubsectionNode \appendtotok\treetok\foresttreenode}
+  {\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\treetok{[{\hyperref[part:overview]{Überblick}}}}
+    {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ]}}
+
+% forest does not like @\the\treetok if \treetok is empty. On first latex
+% run, this will be the case because the TOC style defined above will not
+% have been executed, as the label {toc:overview} does not refer to a valid 
+% TOC yet. So we must give a safe default value to \treetok
+\treetok{[{run latex again}]}
+
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+     \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+     \tableofcontents \label{toc:forest}\ref{toc:overview}
+     \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \bracketset{action character=@}
+     \begin{forest} 
+                  for tree={anchor=center,child anchor=west,
+                            grow'=east,draw,thick,
+                            edge={draw,thick,dashed,color=teal}},
+                  where={level()==1}{circle,thick,fill=blue!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=3cm}}{},
+                  where={level()==2}{fill=red!5,
+                                    before computing xy={l=6cm}}{},
+                  rectangle, thick, fill=cyan!5, inner sep=6pt,
+     @\the\treetok 
+     \end{forest}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Warum |\hypersetup{hidelinks}|? Wie in \autoref{ssec:hidelinks} erläutert ist,
+werden die Links in Inhaltsverzeichnissen nicht eingefärbt, noch gerahmt, so
+dass dieses Dokument den Befehl
+|\hypersetup{hidelinks}|
+hinzufügt. Aber immer werden die |\treetok|-Inhalte in die
+|\hyperlink|-Ursprungsbefehle in |\etocthelinkedname| ausgepackt, etc. \ldots{}
+Sie werden in der normalen Umgebung für Links (die in diesem Dokument zu
+kolorieren sind) ausgeführt. Der \etoc -Code versucht zu erraten, was der
+aktuelle "`Stil"' für Links ist (ein Begriff, der nicht wirklich von |hyperref|
+vorausgesetzt zu sein scheint) und speichert es in |\etocthelinkedname|, etc.
+\ldots, Ich entschied mich für die einfachere Lösung, es dem Benutzer zu
+überlassen, ob er es neu erstellt, was auch immer für Bedingungen erwünscht
+sind. So, hier ist es notwendig, das |\hypersetup{hidelinks}| in dem
+|figure|-Umgebung neu zu erstellen.
+
+Es gibt einige andere Beispiele in dieser Dokumentation, wobei
+|\tableofcontents| verwendet wird, um Material zu haben für den späteren
+Schriftsatz:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Für das Drucken der Statistiken zu Beginn der einzelnen Abschnitte (siehe
+  \autoref{ssec:statistics}) wurden unbeschädigte Boxen benutzt (das Problem der
+  Darstellung der Links funktioniert nicht).
+\item Zum Setzen des Inhaltsverzeichnisses als eine Tabelle mit der Methode von
+  \autoref{ssec:tocastableold};
+  auch dort werden wir |\hypersetup{hidelinks}| setzen, nachdem wir die Namen,
+  Nummern und Seitennummern in einem symbolischen Listenregister gesetzt haben.
+\item Und zwei weitere Baum-Beispiele sind im nächsten Abschnitt.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\section{Das TOC als ein Molekül}\label{ssec:molecule}
+
+Es ist auch möglich, einen Inhaltsverzeichnisbaum nach der TikZ-Syntax für Bäume
+zu konstruieren: Aber das ist eine kompliziertere Aufgabe für die \etoc
+Linienstile, welche die Klammern in einer Art und Weise von \TeX{} behandeln.
+(Sie brauchen für das Auffüllen der symbolischen Liste im Zusammenhang mit jedem
+Schritt immer eine Balance, sonst müssen immer kompliziertere Tricks angewandt
+werden.).
+
+Die einfachste Strategie ist es, eine symbolische Liste zuzuweisen (oder Sie
+verwenden ein Makro) für jede Ebene: Wir brauchen ein \csa{parttok}, ein
+\csa{chaptertok}, ein \csa{sectiontok} und ein \csa{subsectiontok}, um in der
+Aufgabe die \csa{treetok} zu befüllen. Wir interessieren uns hier für die
+Tabelle der Inhalte von diesem (oder einem anderen) Dokumententeil, nur ein
+\csa{sectiontok} und ein \csa{subsectiontok} wird dafür gebraucht.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+% \newtoks\treetok % already done earlier
+\newtoks\sectiontok \newtoks\subsectiontok \newcommand*{\treenode}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\appendchildtree}[2]{% token list t1 becomes: t1 child {t2}
+   \edef\tmp{\the#1 child {\the#2}}%
+   #1\expandafter{\tmp}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\preparetreenode}{%
+  \tmptok\expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}% expanded one time (mandatory)
+  \edef\treenode{node {\the\tmptok}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode \sectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode \subsectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\hyperref[part:overview]{Overview}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+
+% moved to the inside of the figure environment for correct \pageref{toc:molecule}
+% \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+% \tableofcontents \label{toc:molecule} \ref{toc:overview}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\newtoks\sectiontok
+\newtoks\subsectiontok
+\newcommand*\treenode {}
+
+\newcommand*{\appendchildtree}[2]{% token list t1 becomes: t1 child {t2}
+   \edef\tmp{\the#1 child {\the#2}}%
+   #1\expandafter{\tmp}%
+}
+
+\newcommand*{\preparetreenode}{%
+  \tmptok\expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \edef\treenode{node {\the\tmptok}}%
+}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode
+   \sectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\treetok\sectiontok}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+  {\preparetreenode
+   \subsectiontok\expandafter{\treenode}}
+  {\appendchildtree\sectiontok\subsectiontok}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\hyperref[part:overview]{Überblick}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+   \tableofcontents \label{toc:molecule}\ref{toc:overview}
+   \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+   \begin{tikzpicture}
+              [grow cyclic,
+               level 1/.style={level distance=4cm,sibling angle=72},
+               level 2/.style={level distance=2cm,sibling angle=60},
+               every node/.style={ball color=red,circle,text=SkyBlue},
+               edge from parent path={[dashed,very thick,color=cyan]
+                           (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}
+   \centeredline{Ein Inhaltsverzeichnis als ein "`Molekül"'.}
+\end{figure}
+
+% Pour que \pageref fonctionne correctement, je dois mettre
+% le \tableofcontents dans la figure. 
+
+Der |\tableofcontents|-Befehl erscheint direkt über der Umgebung in dem
+|tikzpicture|-Umfeld und ist eine Gleitfigur (über Inhaltslabel sicherlich auf
+die gleiche Seite zu beziehen, wie die in dem das Bild tatsächlich gedruckt
+werden soll). Wir erhalten somit das Inhaltsverzeichnis als
+"`\hyperref[toc:molecule]{Molekül}"', welches oben erscheint
+\vpageref[above]{toc:molecule}. Hier ist der aktuelle, tatsächlich produzierte
+Code:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}[th!]\centering
+   \etocsetnexttocdepth{subsection}
+   \tableofcontents \label{toc:molecule} \ref{toc:overview}
+   \hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+   \begin{tikzpicture}
+              [grow cyclic,
+               level 1/.style={level distance=4cm,sibling angle=72},
+               level 2/.style={level distance=2cm,sibling angle=60},
+               every node/.style={ball color=red,circle,text=SkyBlue},
+               edge from parent path={[dashed,very thick,color=cyan]
+                           (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Dieses \hyperref[toc:molecule]{TikZ-TOC} ist komplett verlinkt, wie das
+vorherige \hyperref[toc:forest]{Forest-TOC} auch.
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\autoref{part:globalcmds}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+
+\noindent  
+\parbox{4cm}{\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+    \begin{tikzpicture}
+              [grow cyclic,
+               level 1/.style={level distance=2.5cm,sibling angle=60},
+               level 2/.style={level distance=1cm,sibling angle=45},
+               every node/.style={ball color=red!50,circle,text=black},
+               edge from parent path={[very thick,color=cyan]
+                       (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}}%
+\begin{minipage}{\dimexpr\linewidth-4cm\relax}
+  Seitlich ist das (völlig mit Hyper-Links versehene) Inhaltsverzeichnis von
+  \autoref{part:globalcmds}.
+  \def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\small\hyphenchar\font-1 \baselineskip10pt\relax}%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsettocstyle
+  {\treetok{\node {\autoref{part:globalcmds}}}}
+  {\global\appendtotok\treetok{ ;}}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\noindent  
+\parbox{4cm}{\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+   \begin{tikzpicture}
+      [grow cyclic,
+       level 1/.style={level distance=2.5cm,sibling angle=60},
+       level 2/.style={level distance=1cm,sibling angle=45},
+       every node/.style={ball color=red!50,circle,text=black},
+       edge from parent path={[very thick,color=cyan]
+               (\tikzparentnode) --(\tikzchildnode)}] 
+     \the\treetok
+   \end{tikzpicture}}%
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+
+\section{Das TOC als eine Tabelle}
+\label{sec:tocastable}
+
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+With release |1.08| it is easier to typeset a TOC as a table. It is
+possible to open a tabular in the title part of the TOC (first argument
+to \csb{etocsettocstyle}) and then close it after the contents (second
+argument to \csb{etocsettocstyle}), and specify in the line styles how
+to use the tabulation |&| and tabular end of row |\\|. There are some
+conditions and a few caveats:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item it is mandatory to issue \csb{etocglobaldefs} for \etoc's
+  definitions to have global scope,
+\item use \csb{etocthelinkedname},
+  \csb{etocthelinkednumber} and \csb{etocthelinkedpage} in preference to
+  \csb{etocname}, \csb{etocnumber}, \csb{etocpage}: if |hyperref| is
+  present, this is mandatory, and if it is not present, it does not hurt
+  and gives the same output,
+\item it is impossible to start one of the \meta{start}, \meta{prefix},
+  \meta{contents} or \meta{finish} specification with a sole |\hline|,
+  \emph{i.e.} one not preceded by a |\\| (it is however possible to put
+  |\\| at the end of \meta{prefix} and the |\hline| at the start of
+  \meta{contents}).
+\item as is explained next, it is recommended to use the  |\\| at
+  the start of the \meta{prefix} or \meta{contents}
+  specifications to close the \emph{previous} row, not at the end
+  to close the \emph{current} row; when the TOC is a partial one (a
+  \csa{localtableofcontents}) this advice becomes (in almost all
+  situations) mandatory.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Here is an example of a TOC as a |longtable|, as is possible relatively
+simply now with |1.08|. The code follows.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+\begingroup
+\etocglobaldefs
+\etocsetstyle{part}
+  {}
+  {\\\hline}
+  {\strut\etocthelinkednumber &\bfseries\etocthelinkedname 
+                              &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {}
+  {\etociffirst{\etocifnumbered{\\\hline}{\\\hline\hline}}{\\}}
+  {\etocthelinkednumber&\etocthelinkedname &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {}
+  {\\}
+  {&\makebox[1cm][c]{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+    \parbox[t]{\dimexpr6cm-\tabcolsep\relax}
+              {\sloppy\itshape\etocthelinkedname\strut}%
+   &\itshape\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \begin{longtable}{|>{\bfseries}c|p{7cm}|r|}
+     \hline
+     \multicolumn{3}{|c|}{\Large\bfseries\strut\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}%
+     }
+    {\\\hline\end{longtable}}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG
+\begingroup
+\etocglobaldefs % necessary for \etocthename etc... to survive &
+
+% we must use \etocthelinkednumber and not \etocnumber if hyperref is
+% present, because \etocnumber does not incorporate a fully expanded
+% hyperlink destination specification, hence that part gets lost when a
+% & is encountered
+
+% observe the locations of the \\
+\etocsetstyle{part}
+  {}
+  {\\\hline}
+  {\strut\etocthelinkednumber &\bfseries\etocthelinkedname 
+                              &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+  {}
+  {\etociffirst{\etocifnumbered{\\\hline}{\\\hline\hline}}{\\}}
+  {\etocthelinkednumber&\etocthelinkedname &\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+  {}
+  {\\}
+  {&\makebox[1cm][c]{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+    \parbox[t]{\dimexpr6cm-\tabcolsep\relax}
+              {\sloppy\itshape\etocthelinkedname\strut}%
+   &\itshape\etocthelinkedpage }
+  {}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+     \begin{longtable}{|>{\bfseries}c|p{7cm}|r|}
+     \hline
+     \multicolumn{3}{|c|}{\Large\bfseries TABLE OF CONTENTS}%
+     }
+    {\\\hline\end{longtable}}
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {subsection}
+
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+Examining the code above the reader will wonder why the |\\| are
+always given first in \meta{prefix+contents} and not, as is more
+intuitive, rather last. In many cases one may indeed construct
+TOC-as-tables with the |\\| located at the end of the style
+specifications (but almost never for a \csa{localtableofcontents}).
+The problem in the previous example was with the positioning of the
+|\hline|'s.
+
+Due to technical aspects of how \TeX{} constructs alignments any
+definition or assignment done after an |\\| starts a new row, and
+thus makes |\hline| an illegal token (this shows as a |misplaced
+\noalign| error.) Not only does \etoc have to do such definitions
+to construct \csb{etocname} etc..., it is furthermore the case that
+some packages put things in the |.toc| file and as a result there
+is never any guarantee that between two \csa{contentsline} there
+will not be such a token like |\relax| which in the contexts of
+alignments forces \TeX{} to start a cell and thus makes it
+impossible then to insert an |\hline|.
+
+The safest way is to start with an |\\| each line style
+specification. We had a little problem with the fact that we wanted
+parts not only to have a rule above them (easy, they do |\\\hline|)
+but also below them: after each part there is a section, thus the
+section which are first of their kind used the \csb{etociffirst}
+conditional branching. The attentive reader will notice one last
+subtlety: the title was supposed to be followed not by one, but by
+two |\hline|'s.
+
+To solve this we could have used a one-time macro redefining itself, but
+we noticed that the title was followed by the unnumbered Abstract, thus
+the \csb{etocifnumbered} switch came to the rescue.
+
+Last technical note: because we put the |\\| inside the branches, there
+was no need to employ the expandable variants \csb{etocxiffirst} and
+\csb{etocxifnumbered}.
+
+For the hardliner's old way of obtaining the exact same result, see
+\autoref{ssec:tocastableold}.
+
+Here is also a much simpler example. It is a local table of
+contents.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+\begin{center}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+             {}
+             {\etociffirst{\\\hline\hline}{\\\hline}}
+             {\etocthelinkedname& 
+              \etocthelinkednumber& 
+              \etocthelinkedpage }
+             {}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+   {\hypersetup{hidelinks}\begin{tabular}{|p{4cm}|c|c|}\hline
+    \multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\bfseries Abschnitt}&
+    \bfseries Nummer&
+    \bfseries Seite}
+   {\\\hline\end{tabular}}
+
+\etocglobaldefs % VERPFLICHTEND !!
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+
+\tableofcontents\ref{toc:overview}
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+             {}
+             {\etociffirst{\\\hline\hline}{\\\hline}}
+             {\etocthelinkedname& 
+              \etocthelinkednumber& 
+              \etocthelinkedpage }
+             {}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+   {\hypersetup{hidelinks}\begin{tabular}{|p{4cm}|c|c|}\hline
+    \multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\bfseries Abschnitt}&
+    \bfseries Nummer&
+    \bfseries Seite}
+   {\\\hline\end{tabular}}
+
+\etocglobaldefs % VERPFLICHTEND !!
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+
+\tableofcontents\ref{toc:overview}
+\end{center}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocglobaldefs} und \csbhyp{etoclocaldefs}}
+\label{etocglobaldefs}
+\label{etoclocaldefs}
+
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+In \LaTeX{} the meaning of a command defined via |\newcommand\foo{...}| inside
+an environment (or group) vanishes from \TeX's memory on exit from this
+environment (or group). At times however it is needed to make definitions with
+global scope, for this \TeX{} has the primitive prefix |\global|.
+
+By default \etoc's definitions of \csb{etocname} etc... are local. This causes
+problems in certain contexts such as seen here with TOC as tables, but also
+with |enumitem| \emph{inline} variants of its standard environments, because
+the command |\item| then closes a group.
+
+After \csb{etocglobaldefs}, \etoc will make its definitions of \csb{etocname}
+etc... have global scope. For normal use this is not necessary. It does not hurt
+either to activate it systematically. 
+
+To return to the default, use \csb{etoclocaldefs}. Note that both
+\csb{etocglobaldefs} and \csb{etoclocaldefs} actions are local to the
+environment or group where they are used.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {linestyles}
+
+\part{Befehle für die TOC-Linienstile}
+\label{part:linestyles}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=.75cm, label=\etocifnumbered
+      {{\fboxrule1pt\fcolorbox{green}{white}{\etocnumber}}}{}]}
+% Dec 7, 2012. I hit upon a problem whose origin I found was
+% with xcolor, as xcolor modifies \fbox
+% (try \section{\fbox{A}} with and without xcolor). The fix
+% was to \protect the \fbox used in the |enumitem| label.
+% Strangely enough, with |hyperref| active, the problem did
+% not show up. Anyhow I now use \fcolorbox rather than \fbox
+% and there is no problem anymore. Also I don't have now to
+% use \normalcolor which already needed protection.
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (Seite \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=0cm, label=\etocnumber]}
+{\normalfont \item}
+{\etocname{} (S.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}
+{\par\nobreak\begingroup\normalfont\footnotesize\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\allowbreak\,--\,}
+{\etocname}
+{.\hfil\par\endgroup\pagebreak[3]}
+
+% 27 janvier 22:30
+% je définis les macros (non protégées) 
+% \etocthename, \etocthenumber, \etocthepage
+
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\etocfontminusone\color{green}%
+     \fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1ex
+     \framebox[\linewidth]
+              {\normalcolor\hss Inhalt von \autoref{part:linestyles}\hss}}
+
+\localtableofcontents \label{toc:a}
+
+\section{Der \csbhyp{etocsetstyle}-Befehl}
+\label{etocsetstyle}
+
+\subsection{Die \csbhyp{etocname}- und \csbhyp{etocpage}-Befehle}
+\label{etocname}
+\label{etocpage}
+
+Hier soll erläutert werden, wie \etoc\ dazu verwendet wurde, das
+Inhaltsverzeichnis am Beginn des zweiten Teils zu erstellen. Es handelt sich
+dabei um ein lokales Inhaltsverzeichnis, weshalb der Befehl \localtoc\ verwendet
+wurde.
+
+Wir müssen hierbei unterscheiden zwischen den Linienstilen (\emph{line styles})
+und dem Ausgabestil (\emph{toc display style}). Die \emph{line styles} erhält
+man grundsätzlich auf die folgende Art und Weise:
+
+
+\footnote{Das vorliegende Dokument hat
+  {\ttfamily\string\renewcommand\string{%
+     \string\familydefault\string}\string{\string\sfdefault\string}}
+  in seiner Präambel, deshalb schaltet der Befehl \csa{normalfont} zur
+  |sans| Schriftart; aus diesem Grund habe ich im Abschnitt line-style 
+  \csa{rmfamily} geschrieben.}
+
+\begingroup\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}}
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (page \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{\begin{enumerate}}
+{\normalfont\item}
+{\etocname{} (p.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}
+{\par\nobreak\begingroup\normalfont
+        \footnotesize\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\allowbreak\,--\,}
+{\etocname}
+{.\hfil\par\endgroup\pagebreak[3]}
+\end{verbatim}
+\endgroup
+
+Diese provisorischen Stil-Definitionen beruhen auf der automatischen
+Nummerierung, die von der |enumerate|-Umgebung generiert wird, es ist aber
+wesentlich besser den Befehl \csb{etocnumber} innerhalb des Item-labels zu
+verwenden, denn das gibt das richtige Ergebnis. Die verbesserten Definitionen
+werden dahingehend später erklärt.
+
+Mit diesem Stil müsste man so
+einfallsreich sein, etwas zu designen, was nicht mit Abschnitten oder
+Unterabschnitten zu tun hat, vielleicht so etwas wie Superscripte. Nun,
+normalerweise braucht man Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte nicht nummeriert und
+aufgelistet in der TOC, also hat unser vermeintlicher Benutzer ein Design
+gewählt, welches dafür nichts bereitstellt und fügte noch hinzu:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{paragraph}{}{}{}{}
+\etocsetstyle{subparagraph}{}{}{}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+Das ist der gleiche Sachverhalt wie mit den Standardlinienstilen!
+
+Jeder \csb{etocsetstyle}-Befehl hat fünf notwendige Argumente:\\ \hbox to
+\linewidth {\hfil\csb{etocsetstyle}\color{blue}\marg{levelname}%
+\marg{start}\marg{prefix}\marg{contents}\marg{finish}\hfil} Die
+\meta{levelname}'s sind die Abschnittseinteilungen der
+Standard-Dokument-Klassen: Von \emph{part} (oder \emph{book}, welches von der
+|memoir|-Klasse benutzt wird) herunter bis zu \emph{subparagraph}.
+
+Der \meta{start}-Code wird ausgeführt, wenn ein toc-Eintrag dieses Levels
+gefunden wurde und der vorherige ein höheres Level hatte. Der \meta{finish}-Code
+wird ausgeführt, sobald man wieder einen Eintrag mit einem höheren toc-Level
+findet. In der Zwischenzeit werden alle Einträge für dieses Level gesetzt, indem
+zuerst der \meta{prefix}-Code und dann der \meta{contents}-Code ausgeführt wird.
+
+Die (robusten) Befehle \csb{etocname}, \csb{etocnumber} und \csb{etocpage} sind
+für die Benutzung innerhalb der \meta{prefix} und \meta{contents}-Teile aus der
+\csa{etocsetstyle}-Spezifikation. Diese enthalten den Namen, die Nummerierung
+und die Seitennummer des entsprechenden toc-Eintrags. Ist das Paket |hyperref|
+im Dokument eingebunden, und es existieren Verlinkungen zu den TOC-Daten, dann
+werden diese Links in den Befehlen \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber} und
+\csa{etocpage} gehalten (Der letzte hat nur einen Link, wenn |hyperref| die
+Option \emph{linktoc=all} übergeben wurde).
+
+
+
+\subsection{Die \csbhyp{etocskipfirstprefix} und \csbhyp{etociffirst} Befehle}
+\label{etocskipfirstprefix}
+\label{etociffirst}
+\label{etocxiffirst}
+
+% ALTES
+% Der gewählte |subsubsection|-Stil benutzt außerdem den Befehl
+% \csb{etocskipfirstprefix}, welcher -- falls verwendet -- der letzte im
+% \emph{start}-Code sein \emph{muss}. Er sorgt dafür, dass der "`prefix"'-Code
+% nicht für das erste Objekt ausgeführt wird.
+
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+The chosen |subsubsection| style made use of the command
+\csb{etocskipfirstprefix}, which instructs \etoc to \emph{not} use
+for the first item the specified \meta{prefix} code.\footnote{With
+versions earlier than |1.08| it had to be the very last token in
+the \meta{start} code. It may now appear anywhere therein.}
+
+The command \csb{etociffirst}\marg{YES CODE}\marg{NO CODE} (new
+with |1.08|) is a more flexible way to customize the \meta{prefix}
+(and \meta{contents}) specifications. It executes the \meta{YES
+CODE} branch if this is the first unit at that level (inside a
+lower level) and the \meta{NO CODE} if not. This is a robust
+command which survives to expansion (for example in an |enumitem| label).
+
+The variant \csb{etocxiffirst} does the same, but is expandable.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+
+\subsection{Der \csbhyp{etocnumber}-Befehl}
+\label{etocnumber}
+
+Bis hierhin würde unsere Spezifikation die Nummerierung verwenden, die von der 
+|enumerate|-Umgebung generiert wird, jedoch möchten wir natürlich die in 
+der |.toc|-Datei deklarierten Nummern benutzen. Das kann man mit Hilfe des 
+\csb{etocnumber}-Befehls erreichen. Um die Bezeichnungen in die 
+|enumerate|-Auflistung zu bekommen, fährt man mit der Syntax 
+{\ttfamily label=\char32} des |enumitem|-Pakets fort:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}[label=\etocnumber]}
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (page \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Lieber als nur \csa{etocnumber} haben wir dann so etwas wie |\fbox{\etocnumber}|
+benutzt. Dabei ist festzuhalten, dass \csa{etocnumber} ein robuster Befehl ist,
+was erklärt, warum er in der Label-Spezifikation benutzt werden kann, ohne
+|\protect| hinzuzufügen.
+
+\subsubsection{Der \csbhyp{etocifnumbered}-Schalter}
+\label{etocifnumbered}
+\label{etocxifnumbered}
+
+Die \csa{fbox} würde ein unästhetisches Ergebnis bringen im Fall eines nicht
+nummerierten Abschnitts (welches beispielsweise im Inhaltsverzeichnis gelandet
+ist mittels eines \csa{addcontentsline} Befehls).\footnote{Wie man sieht, wird
+\csa{fcolorbox} verwendet wird statt \csa{fbox}. Aufgrund einer Neudefinition --
+durchgeführt vom |xcolor|-Paket-- haben wir \csa{fbox} verwendet (und nicht
+|hyperref|), sonst hätten wir \csa{protect}\csa{fbox} benötigt.}
+
+Der \csb{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B}-Befehl führt \meta{A} aus, wenn die
+Nummer existiert, und \meta{B} falls nicht. Also benutzen wir es in dem Code,
+welcher letztendlich für das |section|-Level gewählt wurde:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=.75cm, label=\etocifnumbered
+      {{\fboxrule1pt\fcolorbox{green}{white}{\etocnumber}}}{}]}
+{\normalsize\bfseries\rmfamily\item}
+{\etocname{} (page \etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+{\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=0cm, label=\etocnumber]}
+{\normalfont \item}
+{\etocname{} (p.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Wenn wir nur das |section|-Level geändert hätten und nicht das
+|subsection|-Level, dann wäre ein Kompilierfehler aufgetreten, denn der
+Paket-Stil für die "`subsections"' erwartet dann `im Vertikal-Modus' zu starten.
+Ein zusätzliches \csa{par}-Token im \meta{contents}-Teil des |section|-Levels
+hätte das behoben: |{...(page \etocpage)\par}|.
+
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+The command \csb{etocifnumbered} is robust;  \csb{etocxifnumbered}
+(new with |1.08|) has the same effect but is expandable.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocthename}, \csbhyp{etocthenumber} sowie
+\csbhyp{etocthepage}}
+\label{etocthename}
+\label{etocthenumber}
+\label{etocthepage}
+
+Es ist manchmal wünschenswert, Zugriff auf Name, Nummer und Seitenzahl zu haben,
+ohne die hyperref-Daten: Ähnlich wie die *-Variante des \csa{ref}-Befehls, wenn
+das |hyperref|-Paket verwendet wird. Beispielsweise könnte man den Wunsch haben,
+eine Einheit oder Seitenzahl in einer Art numerischem Kontext verwenden zu
+wollen oder seine Formatierung zu ändern. Diese Funktionalität wird von
+\csb{etocthename}, \csb{etocthenumber} und \csb{etocthepage} bereitgestellt.
+
+Diese Befehle sind aber nicht geschützt, also sollten sie in veränderlichen
+Kontexten (zum Beispiel Label-Beschreibungen mit vorangestelltem |\protect|)
+verwendet werden.
+
+
+\subsection{Der \csbhyp{etoclink}-Befehl}
+\label{etoclink}
+
+Der Befehl \csb{etoclink}\marg{linkname} kann in Linienstil-Beschreibungen
+benutzt werden, in ähnlicher Art und Weise wie die argumentlosen Befehle
+\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber} und \csa{etocpage}. Er erzeugt einen Link
+(falls solch ein von |hyperref| zur |.toc|-Datei hinzugefügt wurde), dessen Ziel
+der entsprechende Dokumentteil ist und dessen Name das angegebene Argument ist.
+Daher ist |\etoclink{\eotcthename}| das ursprüngliche |\etocname|. Es ist darauf
+zu achten, dass wenn |hyperref| nicht damit beauftragt wurde, die Seitenzahl mit
+einem Link zu versehen (mittels seiner Option \emph{linktoc=all}), dann hat
+\etoc's \csa{etocpage} auch keinen Link, |\etoclink{\etocthepage}| allerdings
+schon.
+
+Der Befehl \csa{etoclink} ist robust. 
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocthelinkedname}, \csbhyp{etocthelinkednumber},
+\csbhyp{etocthelinkedpage} und \csbhyp{etocthelink}}
+\label{etocthelinkedname}
+\label{etocthelinkednumber}
+\label{etocthelinkedpage}
+\label{etocthelink}
+
+Das Folgende ist für fortgeschrittene Anwendungen von fortgeschrittenen
+Benutzern. Das \csa{etocthename}-Makro wurde bereits schon einmal erwähnt;
+verwendet man es in Anweisungen wie |\global\let\lastone\etocthename| in einem
+\etoc line-Stil, definiert das Macro |\lastone| so, dass es sich ausbreitet bis
+zum letzten Namen auf dem korrespondieren Level. Jedoch bestand bisher keine
+Möglichkeit, dass Gleiche auch für die Link-Daten zu tun.
+
+Das in diesem Paket enthaltene \csa{etocthelinkedname} stellt dies nun zur
+Verfügung, inklusive der Link-Daten. Es wurde in dieser Dokumentation benutzt
+bei Erstellung der \hyperref[tocastree]{Beispiele mit Bäumen}.
+
+Ebenfalls bereit gestellt mit ähnlichen Funktionen: \csa{etocthelinkednumber},
+\csa{etocthelinkedpage} (welches nur einen Link enthält, wenn |hyperref| einen
+zu dieser Seitenzahl hinzugefügt hat) und \csa{etocthelink}\marg{linkname},
+welches es erlaubt einen Link mit einem beliebigen Name zu erstellen.
+
+All diese Befehle sind \emph{nicht} robust. 
+
+Beispiel\begingroup\
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, und }}]}
+          {\global\let\TmpEtocNumber\etocthelinkednumber
+           \global\let\TmpEtocName\etocthelinkedname 
+           \global\let\TmpEtocPage\etocthelinkedpage }
+          {\item [{\bfseries\TmpEtocNumber.}]\TmpEtocName\ 
+                 (\emph{S. \TmpEtocPage})}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {(ein Inhaltsverzeichnis als eine Inline-%
+                       \texttt{enumitem}-Umgebung): }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Beispiel\begingroup
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, und }}]}
+          {\global\let\TmpEtocNumber\etocthelinkednumber
+           \global\let\TmpEtocName\etocthelinkedname 
+           \global\let\TmpEtocPage\etocthelinkedpage }
+% Obiges ist erforderlich, da \item, hier in itemize*, eine Gruppe schließt.
+          {\item [{\bfseries\TmpEtocNumber.}]\TmpEtocName\ 
+                 (\emph{S. \TmpEtocPage})}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {(ein Inhaltsverzeichnis als eine Inline-%
+                       \texttt{enumitem}-Umgebung): }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Mit \etoc |1.08| gibt es ein einfacher Weg zum gleichen Resultat:
+\begin{verbatim}
+Beispiel\begingroup\etocglobaldefs % <-- NEU mit etoc 1.08.
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, und }}]}
+          {}
+          {\item [{\bfseries\etocthelinkednumber.}]
+                 \etocthelinkedname\ (\emph{S. \etocthelinkedpage })}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {(ein Inhaltsverzeichnis als eine Inline-%
+                       \texttt{enumitem}-Umgebung): }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+Beispiel\begingroup\etocglobaldefs % <-- NEU mit etoc 1.08.
+        \etocsetstyle {section}
+          {\begin{itemize*}[itemjoin={{; }}, itemjoin*={{, und }}]}
+          {}
+          {\item [{\bfseries\etocthelinkednumber.}]
+                 \etocthelinkedname\ (\emph{S. \etocthelinkedpage })}
+          {\end{itemize*}.}%
+    \etocsetnexttocdepth {section}%
+    \etocsettocstyle {(ein Inhaltsverzeichnis als eine Inline-%
+                       \texttt{enumitem}-Umgebung): }{}%
+    \etocinline\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+
+\section{Der \csbhyp{etocsetlevel}-Befehl}
+\label{etocsetlevel}
+
+Wie bereits in \autoref{part:surprising} erklärt, kann man \etoc mitteilen,
+welches Level er mit einem bestimmten Abschnitts-Befehl assoziieren soll,
+nämlich mit \csa{etocsetlevel}. Zum Beispiel:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetlevel{cell}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{molecule}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{atom}{2}
+\etocsetlevel{nucleus}{3}
+\end{verbatim}
+Im Kompatibilitäts-Modus wird davon ausgegangen, dass die Makros |\l@cell|,
+\texttt{\textbackslash l@mo\-le\-cule}, \ldots\ entweder durch
+den Benutzer oder von einer anderen Klasse definiert wurden: Nur |\etocsetlevel|
+ist nicht genug, um auf dem korrespondierenden Pegel "`out-of-the-box"' zu
+arbeiten.
+
+Jedoch, ist im Kompatibilitätsmodus kein Inhaltsverzeichnis gesetzt, dann ist
+nur wichtig, dass die verschiedenen Linienstile gesetzt sind. 
+Wenn beispielsweise |section| auf Level |1| ist, dann muss man nicht mehr 
+\csa{etocsetstyle}|{molecule}{..}{..}{..}{..}| nach 
+\csa{etocsetstyle}|{molecule}{1}|  aufrufen, da 
+\csa{etocsetstyle}|{section}{..}{..}{..}{..}| bereits 
+wirksam ist (und es wurde im Paket selbst in der Definition seines
+Linienstils gesetzt). 
+ 
+Die akzeptierten Level laufen von |-2| bis einschließlich |6|. Alles andere wird
+auf |6| abgebildet, welches ein Dummy-Level ist und nie dargestellt wird. Das
+Paket tut Folgendes:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetlevel{book}{-2}
+\etocsetlevel{part}{-1}
+\etocsetlevel{chapter}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{section}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{subsection}{2}
+\etocsetlevel{subsubsection}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{paragraph}{4}
+\etocsetlevel{subparagraph}{5}
+\end{verbatim}
+Die benutzerdefinierten Stile von \etoc werden von \csa{etocdefaultlines}
+aktiviert. Sie werden vom Haupt-Inhaltsverzeichnis dieses Dokuments dargestellt.
+Die Level-Zuweisungen können jederzeit modifiziert werden: In
+\autoref{part:surprising} sieht man verschiedene Anwendungen dieser Technik. 
+
+Als ein weiteres Beispiel soll hier angeführt werden, wie das 
+\hyperref[toc:main]{Haupt-Inhaltsverzeichnis} dieses Dokuments gesetzt
+wurde, nämlich mit den folgenden Instruktionen: 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsettocdepth {subsubsection} % set the initial tocdepth
+\etocdefaultlines % use the package default line styles. At this early stage in
+                  % the document they had not yet been modified by \etocsetstyle
+                  % commands, so \etoctoclines could have been used, too.
+\etocmarkboth\contentsname
+\etocmulticolstyle[1]                   % one-column display
+    {\pdfbookmark[1]{Table of contents}{MAINTOC}% create a bookmark in the pdf
+     \noindent\bfseries\Large
+     \leaders\hrule height1pt\hfill
+     \MakeUppercase{Table of Contents}}
+\begingroup                             % use a group to limit the scope of the
+  \etocsetlevel{subsection}{3}          %   subsection level change.
+  \etocsetlevel{subsubsection}{4}       % anything > tocdepth=3.
+  \tableofcontents \label{toc:main}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+Auf diese Art und Weise benutzen die "`subsections"' die Stile, die ursprünglich
+für "`subsubsections"' vorgesehen waren, während diese gar nicht gedruckt
+werden. Ohne diese Modifikation wäre das Erscheinungsbild ein anderes gewesen:
+die Paketlinienstile sind dafür gedacht gewesen, in Dokumenten mit vielen vielen
+"`subsubsections"' verarbeitet zu werden, in einem Zwei-Spalten-Layout, um
+diesen ein kompakteres Ergebnis zu liefern als die
+Standard-\LaTeX-Inhaltsverzeichnisse. Hier haben wir jedoch noch ein paar
+"`subsubsections"', daher ist es interessanter, diese zu ignorieren und dafür
+"`sections"` und "`subsections"' visuell unterschiedlich zu drucken.
+
+\section{Umfang der zur \texorpdfstring{\texttt{.toc}}{.toc}-Datei gehörigen Befehle}
+
+\begingroup % pour \small et \MacroFont en particulier.
+\small
+
+\subsection{Testen des Bereichs}
+
+Lasst uns zur Farbe Rot wechseln und außerdem diesen Befehl zur
+|.toc|-Datei hinzufügen: 
+
+\color{red!50}
+\addtocontents{toc}{\string\color{red!50}}
+
+\def\MacroFont{\ttfamily \footnotesize\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\begin{verbatim}
+   \color{red!50}                             % Ändern der Textfarbe
+   \addtocontents{toc}{\string\color{red!50}} % das Gleiche in der .toc-Datei
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Dies ist eine (blass)rote Subsection zu Demonstrationszwecken}
+
+Gut, der Titel hier wurde schwarz dargestellt, was daran liegt, wie die
+|scrartcl|-Klasse funktioniert (in der |article|-Klasse wäre er rot gewesen),
+aber wir sind ohnehin mehr daran interessiert, wie er im Inhaltsverzeichnis
+aussieht: Und tatsächlich ist er rot im
+\hyperref[toc:main]{Haupt-Inhaltsverzeichnis} dieses Dokuments, genau so wie im
+\hyperref[toc:a]{Inhaltsverzeichnis für diesen Abschnitt}. Beide Befehle
+gehorchen wie erwartet dem |\color{red!50}|-Befehl, der in die |.toc|-Datei
+geschrieben wurde.
+
+Aber lasst uns jetzt diese "`subsection"' beenden und eine "`section"' starten.
+
+\section{Bin ich auch rot?}
+
+Die Frage ist, ob es im Inhaltsverzeichnis erscheint: Die Antwort ist ja, es ist
+rot im \hyperref[toc:main]{Haupt-Inhaltsverzeichnis} und nein es ist nicht rot
+im \hyperref[toc:a]{Inhaltsverzeichnis für diesen Abschnitt}. Grund dafür ist,
+dass der \meta{finish}-Code für dieses "`subsection"'-Level eine Gruppe
+geschlossen hat, da es |\end{enumerate}| verwendet hat.
+
+Das zeigt noch einmal die Diskussion aus \autoref{ssec:limitations}.
+
+Die standardmäßigen Paket-line-Stile beinhalten keine Gruppen-Öffnung- und
+Schliess-Befehle: Die Gültigkeit eines Befehls in der |.toc|-Datei wird also
+solange bestehen, bis er explizit durch einen weiteren Befehl wieder rückgängig
+gemacht wird.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \normalcolor
+    \addtocontents{toc}{\string\normalcolor}
+\end{verbatim}
+\endgroup
+
+\normalcolor
+\addtocontents{toc}{\string\normalcolor}
+
+Zurück zu Schwarz. Man beachte das diese Bereichsprobleme auch in mehrsprachigen
+Dokumenten auftauchen, da das |babel|-Paket auftretende Sprachänderungen
+ebenfalls in die |.toc|-Datei schreibt.
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {globalcmds}
+
+\part{Befehle für den toc-Display-Stil}
+\label{part:globalcmds}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocstandardlines
+\localtableofcontents \label{toc:globalcmds}
+
+
+\section{Festlegung des toc-Display-Stils}
+
+
+Der \emph{toc display}-Stil gibt an, ob das Inhaltsverzeichnis mit mehreren
+Spalten erscheint oder nur mit einer, ob der Titel gesetzt ist wie in der
+|article|- oder |book|-Klasse, oder ob er über den Einträgen zentriert sein
+soll, mit Regeln an der Seite, oder ob das gesamte Inhaltsverzeichnis in einen
+Rahmen gepackt werden soll. Entscheidet man sich bspw. für eine einheitliche
+Überschrift und ein Ein-Spalten-Layout, so verwendet man dafür folgende Befehle:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{Title} \tableofcontents    (or \localtableofcontents)
+shortcuts:         \etocruled[1]{Title}  (or  \etoclocalruled[1]{Title})
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Der Befehl \csbhyp{etocsettocstyle}}
+\label{etocsettocstyle}
+
+Dies ist ein Befehl mit zwei notwendigen Argumenten:
+%
+\centeredline{\csb{etocsettocstyle}\marg{before\_toc}\marg{after\_toc}}
+%
+Der \marg{before\_toc}-Teil ist verantwortlich für den Schriftsatz der
+Überschriften, so kann er beispielsweise etwas sein wie
+\starit{section}|{\contentsname}|.
+
+Generell gesprochen, sollte diese Überschrift \TeX{} im "`Vertikal-Modus"'
+lassen, wenn der eigentliche Schriftsatz des Inhalts beginnt: die Linienstile
+(entweder von den Standardklassen oder den Paketlinenstilen) erwarten alle im
+`Vertikal-Modus' zu starten.
+
+Das erste Argument von \csb{etocsettocstyle} kann auch Instruktionen beinhalten,
+um die Seitenüberschriften zu markieren. Oder es kann prüfen (|book|-Klasse), ob
+der Zwei-Spalten-Modus eingeschaltet ist, um dann zum Ein-Spalten-Modus zu
+wechseln. Der \meta{after\_toc}-Teil würde dann wieder den Ein-Spalten-Modus
+aktivieren.
+
+Die im Folgenden beschriebenen Befehle \csb{etocmulticolstyle},
+\csb{etocruledstyle} und \csb{etocframedstyle} rufen alle \csa{etocsettocstyle}
+als Subroutine auf, um eine \texttt{Mehr\-spalten}-Umgebung mit Hilfe von
+\marg{before\_toc} zu starten, welche mit \marg{after\_toc} wieder geschlossen
+wird.
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocmulticolstyle}, \csbhyp{etocmulticol} und 
+\csbhyp{etoclocalmulticol}}
+\label{etocmulticolstyle}
+\label{etocmulticol}
+\label{etoclocalmulticol}
+
+Dies ist ein Befehl mit einem optionalen und einem notwendigen Argument:
+%
+\centeredline{\csb{etocmulticolstyle}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}}
+% 
+Die
+\oarg{number\_of\_coloumns} können von 1 bis 10 gehen (default: 2; ist der Wert
+1, so wird natürlich keine |multicols|-Umgebung angelegt). Das \meta{heading}
+wird typischerweise `vertikaler' Art sein, also wie: \meta{heading} =
+|\section*|\marg{title}, aber man kann auch horizontale Dinge realisieren wie
+|\fbox{Hallo Welt}| (\etoc fügt automatisch ein |\par| ans Ende des
+"`heading"'-Arguments von \csb{etocmulticolstyle}). Hier ist einmal exemplarisch
+dargestellt, wie das Haupt-Inhaltsverzeichnis dieses Dokuments konfiguriert
+wurde:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocmulticolstyle{\noindent\bfseries\Large
+                   \leaders\hrule height1pt\hfill
+                   \MakeUppercase{Table of Contents}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Nach \csa{etocmulticolstyle} haben alle zukünftigen \csa{tableofcontents} den
+spezifizierten Stil, falls es zwischendurch nicht mehr geändert wird. Eine
+kürzere Variante für nur ein Inhaltsverzeichnis ohne Einfluss auf spätere ist:
+\centeredline{\csa{etocmulticol}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}} oder
+\centeredline{\csa{etoclocalmulticol}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{heading}.}
+
+\subsubsection{Der Befehl \csbhyp{etoctocstyle}}
+\label{etoctocstyle}
+
+\centeredline{\csb{etoctocstyle}\oarg{kind}%
+\marg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}}
+\centeredline{=\csb{etocmulticolstyle}|[|{\itshape number\_of\_columns}|]|%
+|{\kind*{|\itshape title\upshape|}}|}
+Wobei |Typ| gewählt wird aus |chapter|, |section| usw. Standardwert ist
+|chapter| oder |section|, abhängig von der Dokumentklasse.
+
+\paragraph{\texorpdfstring{\csbhyp{etoc\-toc\-style\-with\-marks}}{etoctocstylewithmarks}}%
+\leavevmode\unskip{\color{blue}\oarg{kind}\marg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}\marg{mark}}
+\label{etoctocstylewithmarks}
+\label{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}
+
+\centeredline
+{=\csb{etocmulticolstyle}|[|{\itshape number\_of\_columns}|]|%
+|{\kind*{|\itshape title \ttfamily\upshape\string\markboth%
+|{\MakeUppercase{|{\rmfamily\itshape mark}|}}}}|} 
+Wobei |Typ| gewählt wird aus |chapter|, |section| usw. Die wirkliche Anzeige der
+Markierungen ("`marks"') hängt vom Seitenstil ab. Es gibt die Variante 
+\csb{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}, welche Großschreibung unterdrückt.
+
+\paragraph{Möchten wir wirklich pargraph-Einträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis?}
+
+\paragraph{Wirklich?}
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocruledstyle}, \csbhyp{etocruled} und
+ \csbhyp{etoclocal\-ruled}}
+\label{etocruledstyle}
+\label{etocruled}
+\label{etoclocalruled}
+
+Das generelle Format von \csa{etocruledstyle} ist:
+\centeredline{\csb{etocruledstyle}%
+              \oarg{number of columns}\marg{title of the toc}}
+\noindent
+Der Titel ist horizontales Material (der |LR|-Modus von \emph{\LaTeX{}, ein 
+Dokument-Vorbereitung-System,}): wenn es nicht in eine Zeile passt, dann sollte
+es in eine \csa{parbox} mit einer gegebenen Weite geschrieben werden. Der grüne
+Rahmen für die Überschrift des Inhaltsverzeichnisses zu \hyperref[toc:a]{Beginn
+des zweiten Teils dieses Dokuments} wurde erzeugt durch:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocruledstyle[1]{\etocfontminusone\color{green}%
+     \fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1ex
+     \framebox[\linewidth]
+              {\normalcolor\hss Contents of this part\hss}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Eine kürzerer Weg den Stil zu setzen mit \csb{etocruledstyle} und dann einen 
+\csa{tableofcontents} zu erstellen, alles zusammen in einer Gruppe damit
+zukünftige Inhaltsverzeichnisse nicht betroffen sind, ist: 
+\centeredline{\csb{etocruled}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}}
+
+\subsection{Die Befehle \csbhyp{etocframedstyle},  \csbhyp{etocframed}
+und \csbhyp{etoclocal\-framed}}
+\label{etocframedstyle}
+\label{etocframed}
+\label{etoclocalframed}
+
+Die gleiche Arbeitsweise: 
+%
+\centeredline{\csb{etocframedstyle}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}} 
+und die passende Abkürzung:
+%
+\centeredline{\csb{etocframed}\oarg{number\_of\_columns}\marg{title}} 
+Diese wird
+verwendet, wenn man nicht den Stil zukünftiger Inhaltsverzeichnisse modifizieren
+will (eine ändere Möglichkeit wäre es, das Ganze in Klammern zu packen oder
+innerhalb eines |\begingroup...\endgroup|; es gibt auch noch einen
+\csa{etoclocalframed} für ein lokales Inhaltsverzeichnis).
+
+Das gesamte Inhaltsverzeichnis ist eingerahmt. Der Titel selbst aber nicht:
+Möchte man das erreichen, dann muss man das im \meta{title}-Argument mit
+\csa{etocframedstyle} oder \csa{etocframed} festhalten. Die Farben für den
+Hintergrund und der anderen Komponenten (oben, links, rechts, unten) des Rahmens
+sind festgelegt mittels geeigneter |\renewcommand|'s (siehe
+\autoref{ssec:customdisplay}).
+
+Eine |minipage| wird benutzt, von daher ist das produzierte Inhalsverzeichnis
+nicht kompatibel mit Seitenumbrüchen. Um diese zu erlauben, wird empfohlen, die
+Befehle
+\href{http://ctan.org/pkg/mdframed}{mdframed}\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/mdframed}}
+oder
+\href{http://ctan.org/pkg/tcolorbox}{tcolorbox}\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tcolorbox}}
+in den Argumenten von \csb{etocsettocstyle} zu verwenden.
+
+Beispiele in diesem Dokument findet man auf den Seiten \pageref{toc:d}, 
+\pageref{toc:floating}, \pageref{toc:b} und \pageref{toc:clone}.
+
+\subsection{Überschriften, Titel, \csbhyp{etocoldpar}, \csbhyp{etocinnertopsep}}
+\label{etocinnertopsep}
+\label{etocoldpar}
+
+Das für \csb{etocmulticolstyle} notwendige \meta{heading}-Argument kann entweder
+Vertikal-Modus-Material sein wie |\section*{\emph{Inhaltsverzeichnis}}| oder die
+horizontale Variante wie das einfache |\etocmulticolstyle{Hallo Welt}|.
+
+Es kann kein explizites |\par| oder eine Leerzeile in das notwendige Argument
+von \csb{etocmulticolstyle} eingefügt werden, aber \etoc stellt \csb{etocoldpar}
+als Ersatz bereit: Es fügt |\let\etocoldpar\par| vor der |multicols|-Umgebung
+ein und eben dieses |\etocoldpar|\footnote{Dieser Befehl \csa{etocoldpar} (=
+funktionierendes \csa{par} im Argument von \csa{etocmulticolstyle}) ist nicht
+verwandt mit dem Schalter \csb{etocinline}, dessen Zweck es ist \etoc
+mitzuteilen, kein \csa{par} vor dem Inhaltsverzeichnis auszuführen.} am Ende der
+Überschrift ein, und macht dann noch einen vertikalen Sprung der Größe
+\csa{etocinnertopsep}.
+
+Auf der anderen Seite erwarten die Befehle \csb{etocruledstyle} und
+\csb{etocframedstyle} ein Argument im "`LR-Modus"' (um die Terminologie von
+\emph{\LaTeX, a document preparation system} zu nutzen). Das bedeutet, dass
+mehrzeilige Titel nur möglich sind, wenn man sie in etwas wie eine \csa{parbox}
+einschließt.
+
+Eine wichtige Größe verwendet von sowohl \csb{etocmulticolstyle},
+\csb{etocruledstyle} als auch \csb{etocframedstyle} ist \csb{etocinnertopsep}.
+Es gibt an, wieviel Platz zwischen den Überschriften und dem Start des Inhalts
+liegen soll. Der Default-Wert ist |2ex| und man kann es mittels
+|\renewcommand*{\etocinnertopsep}|\marg{neuer\_Wert} ändern, nicht mit
+|\setlength|.
+
+\subsection{Der Kompatibilitätsmodus \csbhyp{etocstandarddisplaystyle}}
+\label{etocstandarddisplaystyle}
+
+\etoc wird dann das emulieren, für was eigentlich die Dokument-Klasse
+verantwortlich ist, in Bezug auf den globalen Display-Stil des
+Inhaltsverzeichnisses. Allen Änderung von innerhalb der Klasse sollten
+berücksichtigt werden.
+
+\subsection{Der Befehl \csbhyp{etoc\-inline}}
+\label{etocinline}
+\label{etocnopar}
+\label{etocdisplay}
+
+Mit \csb{etocinline} oder seinem Synonym |\etocnopar|, von dem
+|\tableofcontents|-Befehl und seinen Varianten werden \emph{nicht} zuerst ein
+|\par| erstellt, um den vorherigen |paragraph| zu schließen. Von daher kann man
+das Inhaltsverzeichnis in einem Inline-Stil darstellen; oder, wenn nur gebraucht
+um eine Token-Liste bzw. ein Makro vorzubereiten, wird es bei der Ausführung
+nichts im Token-Stream hinterlassen.
+
+% JFBU:
+Mit \csb{etocdisplay} werden (nochmal) von dem |\tableofcontents|-Befehl und
+seinen Varianten zuerst ein |\par| erstellt.
+
+\section{Gesternde Varianten des \csbhyp{tableofcontents}  etc. Befehls}
+\label{tableofcontents*}
+\label{localtableofcontents*}
+\label{etocbeforetitlehook}
+\label{etocaftertitlehook}
+\label{etocaftercontentshook}
+\label{etocmemoirtoctotocfmt}
+
+Die Befehle \toc, \localtoc, \csa{etocmulticol} und all ihre Cousins und
+Varianten haben Stern-Varianten (der Stern muss vor den anderen Argumenten
+kommen). Für alle Klassen außer |memoir| verhalten diese sich wie die Originale.
+Für |memoir| jedoch, schreibt das Original einen Eintrag in die |.toc|-Datei,
+genau so wie die Verwendung des echten \toc Befehls in dieser Klasse, während
+aber die Stern-Variante genau das nicht tut, wie es in |memoir| die Regel ist.
+
+Sobald man damit beginnt, lokale Inhaltsverzeichnisse zu benutzen merkt man,
+dass der |memoir|-Standard, welcher dazu gedacht ist, einen |chapter|-Eintrag
+für jedes Inhaltsverzeichnis zu erzeugen, nicht praktisch ist. Der Befehl
+\csb{etocmemoirtoctotocfmt}\marg{Typ}\allowbreak\marg{name} ändert das Format
+(\meta{Typ} ist wieder |chapter|, |section|, |subsection| etc. und \meta{name}
+kann bspw. \csa{contentsname} sein.) Die Standardwerte für diese Größen sind
+|chapter| und |\contentsname|.
+
+Das Format der tatsächlichen Überschrift des Inhaltsverzeichnisses sollte
+ebenfalls ordnungsgemäß gesetzt werden (z.\,B. mit \csa{etoctocstyle}), um
+einfach die selbe Einheitsgröße zu nutzen wie im ersten Argument von
+\csa{etocmemoirtoctotocfmt}.
+
+Eine ungewöhnliche Situation tritt auf, wenn man zwei aufeinanderfolgende
+\csa{localtableofcontents} hat (offensichtlich ist das eine nicht sehr
+wahrscheinliche Situation), direkt nach einem \csa{part} zum Beispiel. Der erste
+würde dann eine Kapitelüberschrift erzeugen (wenn der Standard nicht geändert
+wurde, wie oben angedeutet), welche in die |.toc|-Datei geschrieben werden
+würde. Das zweite Inhaltsverzeichnis denkt dann, es ist ein lokales zu diesem
+Kapitel gehörig und würde aus diesem Grund nichts darstellen. Die Lösung für
+dieses Problem ist es, das zweite als Klon des ersten zu definieren.
+
+Unabhängig von der Situation hat man bei der |memoir|-Klasse immer ein
+Hook-Makro namens \csb{etocaftertitlehook}, welches man unterdrückt, indem man
+die Stern-Varianten der Darstellungsbefehle nutzt. Außer für die |memoir|-Klasse
+ist dieser Hook dazu gedacht, überhaupt nichts zu tun. 
+
+Außerdem gibt es noch \csb{etocaftercontentshook}, ähnlich definiert, um
+nichts zu tun. Es gibt auch \csb{etocbeforetitlehook}: es ist definiert
+um nichts zu tun. Beide können für einige spezielle Effekte genutzt
+werden.
+
+
+\section{Das In\-halts\-ver\-zeic\-hnis von die\-sem Teil}
+
+\subsection{Über\-prü\-fen des Kom\-pa\-tibilitäts\-modus}
+
+Als drittes Beispiel wollen wir nun das Inhaltsverzeichnis dieses Teils setzen.
+Dazu wollen wir zuerst den Kompatibilitätsmodus testen.\footnote{Dieses
+Dokument wurde als |scrartcl| gesetzt. Wir wollen nun testen, ob 
+der Kompatibilitätsmodus des \etoc-Pakets die Anpassungen innerhalb der
+Klassenbefehle umsetzt.} Das ursprüngliche Inhaltsverzeichnis ist
+unsichtbar und wurde am Anfang von \autoref{part:globalcmds} definiert,
+wobei es mit einem Label versehen wurde. 
+\begin{verbatim}
+\KOMAoptions{toc=left}
+\etocstandarddisplaystyle % wird benötigt, damit toc=left gilt
+\etocstandardlines
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{verbatim}
+\KOMAoptions{toc=left}
+\etocstandarddisplaystyle
+\etocstandardlines
+\tableofcontents \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+
+\subsection{Ein In\-halts\-ver\-zeich\-nis mit Rahmen}
+
+Als nächstes wollen wir ein gerahmtes Inhaltsverzeichnis erzeugen, wobei wir den
+vom Paket vorgegebenen Linienstil nutzen und ein paar Farben hinzufügen wollen.
+(Es wurde in eine Float-Umgebung eingefügt, die man \vpageref{toc:b}
+findet.)\footnote{Innerhalb der |figure|-Umgebung und vor dem gerahmten
+Inhaltsverzeichnis, welches die Option |multicols| nutzt, haben wir den Befehl
+\csa{normalcolor} eingefügt, um einen Bug zu umgehen, der durch die Interaktion
+zwischen |multicols|, |color| und der |figure|-Umgebung entsteht. (Wir brauchen
+den Befehl \csa{color\{red\}} in der |.toc|-Datei.) Der Fehler wird nicht durch
+das \etoc-Paket verursacht.} 
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocdefaultlines
+\begingroup 
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{1.5em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{1.5em}
+% Befehle für die Hintergrundfarbe des Inhaltsverzeichnisses
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{yellow!10}}
+% Befehle für die Rechtecke vor und nach dem Inhalt des Verzeichnisses 
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% Befehle für die Rechtecke links und rechts des Inhaltsverzeichnisses
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% mit \fcolorbox legen wir einen farbigen Rahmen für den Titel an
+\fboxrule1pt
+\renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{0pt\relax}
+\etocframedstyle {\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fcolorbox{red}{white}{\parbox{.8\linewidth}{\centering
+      Dies ist das nach \etoc gestaltete Inhaltsverzeichnis, welches 
+      jedoch nur die Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte dieses Teils 
+      enthält. Da es gerahmt ist, darf es nicht größer sein als eine Seite. 
+      Es hat das Label |toc:b|.}}}
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+\normalcolor % Workaround für einen Bug von color und multicols (und figure)
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:b} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{figure}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+\begingroup 
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{1.5em}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{1.5em}
+% specify a background color for the toc contents
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{yellow!10}}
+% set up the top and bottom rules 
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 1pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% set up the left and right rules
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width 5pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{red!25}}
+% use \fcolorbox to set up a colored frame for the title
+\fboxrule1pt
+\renewcommand{\etocbelowtocskip}{-.5\baselineskip\relax}
+\etocframedstyle {\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fcolorbox{red}{white}{\parbox{.8\linewidth}{\centering
+      Dies ist das nach \etoc gestaltete Inhaltsverzeichnis, welches 
+      jedoch nur die Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte dieses Teils 
+      enthält. Da es gerahmt ist, darf es nicht größer sein als eine Seite. 
+      Es hat das Label |toc:b|.}}}
+\begin{figure}[ht!]
+  \centering
+\normalcolor % work-around to a bug involving color and multicols (and figure)
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:b} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{figure}
+\endgroup
+
+% Il y a un color leak du framed mais uniquement lorsqu'il est mis dans le
+% float. 2013/10/13, qui révèle un bug (?? NON) du style framed je vais regarder
+% mais bon. Le leak apparaît avec ruled aussi, et même avec juste multicolstyle
+% MAIS PAS EN UNE SEULE COLONNE (même framed ou ruled). il semble qu'il y aie
+% donc un problème d'interaction avec multicol là. à voir. Pas le temps
+% maintenant.
+
+% 2013/10/14
+% il s'agit en fait d'un bug de color+multicols+figure qui n'a rien à voir avec
+% etoc: 
+% http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/138783/color-leak-from-multicols-within-a-figure
+% J'ai trouvé le work-around qui consiste simplement à ajouter un \normalcolor
+% _avant_ le multicols à l'intérieur de figure
+
+\subsection{Eine (verrückte) In\-line-Dar\-stellung}
+
+Nun wollen wir eine etwas verrückte Inline-Darstellung erzeugen, womit das
+Inhaltsverzeichnis des gesamten Dokuments gesetzt werden soll. Hier werden die
+Unterabschnitte als Fußnoten dargestellt. Diese Art der Darstellung bietet sich
+eher für verlinkte Dokumente an, weniger für gedruckte! (Mir hingegen gefällt
+diese Art der Darstellung, obwohl mein Geschmack scheinbar oft nicht geteilt
+wird.)
+
+%%%% Note: 27 april 2014 
+
+%%%% except for a miraculous situation depending from the quantity of previous
+%%%% material this TOC will have links extending accross pagebreaks, which
+%%%% dvipdfmx does not know how to handle completely. Apart from that the output
+%%%% is ok, thus no need to try seriously to avoid them. 
+
+\begingroup
+\newsavebox{\forsubsections}
+\etocsetstyle{part}{\upshape. \etocskipfirstprefix}{. \upshape}{\bfseries\etocname:~~}{}
+\etocsetstyle{section}{\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }{\mdseries\etocname}{}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+   {\begin{lrbox}{\forsubsections}\upshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+   {; }
+   {\etocname}
+   {\end{lrbox}\footnote{\unhbox\forsubsections.}}
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{ (\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {, }{\etocname}{\/\upshape)}
+\etocsettocstyle{Hier ist das inline dargestellte Inhaltsverzeichnis. }{.\par}
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:crazyinline}
+\endgroup
+
+Zur Erzeugung dieses Inhaltsverzeichnisses wurde folgender Code genutzt:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\newsavebox{\forsubsections}
+\etocsetstyle{part}{\upshape. \etocskipfirstprefix}{. \upshape}
+                      {\bfseries\etocname:~~}{}
+\etocsetstyle{section}{\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }
+                      {\mdseries\etocname}{}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+   {\begin{lrbox}{\forsubsections}\upshape\etocskipfirstprefix}
+   {; }{\etocname}{\end{lrbox}\footnote{\unhbox\forsubsections.}}
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}
+  { (\itshape\etocskipfirstprefix}{, }{\etocname}{\/\upshape)}
+\etocsettocstyle{Hier ist das inline dargestellte Inhaltsverzeichnis. }{.\par}
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {custom}
+
+\part{\etoc nutzen und an\-passen}
+\label{part:custom}
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height2pt depth0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{red}}
+
+\etocruledstyle{\normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\fboxrule1pt\color{red}%
+  \fbox{\parbox{.8\linewidth}{\centering\normalcolor Dies ist das
+      Inhaltsverzeichnis mit den Abschnitten und Unterabschnitten von
+      diesem Teil. Es hat das Label |toc:c|.}}}  
+
+\localtableofcontents \label{toc:c}
+
+\section{Über\-blick über die Grund\-befehle zur Stil\-bearbeitung}
+
+\subsection{Ein lokales Inhalts\-ver\-zeich\-nis an\-passen}
+\hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1em
+\setbox0\hbox{\csa{etocthename}, \csa{etocthenumber}, \csa{etocthepage}, \csa{etoclink}\marg{Name des Links}}%
+\framebox[\linewidth][c]
+{\vbox{\hsize\wd0\normalcolor\noindent
+\csa{etocsetstyle}\marg{Name der Ebene}%
+  \marg{Start}\marg{Präfix}\marg{Inhalt}\marg{Abschluss}\\
+\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber}, \csa{etocpage},
+\csa{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B}\\
+\csa{etocthename}, \csa{etocthenumber}, \csa{etocthepage}, \csa{etoclink}\marg{Name des Links}
+}}}
+
+\subsection{Das Aus\-sehen eines Inhalts\-ver\-zeichnisses an\-passen}
+\medskip
+\hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep 1em
+\setbox0\hbox{\csa{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}\oarg{Ebene}%
+\marg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\marg{Symbol}}%
+\framebox[\linewidth][c]
+{\vbox{\hsize\wd0
+\normalcolor\noindent
+\csa{etocmulticolstyle}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Überschrift}\\
+\csa{etoctocstyle}\oarg{Ebene}\marg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\\
+\csa{etoctocstylewithmarks}\oarg{Ebene}\marg{Anzahl der Spalten}%
+\marg{Titel}\marg{Symbol}\\
+\csa{etoctocstylewithmarksnouc}\oarg{Ebene}\marg{Anzahl der Spalten}%
+\marg{Titel}\marg{Symbol}\\
+\csa{etocruledstyle}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\\
+\csa{etocframedstyle}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\\
+\csa{etocsettocstyle}\marg{vor dem Inhaltsverzeichnis}\marg{nach dem Inhaltsverzeichnis}}}}
+
+\subsection{In\-halts\-ver\-zeich\-nisse dar\-stellen}
+\medskip \hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1em
+  \setbox0\hbox{\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber},
+    \csa{etocpage}, \csa{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B}}%
+  \framebox[\linewidth][c]
+  {\vbox{\hsize\wd0\normalcolor\noindent
+      \toc\\
+      \localtoc\\
+      \csa{etocmulticol}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Überschrift}\\
+      \csa{etoclocalmulticol}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Überschrift}\\
+      \csa{etocruled}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\\
+      \csa{etoclocalruled}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\\
+      \csa{etocframed}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\\
+      \csa{etoclocalframed}\oarg{Anzahl der Spalten}\marg{Titel}\\
+      \hbox{}{\itshape\ttfamily\ \ \ \  und die mit Sternchen versehenen Varianten}
+   }}}
+
+\subsection{Label und Referenzen}
+
+Optional dürfen die Befehle für Label oder Referenzen auf die Befehle, die die
+Darstellung des Inhaltsverzeichnisses realisieren, folgen. Hierbei ist
+unwichtig, ob letztere mit Sternchen versehen sind oder nicht.\par
+
+\medskip \hbox{\color{green}\fboxrule1pt\fboxsep1em
+  \setbox0\hbox{\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber},
+    \csa{etocpage}, \csa{etocifnumbered}\marg{A}\marg{B}}%
+  \framebox[\linewidth][c]
+  {\vbox{\hsize\wd0\normalcolor\noindent
+      \toc \csa{label}|\{toc:here\}|\\ 
+      \toc \csa{ref}|\{toc:far\}| \\
+      \toc \csa{label}|\{toc:here\}| \csa{ref}|\{toc:far\}| \\
+      \localtoc \csa{label}|\{toc:here\}|\\
+      \hbox{}{\itshape\ttfamily\ \ \ \  \ }%
+      \csa{etocmulticol}{\itshape\ttfamily, etc. funktionieren ähnlich}
+   }}}
+
+
+\medskip Ein \csa{ref}-Befehl, der auf einen Befehl zur Erzeugung eines lokalen
+Inhaltsverzeichnisses folgt, hat \emph{keinen} Einfluss auf diesen. Wird ein
+anderes Inhaltsverzeichnis erneut dargestellt, so wird nur dessen Inhalt
+angepasst. Sowohl das Aussehen des Inhaltsverzeichnisses als auch die
+Darstellung seiner Linien orientieren sich an dem, das gerade definiert wurde
+und nicht an dem, von dem der Inhalt übernommen wurde.
+
+\section{Der Linien\-standard des Pakets: \csbhyp{etoc\-defaultlines}}
+\label{etocdefaultlines}
+
+Die Linienstile stammen bereits aus einer frühen Entwicklungsphase des Pakets,
+weswegen sie sich noch sehr an \TeX{} orientieren und dadurch gruselig aussehen.
+Daher bieten sie keinen guten Einstiegspunkt. Oft muss man, will man an dem Stil
+etwas ändern, diesen aus dem Quellcode kopieren und direkt bearbeiten. Trotzdem
+soll in diesem Abschnitt erläutert werden, wie die Schriftarten, die vertikalen
+Abstände, etc. des gewählten Linienstils verändert werden können.
+
+Wurden die vorgegebenen Linienstile nicht durch \csa{etocsetstyle} verändert, so
+kann man sie mit den Befehlen \csa{etocdefaultlines} bzw. \csa{etoctoclines}
+einschalten. Außer, dass der Einzug eines Unterabschnitts etwas kleiner ist als
+der eines Abschnitts, gleichen sich beide Gliederungsebenen. (Wie dieses
+Dokument zeigt, werden Abschnitte in Dokumentklassen, denen der Befehl
+\csa{chapter} fehlt, stets mit einer fettgedruckten Type gesetzt.)
+Unter-Unterabschnitte werden inline, im selben Paragraphen und ohne Nummer oder
+Seitenzahl dargestellt. Dieser Stil wurde für Dokumente, die viele
+Unter-Unterabschnitte enthalten, entwickelt und anschließend mit solchen
+getestet. Für derartige Dokumente sollte ein zweispaltiges Layout verwendet
+werden, da diese Darstellung kompakter ist als jene, die standardmäßig durch
+\LaTeX{} erzeugt wird.\footnote{Außerdem werden dadurch einzelne Teil- bzw.
+  Kapiteleinträge am Ende einer Seite oder einer Spalte vermieden, solange diese
+  weiter untergliedert sind.} Verwendet man hingegen ein einspaltiges Layout und
+enthält der Teil nur wenige Unter-Unterabschnitte, so wird das
+Inhaltsverzeichnis im Vergleich zur mit \LaTeX{} gesetzten Variante etwas in die
+Breite gezogen. Weiterhin wirkt diese Darstellung weniger hierarisch als der
+\LaTeX{}-Standard, da sich die Darstellung von Abschnitten und Unterabschnitten
+kaum unterscheidet. (Dies gilt besonders, wenn die Dokumentklasse den Befehl
+\csa{chapter} erlaubt.)
+
+Da wir für das \hyperref[toc:main]{zentrale Inhaltsverzeichnis}
+|\etocsetlevel{subsection}{3}| gesetzt haben, werden die Unterabschnitte und die
+Unter-Unterabschnitte inline dargestellt.
+
+Im Gegensatz dazu wollen wir nun das zentrale Inhaltsverzeichnis so darstellen,
+als ob wir eine Dokumentklasse genutzt hätten, die den Befehl \csa{chapter}
+erlaubt. Daher werden die Abschnitte im Folgenden als Kapitel und die
+Unterabschnitte als Abschnitte gedruckt, was wir u. a. mit Hilfe des Befehls
+\csa{etocsetlevel} erreichen. Zusätzlich nutzen wir für Abschnitte, welche in
+Wirklichkeit unsere Unterabschnitte sind, statt der fetten Serie einer
+Schriftart die halbfette Variante. Hierfür modifizieren wir den Befehl
+\csa{etocfontone}. Weiterhin nutzen wir einen gepunkteten Einzug, da dieser
+weniger Platz einnimmt als der Paketstandard.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocruledstyle[2]{\normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fbox{\parbox{.6\linewidth}{
+      \leftskip 0pt plus .5fil
+      \rightskip 0pt plus -.5fil
+      \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil 
+  Dies  ist das zentrale zweispaltige Inhaltsverzeichnis, das den
+  Standardlinienstil von \etoc nutzt, wobei die Abschnitte wie Kapitel und die
+  Unterabschnitte wie Abschnitte gesetzt wurden. }}} 
+\etocdefaultlines
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+\begingroup
+\etocsetlevel{section}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{subsection}{1}
+\renewcommand*{\etocfontone}{\normalfont \normalsize}
+\renewcommand*{\etoctoclineleaders}
+        {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to 1ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\etocruledstyle[2]{\normalfont\normalsize\rmfamily\itshape
+  \fbox{\parbox{.6\linewidth}{
+      \leftskip 0pt plus .5fil
+      \rightskip 0pt plus -.5fil
+      \parfillskip 0pt plus 1fil Dies ist das zentrale zweispaltige
+      Inhaltsverzeichnis, das den Standardlinienstil von \etoc nutzt, wobei die
+      Abschnitte wie Kapitel und die Unterabschnitte wie Abschnitte gesetzt
+      wurden. }}}
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{1}
+
+\begingroup
+\etocsetlevel{section}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{subsection}{1}
+\renewcommand*{\etocfontone}{\normalfont \normalsize}
+\renewcommand*{\etoctoclineleaders}
+        {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to 1ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+
+\section{\etoc individuell an\-passen}
+
+\subsection{Den durch \etoc vor\-de\-finierten Linien\-stil individualisieren}
+
+Im Folgenden sollen einfach die wichtigsten Befehle des Pakets aufgelistet werden. Man kann diese
+bequem mittels \csa{renewcommand} anpassen:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand*\etocfontminustwo{\normalfont \LARGE \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfontminusone{\normalfont \large \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfontzero{\normalfont \large \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfontone{\normalfont \normalsize \bfseries}
+\newcommand*\etocfonttwo{\normalfont \normalsize}
+\newcommand*\etocfontthree{\normalfont \footnotesize}
+
+\newcommand*\etocsepminustwo{4ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepminusone{4ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepzero{2.5ex plus .4ex minus .4ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepone{1.5ex plus .3ex minus .3ex}
+\newcommand*\etocseptwo{.5ex plus .1ex minus .1ex}
+\newcommand*\etocsepthree{.25ex plus .05ex minus .05ex}
+
+\newcommand*\etocminustwoleftmargin{1.5em plus 0.5fil}
+\newcommand*\etocminustworightmargin{1.5em plus -0.5fil}
+\newcommand*\etocminusoneleftmargin{1em}
+\newcommand*\etocminusonerightmargin{1em}
+
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadminustwo{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadminusone{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadzero{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadone{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadtwo{1}
+\newcommand*\etocbaselinespreadthree{.9}
+\newcommand*\etoctoclineleaders
+    {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to 2ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\newcommand*\etocabbrevpagename{p.~} % muss der Sprache angepasst werden
+                 % deutsche Nutzer: \renewcommand*\etocabbrevpagename{S.~}
+\newcommand*\etocpartname{\partname}  
+\newcommand*\etocbookname{Book} % muss der Sprache angepasst werden
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Der Standardlinienstil kann innerhalb der \etoc-Umgebung nicht individualisiert
+werden. Wie bereits erwähnt, wird das Paket nach Aufruf des Befehls
+\etocstandardlines kaum verwendet und agiert lediglich auf globaler Ebene,
+sodass die Einträge des Inhaltsverzeichnisses (hoffentlich) so dargestellt
+werden, als ob das Paket \etoc fehlen würde.\footnote{Innerhalb der
+  KOMA-script-Klassen muss der Befehl \csa{etocstandarddisplaystyle} genutzt
+  werden, damit die Option |toc=left| auch für die Linieneinträge gilt.}
+
+Wurde mittels \csa{etocsetlevel} die Tiefe der Gliederung soweit herabgesetzt,
+dass \etoc die Befehle für bestimmte Gliederungsebenen kennt, so wirkt der
+Kompatibilitätsmodus, also \csa{etocstandardlines}, auch auf diese. Dies gilt
+natürlich nur für Gliederungsbefehle, die dem Standard von \LaTeX{} entsprechen
+und die alle Definitionen liefern, welche zum Darstellen von Einträgen im
+Inhaltsverzeichnis benötigt werden. (Es muss ein Makro der Art \csa{l@irgendwas}
+existieren.)
+
+Sobald der Befehl \csa{etocsetstyle} aufgerufen wird, wird zusätzlich der
+Kompatibilitätsmodus ausgeschaltet. Es spielt hierbei keine Rolle, ob der Befehl
+in der Präambel oder im Hauptteil des Dokuments steht.
+
+\subsection{Die Dar\-stellung eines Inhalts\-ver\-zeich\-nisses an\-spassen}
+\label{ssec:customdisplay}
+
+Erneut wollen wir uns darauf beschränken die relevanten Makros aufzulisten, da
+deren Funktion aus ihrem Namen ableitbar ist. Soll die Länge eines Befehls
+verändert werden, so muss der entsprechende Befehl mittels \csa{renewcommand}
+und nicht durch \csa{setlength} verändert werden. Weiterhin erlauben Befehle,
+welche die Farbe verändern, nicht nur die Standardfarben. Will man ihr Verhalten
+ändern, so muss man in der neuen Definition den Befehl \csa{color} aufrufen. Um
+ihre Wirkung zu beenden, muss man sie so neu definieren, dass sie danach nur den
+Befehl \csa{relax} enthalten.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand*\etocabovetocskip{3.5ex plus 1ex minus .2ex} 
+\newcommand*\etocbelowtocskip{3.5ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}
+
+\newcommand*\etoccolumnsep{2em}
+\newcommand*\etocmulticolsep{0ex}
+\newcommand*\etocmulticolpretolerance{-1}
+\newcommand*\etocmulticoltolerance{200}
+\newcommand*\etocdefaultnbcol{2}
+\newcommand*\etocinnertopsep{2ex}
+\newcommand*\etoctoprule{\hrule}
+\newcommand*\etoctoprulecolorcmd{\relax}
+
+% nur für gerahmte Inhaltsverzeichnisse:
+\newcommand*\etocinnerleftsep{2em}
+\newcommand*\etocinnerrightsep{2em}
+\newcommand*\etocinnerbottomsep{3.5ex}
+
+\newcommand*\etocleftrule{\vrule}
+\newcommand*\etocrightrule{\vrule}
+\newcommand*\etocbottomrule{\hrule}
+\newcommand*\etocleftrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+\newcommand*\etocrightrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+\newcommand*\etocbottomrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+
+\newcommand*\etocbkgcolorcmd{\relax}
+
+% Haken
+\newcommand\etocframedmphook{\relax}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Der Befehl \csa{etocframedmphook} ist direkt hinter dem Anfang einer Minipage,
+innerhalb der der Inhalt eines gerahmten Verzeichnisses gesetzt wird, verankert.
+
+Wurden die Farbbefehle, also \csa{...colorcmd}, nicht verändert, so expandieren
+sie lediglich zu \csa{relax}. (Daher muss man für ihre Verwendung nicht die
+Pakete |color| oder |xcolor| einbinden.) Hat man jedoch einen solchen Befehl -
+wie zum Beispiel \csa{etocbkgcolorcmd} - so verändert, dass er nun tatsächlich
+eine Farbe anzeigt, so kann dies nur mittels
+|\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\relax}| aufgehoben werden und nicht durch
+\csa{let}\csa{etocbkgcolorcmd}\csa{relax}.
+
+Wie man an dem Beispiel \centeredline{|\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height
+    1ex}|} erkennen kann, werden die Größen des oberen Rechtecks in den Maßen
+|ex| und |em| angegeben.
+   
+Sobald der Titel während der Befehlsausführung von \csa{etocruledtoc} oder
+\csa{etocframedtoc} gesetzt wurde, nutzt der Paketcode dessen Schriftgröße, um
+die Bedeutung von \glq1ex\grq~zu ermitteln. Natürlich dürfen auch die anderen
+Befehle zur Erzeugung eines Rechtecks Maße annehmen, deren Wert sich nur durch
+eine zugehörige Schriftgröße ergibt. Hierbei dient jedoch die Schrift vor dem
+Inhaltsverzeichnis als Referenz.
+ 
+Wie in \TeX{} üblich, werden sowohl das Rechteck vor als auch das nach dem
+Inhalt des Verzeichnisses durch einfache Einzüge (einer festgelegten Höhe)
+realisiert. Es muss sich hierbei also nicht um echte Rechtecke handeln. Die
+Rechtecke links und rechts vom Inhalt werden hingegen nicht durch (horizontale)
+Einzüge verwirklicht. Sie stellen vielmehr Objekte einer bestimmten Weite dar.
+Daher darf hier \emph{nur} die Syntax von \TeX{}-Befehlen, mit deren Hilfe man
+Rechtecke erzeugt, genutzt werden.
+
+\section{Ein weiteres Bei\-spiel für ein farbiges Inhalts\-verzeichnis}
+\label{ssec:tocclone}
+
+Beim Befehl \csa{etocframedstyle} wird der Titel in der Mitte des oberen Rechtecks positioniert. Dies würde im folgenden Beispiel
+jedoch sehr unschön aussehen, weswegen wir den Titel innerhalb der \meta{start}-Umgebung eines Abschnittbefehls
+platzieren. Hierdurch wird er innerhalb des Rahmens gesetzt.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\definecolor{subsecnum}{RGB}{13,151,225}
+\definecolor{secbackground}{RGB}{0,177,235}
+\definecolor{tocbackground}{RGB}{212,237,252}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 1cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width .5cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerbottomsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand\shiftedwhiterule[2]{%
+    \hbox to \linewidth{\color{white}%
+    \hskip#1\leaders\vrule height1pt\hfil}\nointerlineskip\vskip#2}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\shiftedwhiterule{\leftskip}{6pt}}
+  {\sffamily\footnotesize
+     \leftskip2.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+     \hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+     \color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+     \rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+     \nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+  {}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\shiftedwhiterule{1.5cm}{6pt}}
+  {\sffamily\small
+     \leftskip1.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+     \hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+     \color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+     \rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+     \nointerlineskip\vskip6pt}
+  {}
+
+\newcommand{\coloredstuff}[2]{%
+            \leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parskip0pt
+            \fboxsep0pt % Auch ohne Rahmen nutzt \colorbox den Befehl \fboxsep!
+       \noindent\colorbox{secbackground}
+               {\parbox{\linewidth}{%
+                    \vskip5pt
+                    {\noindent\color{#1}#2\par}\nointerlineskip
+                    \vskip3pt}}%
+       \par\nointerlineskip}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+     {\hfil \hyperref[toc:b]{\bfseries\large Ich bin der Zwilling von 
+            diesem Verzeichnis (Klick mich an!)}\hfil}}
+{\vskip3pt\sffamily\small}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+    {\leftskip1.5cm\rightskip.5cm\parfillskip-\rightskip
+     \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocnumber\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+     \etocname\hfill\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocpage\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+ \vskip6pt }
+{}
+
+\etocframedstyle[1]{}
+\tableofcontents \label{toc:clone} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begingroup
+\definecolor{subsecnum}{RGB}{13,151,225}
+\definecolor{secbackground}{RGB}{0,177,235}
+\definecolor{tocbackground}{RGB}{212,237,252}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocbkgcolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprulecolorcmd}{\color{tocbackground}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocleftrule}{\vrule width 1cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocrightrule}{\vrule width .5cm}
+\renewcommand{\etocbottomrule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+\renewcommand{\etoctoprule}{\hrule height 12pt}
+
+\renewcommand{\etocinnertopsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerbottomsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerleftsep}{0pt}
+\renewcommand{\etocinnerrightsep}{0pt}
+
+\newcommand\shiftedwhiterule[2]{%
+    \hbox to \linewidth{\color{white}%
+    \hskip#1\leaders\vrule height1pt\hfil}\nointerlineskip
+\vskip#2}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{\leftskip}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\footnotesize
+\leftskip2.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+\hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip3pt}
+{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\etocskipfirstprefix}
+{\shiftedwhiterule{1.5cm}{6pt}}
+{\sffamily\small
+\leftskip1.5cm\hangindent1cm\rightskip1cm\noindent
+\hbox to 1cm{\color{subsecnum}\etocnumber\hss}%
+\color{black}\etocname\leaders\hbox to .2cm{\hss.}\hfill
+\rlap{\hbox to 1cm{\hss\etocpage\hskip.2cm}}\par
+\nointerlineskip\vskip6pt}
+{}
+
+\newcommand{\coloredstuff}[2]{%
+            \leftskip0pt\rightskip0pt\parskip0pt
+            \fboxsep0pt % \colorbox uses \fboxsep also when no frame!
+       \noindent\colorbox{secbackground}
+               {\parbox{\linewidth}{%
+                    \vskip5pt
+                    {\noindent\color{#1}#2\par}\nointerlineskip
+                    \vskip3pt}}%
+       \par\nointerlineskip}
+
+% v1.07l on the occasion of traduction into German documentation 
+     % APRIL 26, 2014 Improvement in the section style for better placement of
+     % page number when the section name is more than one line long. Use of
+     % \makebox rather than \hbox, to be more LaTeX like.
+\etocsetstyle{section}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+     {\hfil \hyperref[toc:b]
+            {\bfseries\large Ich bin der Zwilling von diesem 
+                      Verzeichnis (Klick mich an!)}%
+      \hfil}}
+{\vskip3pt\sffamily\small}
+{\coloredstuff{white}
+    {\leftskip1.5cm\rightskip.5cm\parfillskip-\rightskip
+     \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocnumber\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+     \etocname\hfill\makebox[.5cm][r]{\etocpage\hspace{.2cm}}}%
+ \vskip6pt }
+{}
+
+\etocframedstyle[1]{}
+
+\begin{figure}[ht!]\centering
+    \tableofcontents \label{toc:clone} \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{figure}
+\endgroup
+
+Das Inhaltsverzeichnis befindet sich in einer
+\hyperref[toc:clone]{float}-Umgebung, die man \vpageref{toc:clone} findet. Da
+diese Art von Code keine zusätzlichen Pakete verlangt, ist er etwas
+komplexer.\footnote{Zudem zeigt er die Vorliebe des Autors für die
+\TeX{}-Syntax.} Außerdem wurde er in einem früheren Stadium entwickelt und
+seither nicht überarbeitet.
+
+Da Rahmen (welche hier genutzt wurden, um die Hintergrundfarbe zu setzen) nur
+die Hintergrundfarbe innerhalb einer Seite verändern, würde es sich anbieten,
+weitere Pakete einzubinden, mit deren Hilfe man die Hintergrundfarbe über
+mehrere Seiten hinweg verändern kann.
+
+Alle Befehle, welche die Farbe verändern, sind in \etoc zu Beginn so definiert,
+dass sie nichts verändern. Daher kann der Nutzer selbst entscheiden, ob er
+Farben nutzen will oder nicht.
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {tips}
+
+\part{Tipps}
+\label{part:tipsandtricks}
+
+\thispartstats
+
+\etocsettocstyle{}{}
+\etocstandardlines
+\localtableofcontents
+
+\section{\ldots\ und Tricks}
+
+\subsection{Hacken "`framed parboxes"'}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocdefaultlines
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule{\hrule height 2pt depth 2pt}
+\etocruled{\color{green}\fboxrule2pt\fboxsep1ex
+               \fbox{\raisebox{-\fontdimen22\textfont2}
+                    {\color{blue}\parbox{.5\linewidth}
+                       {\normalfont Dieser Text ist vertikal  perfekt zentriert
+               unter Berücksichtigung der \emph{surrounding horizontal rules.}}}}
+\ref{toc:globalcmds}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\etocdefaultlines
+
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule{\hrule height 2pt depth 2pt}
+
+\etocruled{\color{green}\fboxrule2pt\fboxsep1ex
+              \fbox{\raisebox{-\fontdimen22\textfont2}
+                    {\color{blue}\parbox{.5\linewidth}
+                       {\normalfont Dieser Text ist vertikal  perfekt zentriert
+               unter Berücksichtigung der \emph{surrounding horizontal rules.}}}}}
+              \ref{toc:globalcmds}
+
+
+\subsection{Umstellen der Ebenen}
+\label{subsec:interverting}
+
+Lasst uns alle Unterabschnitte zeigen und aufzählen, die in diesem Dokument
+vorkommen (Siehe \autoref{part:surprising} für andere Verwendungen dieser Technik.):  
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{2}
+\begingroup
+\etocsetlevel{part}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{section}{3}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}
+    {\small\begin{enumerate}[itemsep=0pt,label=,leftmargin=0pt]}
+    {\normalfont\bfseries\item}
+    {\roman{enumi}. \mdseries\etocname{} (\etocnumber, p.~\etocpage)}
+    {\end{enumerate}}
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2.75em}
+\renewcommand{\columnseprule}{1pt}
+\etocmulticol[3]{\subsection{Alle Unterabschnitte in diesem Dokument}}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth{2}
+
+\begingroup
+\etocdefaultlines
+\etocstandarddisplaystyle
+\etocsetlevel{book}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{part}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{chapter}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{section}{3}
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{\small
+\begin{enumerate}[itemsep=0pt,label=,leftmargin=0pt]}
+{\normalfont\bfseries\item}
+{\roman{enumi}. \mdseries\etocname{} (\etocnumber, S.~\etocpage)}
+{\end{enumerate}}
+
+\renewcommand{\etoccolumnsep}{2.75em}
+\renewcommand{\columnseprule}{1pt}
+
+%%\etocmarkbothnouc{List of all subsections}
+%% le mark (\markright) est fait par \subsection
+
+\etocmulticol[3]{\subsection{{Alle Unterabschnitte in diesem Dokument}}\label{toc:allsubsections}}
+
+
+\endgroup
+
+\subsection{Sta\-ti\-sti\-ken anzeigen}\label{ssec:statistics}
+
+Jeder Teil dieses Dokuments beginnt mit einem Paragraphen, der sagt, wieviele
+Kapitel und Unterkapitel er hat. Nun, jeder von diesen Paragraphen ist ein
+Inhaltsverzeichnis! Wir haben ein Makro \csa{thispartstats} geschaffen, um dies
+zu tun. Es nutzt "`Speicher"'-Boxen, um die Informationen über die ersten und
+späteren Kapitel und Unterkapitel zu halten. Boxen zu nehmen, ist die einfachste
+Art und Weise |hyperref|-Links für spätere Verwendungen zu kapseln (ob es einer
+ist oder keiner). Allerdings kann man dann nichts an der Schriftart oder Farbe
+ändern (die \TeX -Primitive \csa{setbox} eher nehmend als von \LaTeX{}
+\csa{sbox} würde die Farbe Farbe um das ohne Boxen gespeicherte Feld verändern).
+Wenn eine solche Notwendigkeit entsteht, muss man von der Boxenverwendung zum
+Makro nehmen wechseln und die |hyperref|-Daten für später speichern, wie im oben
+im Code von \autoref{ssec:molecule} vorgestellt. Wir präsentieren auch diese
+zweite Methode.
+
+Aber als Erstes der Code von \csa{thispartstats}:\par
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newsavebox\firstnamei  \newsavebox\firstnumberi
+\newsavebox\lastnamei   \newsavebox\lastnumberi
+\newsavebox\firstnameii \newsavebox\firstnumberii
+\newsavebox\lastnameii  \newsavebox\lastnumberii
+\newcounter{mycounti}   \newcounter{mycountii}
+\newcommand*{\thispartstatsauxi}{} \newcommand*{\thispartstatsauxii}{}
+\newcommand*{\oldtocdepth}{}
+\newcommand*{\thispartstats}{%
+  \setcounter{mycounti}{0}%
+  \setcounter{mycountii}{0}%
+  \def\thispartstatsauxi{%
+         \sbox{\firstnamei}{\etocname}%
+         \sbox{\firstnumberi}{\etocnumber}%
+         \def\thispartstatsauxi{}}%
+  \def\thispartstatsauxii{%
+         \sbox{\firstnameii}{\etocname}%
+         \sbox{\firstnumberii}{\etocnumber}%
+         \def\thispartstatsauxii{}}%
+  \begingroup
+  \etocsetstyle{subsection} {} {}
+    {\thispartstatsauxii
+     \stepcounter{mycountii}%
+     \sbox{\lastnameii}{\etocname}%
+     \sbox{\lastnumberii}{\etocnumber}} {}%
+  \etocsetstyle{section}
+    {}
+    {}
+    {\thispartstatsauxi
+     \stepcounter{mycounti}%
+     \sbox{\lastnamei}{\etocname}%
+     \sbox{\lastnumberi}{\etocnumber}}
+% Hier wird ein Befehl definiert, der fuer jedes Teil ein paar Fakten sammelt
+% und ausgibt. 
+    {Zu Beginn wollen wir ein paar Fakten zu diesem Teil nennen. Er enthält
+     \arabic{mycounti} Abschnitt\ifnum\value{mycounti}>1 e\fi{} und 
+      \arabic{mycountii} Unterabschnitt\ifnum\value{mycountii}>1 e\fi. Der Name des ersten 
+      Abschnitts lautet
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnamei{}\grqq~und er hat die Gliederungsnummer 
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnumberi\grqq. Der Name des letzten Abschnitts lautet 
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnamei{}\grqq~und er hat die Nummer
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnumberi\grqq. 
+     \ifnum\value{mycountii}>0  Der erste 
+     Unterabschnitt heißt 
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnameii{}\grqq~und er hat die Nummer 
+     \glqq\unhbox\firstnumberii\grqq. Der Name des letzten Unterabschnitts ist 
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnameii{}\grqq~und dessen Nummer ist
+     \glqq\unhbox\lastnumberii\grqq.\fi }% 
+  \etocinline
+  \etocsettocstyle {}{}
+  \etocsetnexttocdepth{2}%
+  \localtableofcontents  % to be used at the top level of a Part.
+  \endgroup
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Und nun, die Variante mit Makros anstelle von der mit Boxen (diese Variante
+steht hier für die Verwendung in einem Kapitel).
+\begin{verbatim}
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand*\firstsubname   {}  \newcommand*\lastsubname    {}
+\newcommand*\firstsubnumber {}  \newcommand*\lastsubnumber  {}
+\newcommand*\thisspecialstatsaux{}
+\newcommand*{\thisspecialstats}{%
+  \setcounter{mycounti}{0}%
+  \def\thisspecialstatsaux{%
+         \let\firstsubname\etocthelinkedname
+         \let\firstsubnumber\etocthelinkednumber
+         \def\thisspecialstatsaux{}}
+  \begingroup
+  \etocsetstyle{subsection} 
+    {} 
+    {}
+    {\thisspecialstatsaux
+     \stepcounter{mycounti}%
+     \let\lastsubname\etocthelinkedname
+     \let\lastsubnumber\etocthelinkednumber }
+    {Zu Beginn wollen wir ein paar Fakten zu diesem Teil nennen. Er enthält
+     \arabic{mycounti} Unterabschnitt\ifnum\value{mycounti}>1 e\fi{}. Der Name des ersten 
+      Abschnitts lautet\emph{\firstsubname{}} und er hat die Gliederungsnummer 
+      {\firstsubnumber}. Der Name des letzten Unterabschnitts lautet 
+      \emph{\lastsubname{}} und er hat die Nummer{\lastsubnumber}.}
+   \etocsettocstyle {}{}
+   \etocinline
+   \etocsetnexttocdepth {1}%
+   \localtableofcontents % to be used within a section
+  \endgroup
+}
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Tiefe Tags nehmen}
+\label{ssec:tocwithdepthtags}
+
+Wir wollen ein TOC, das für jeden |\part| eine Überschrift hat (außer der letzte
+Teil mit dem Quellcode, wofür beschließen, ihn nicht einzubeziehen), und wir
+wollen \autoref{part:globalcmds} öffnen für die Paragraphen. Um dies zu
+erreichen, fügen wir zu dieser Quelle verschiedene
+\csb{etocdepthtag.toc}-Befehle und es bleibt jetzt, zu setzen die Levels für
+jeden Tag mit \csb{etocsettagdepth} (dies wurde oben in diesem Dokument
+verwendet in \autoref{sec:secondexample}, in einer Gruppe, damit es keine
+Auswirkungen auf andere Inhaltsverzeichnisse hat).
+
+Allerdings sind die Linienstile des Pakets nicht in der Lage Paragraphen
+anzuzeigen und die Standardlinienstile der Dokumentklasse geben zu viel
+vertikalen Abstand (in diesem Zusammenhang) bei der Anzeige einer
+Teilüberschrift im TOC aus.Deshalb kochen wir unseren eigenen, schnell
+entwickelten Linienstil, in der Art von \autoref{sec:firstexample} (aber auf dem
+Weg Seitenzahlen von rechts, was mehr wie eine Methode von \LaTeX2e's
+|\@dottedtocline| ist; und mehrzeilige Überschriften lassen nun den Bereich
+unter den Zahlen leer, im Gegensatz zu dem Code von \autoref{sec:firstexample}).
+Und nach ein paar Minuten für die Wahl der Längen (jetzt ist das erstmal getan,
+es kann leicht recycelt) erhalten wir:
+
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {all}
+\begingroup
+\parindent 0pt
+\leftskip 0cm
+\rightskip 0.75cm
+\parfillskip -\rightskip
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMargin}
+    {\nobreak\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par}
+\renewcommand*\etoctoclineleaders
+    {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+    {\nobreak\leaders\etoctoclineleaders\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par }
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\large\llap{\makebox[1cm][r]{\etocnumber\ \ }}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMargin\smallskip}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.75cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[.75cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 2.75cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 4cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.25cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {paragraph}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 5.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.5cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{part}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {paragraph}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule {\hrule height 3pt\relax }
+\renewcommand\etoctoprulecolorcmd {\color{blue}}
+\renewcommand\etocaftercontentshook 
+   {\medskip\begingroup \color{blue}\hrule height 3pt \endgroup }
+\etocruledstyle [1]{\Large\bfseries 
+                    \fbox{\makebox[8cm]{Ein TOC -- nehmend tiefe Tags}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\etocsetnexttocdepth {all}
+\begingroup 
+\parindent 0pt \leftskip 0cm \rightskip .75cm \parfillskip -\rightskip
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMargin}
+    {\nobreak\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par}
+\renewcommand*\etoctoclineleaders
+    {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hbox to .75ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\newcommand*{\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+    {\nobreak\leaders\etoctoclineleaders\hfill
+     \nobreak\makebox[0.75cm][r]{\mdseries\normalsize\etocpage}%
+     \par }
+\etocsetstyle {part}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\large\llap{\makebox[1cm][r]{\etocnumber\ \ }}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMargin\smallskip}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {section}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 1.75cm\relax}
+              {\bfseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[.75cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 2.75cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {subsubsection}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 4cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.25cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsetstyle {paragraph}
+              {}
+              {\leavevmode\leftskip 5.5cm\relax }
+              {\mdseries\normalsize\llap{\makebox[1.5cm][l]{\etocnumber}}%
+               \etocname\EndParWithPagenoInMarginAndLeaders}
+              {}
+\etocsettagdepth {preamble}   {none}
+\etocsettagdepth {overview}   {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {arbitrarily}{part}
+\etocsettagdepth {surprising} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {linestyles} {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {globalcmds} {paragraph}
+\etocsettagdepth {custom}     {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {tips}       {part}
+\etocsettagdepth {code}       {none}
+\renewcommand\etoctoprule {\hrule height 3pt\relax }
+\renewcommand\etoctoprulecolorcmd {\color{blue}}
+\renewcommand\etocaftercontentshook 
+   {\medskip\begingroup \color{blue}\hrule height 3pt \endgroup }
+\etocruledstyle [1]{\Large\bfseries 
+                    \fbox{\makebox[8cm]{A TOC using depth tags}}}
+\sloppy
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+\endgroup
+
+\subsection{Das TOC als eine Tabelle setzend (die alte Weise)}
+\label{ssec:tocastableold}
+
+%%% ALT TEXT:
+% Tabellenzellen erstellen Gruppen; Definitionen von |\etocname|, |\etocnumber|,
+% |\etocpage| sind lokal gemacht, also wenn die erste Zelle einer Zeile ist, wo
+% die |.toc|-Dateizeile gelesen wird und|\etocname| und |\etocnumber| definiert
+% wird, werden diese Definitionen nach dem Tabularzeichen |&|
+% verloren gehen. Der 
+% Quellcode von \etoc beginnt, die "`Anfangs"'- und "`End"'teile der Linienstile
+% zu öffnen oder Gruppen zu schließen, durch ein |&| beispielsweise im
+% "`Präfix"'-Teil des Linienstils ist nicht zu erwarten.
+
+% Weiterhin, ähnlich sieht die Sache der Neudefinition von |\contentsline|, made
+% by \etoc , aus, jedesmal wird ein TOC gesetzt. Es wird nach dem
+% ersten Argument 
+% getan, wenn \csb{etocsettocstyle} ausgeführt wurde, weil, wenn dieses Argument
+% eine Tabelle öffnet, die |etoc|-Neudefintion der |\contentsline| in die erste
+% Zelle der ersten Zeile getan werden will und danach verloren geht.
+
+% So, mit dem Öffnen und Schließen mit |\etocsettocstyle| und dem
+% Nehmen von |&| | 
+% und | innerhalb eines Level-Stils, kann man nicht direkt ein TOC
+% in eine Tabelle 
+% setzen.
+
+% Der \etoc -Quellcode könnte geändert werden, zu machen Modifizierungen von
+% einigen relevanten globalen Definitionen, aber ich habe mich dagegen
+% entschieden. Setzen als eine |tabular| (oder später als |longtable|) wird nur
+% fortgeschrittene Anwendern gesucht und fortgeschrittene Anwender können die
+% Technik einsetzen, die in \autoref{tocastree} erklärt wurden. Hier ist ein
+% Beispiel mit einem vollverlinkten Inhaltsverzeichnis. Der Code kommt nach der
+% Tabelle.
+
+
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+Due to, among other things, the fact that alignment cells create and close
+groups, and that by default definitions of \csb{etocname}, \csb{etocnumber},
+\csb{etocpage} made by \etoc are local, it was not easy to typeset a TOC as
+table with \etoc, prior to release |1.08|. 
+
+Not only \csb{etocname} etc... caused a problem, but also the basic
+redefinition of \csa{contentsline} was made by \etoc only after the
+first argument to \csb{etocsettocstyle} had been executed, hence if this
+argument were to open a tabular, the \etoc redefinition of
+\csa{contentsline} would be done in the first cell of the first row and
+get lost thereafter.
+
+Thus one had to resort to the technique explained in \autoref{tocastree}
+of using the execution of \csa{tableofcontents} as a way to store data
+which was then displayed later.
+
+For the record, here is how the TOC from \autoref{sec:tocastable} was
+coded in the old days. We don't have here the problems with the
+positioning of |\hline|'s we face with the newer method; on the other
+hand we must manipulate token registers which are not familiar to most
+\LaTeX{} users (macros could be used, but would be more cumbersome,
+except perhaps if using the \eTeX{} \csa{unexpanded}).
+
+The method here is the most powerful because it filters out of the
+|.toc| file only the data we want (the other things are not ignored,
+they are executed but hopefully do not create havoc; typically they are
+language changing instructions, or updates to certain counters, etc...),
+and we are less susceptible to fall potential victims of various
+external macros inserted in the |.toc| file by other packages.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtoks\toctabletok
+\newcommand*\appendtotok[2]{% #1=toks variable, #2=macro, expands once #2
+  #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter {\expandafter\the\expandafter #1#2}}
+
+\newcommand*\PreparePart{%
+  \toks0 \expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \toks2 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedname}%
+  \toks4 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedpage}%
+  \edef\toctablepiece {\noexpand\hline
+                      \noexpand\strut\the\toks0 &\noexpand\bfseries\the\toks2 
+                                 &\the\toks4 \noexpand\\\noexpand\hline}% 
+}
+\newcommand*\PrepareSection{%
+  \toks0 \expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \toks2 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedname}%
+  \toks4 \expandafter{\etocthelinkedpage}%
+  \edef\toctablepiece {\the\toks0 &\the\toks2 &\the\toks4 \noexpand\\}% 
+}
+% new version for 1.07k, 2014/03/06
+\newcommand*{\PrepareSubsection}{%
+  \toks0 \expandafter{\etocthelinkednumber}%
+  \toks2 \expandafter{\expandafter\itshape\etocthelinkedname\strut}%
+  \toks4 \expandafter{\expandafter\itshape\etocthelinkedpage}%
+  \edef\toctablepiece{&\noexpand\makebox[1cm][c]{\the\toks0}%
+                      \noexpand\parbox[t]{\dimexpr6cm-\tabcolsep\relax}
+                                         {\noexpand\sloppy\the\toks2}%
+                      &\the\toks4 \noexpand\\}%
+}
+
+\begingroup
+\etocsetstyle{part}{}{}{\PreparePart \appendtotok\toctabletok\toctablepiece}{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{section}{}{}{\PrepareSection \appendtotok\toctabletok\toctablepiece}{}
+
+\etocsetstyle{subsection}{}{}{\PrepareSubsection\appendtotok\toctabletok\toctablepiece}{}
+
+\etocsettocstyle
+    {\toctabletok{\hypersetup{hidelinks}%
+                 \begin{longtable}{|>{\bfseries}c|p{7cm}|r|}\hline
+                 \multicolumn{3}{|c|}{\Large\bfseries\strut TABLE OF CONTENTS}%
+                 \\\hline\hline}}
+    {\global\toctabletok\expandafter{\the\toctabletok\hline\end{longtable}}}
+\etocsettocdepth {subsection}
+\tableofcontents
+\the\toctabletok
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Kompatibilität mit anderen Paketen}
+\label{etocaftertochook}
+
+% JFBU modifiziert Januar 23, 2015
+Die Inhalte der |.toc|-Datei (falls bereits vorhanden) werden einmal in den
+Speicher von \etoc getan, bei |\begin{document}|. \footnote{Neu mit |1.07m|.
+    Früherer Versionen benutzten die |.toc|-Datei bei
+    \csa{usepackage\{etoc\}}. Danke an Denis Bitouzé für ein Babel-etoc
+    Problem entdecken zu haben.} 
+
+\begin{framed}
+  Man sollte \etoc \emph{nach} \texttt{babel} laden.
+\end{framed}
+
+  Die |.toc|-Datei bleibt für andere Pakete nutzbar für
+  Lesevorgänge bis zum Ort des ersten Inhaltsverzeichnisses, zu diesem
+  Zeitpunkt wird ein Schreib-stream durch \etoc geöffnet und von diesem Punkt
+  aus wird die Datei gelöscht bis ihr Inhalt wieder auf die Platte von
+  \LaTeX{} am Ende der Kompilierung geschrieben wurde.
+
+\etoc lädt das Paket |multicol|. 
+
+\etoc erwartet die Sektionierungseinheiten des Dokuments, um ihre Daten in eine
+Datei mit der Endung |.toc| zu schreiben, in Form von Linien, die enthalten den
+\csa{contentsline}-Befehl und dessen Argumente. 
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+  \etoc requires the |.toc| file to use the |\contentsline| macro (possibly
+  patched by other packages). It is thus incompatible with the |beamer| class.
+  However, if |beamer| is used in an article mode, i.e., with the article
+  class in conjunction with the |beamerarticle| package, then \etoc should
+  work.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+Es ist |hyperref| bekannt und hoffentlich kompatibel mit ihm: die Macros
+\csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber} und \csa{etocpage} enthalten die
+|hyperref|-Links, wenn vorhanden (Beachten Sie, dass die
+\emph{linktoc=all}-Option von |hyperref| mitteilt, dass ein Link zur
+Seitenzahl zu setzen ist, für ein einen toc-Eintrag.). Beispielsweise sind die
+Inhaltsverzeichnisse des vorliegenden Dokuments komplett verlinkt.
+Es ist kein Thema, ob \etoc vor oder nach |hyperref| geladen wird.
+
+Die Release |1.07k| fügt Kompatibilität mit dem Paket |tocloft| hinzu:
+\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tocloft}} Schritte wurden getan, um eine Neudefinition
+von |\tableofcontents| zu vermeiden, getan von |tocloft| an  |\begin{document}|.
+%
+
+Solange \etoc ungeschickt ist im Kompatibilitätsmodus, wird von |tocloft| die
+Anpassung sowohl für den Lin ienstil als auch den TOC-Titel getan. Man kann
+immer noch von den \emph{tiefen Tags}-Management mit \etoc profitieren, von
+seinem |\localtableofcontents|, von seinem |\label+\ref|-Mechanismus. Man kann
+|\etocsetstyle| nehmen, um mit \etoc das Layout des TOC zu definieren und dann
+eher |tocloft| für etwas anderes, wenn auf |\tableofcontents| folgen
+\csb{etocstandardlines} und \csb{etocstandarddisplaystyle}. In diesem
+Kompatibiltätsmodus |\etocsetlevel{division unit}{6}| wird die gewählte
+Bereichsebene gerendert, aber der Austausch von Ebenen ist andererseits nicht
+möglich.
+\begin{framed}
+  Man sollte \etoc \emph{nach} \texttt{tocloft} laden. Sonst wird eine Warnung
+  ausgegeben.
+\end{framed}
+
+Die Release |1.07l| hat ebenfalls die Kompatibilität mit der |memoir|-Klasse
+verbessert: Seine |appendix|-Ebene kann mit \etoc gemacht werden. Es ist die
+gleiche Ebene wie wie bei |chapter|, also der Kapitelebenstil kann eventuell ein
+Test für einige boolesche-Ausdrücke sein, die aktiviert sein können via einer
+Instruktion an die |.toc|-Datei aufgenommen werden, wenn man zwei Arten von
+Unterteilungen unterscheidet.
+
+\etoc kann nicht wirklich mit Paketen zusammensein, die
+\csa{tableofcontents}-Befehle ändern: Eine Art Waffenstilstand kann erreicht
+werden, wenn \etoc zuletzt geladen wird, daher ist es der Gewinner.
+  \begin{framed}
+    Ändern Sie nicht den |\tableofcontents|-Befehl, wie diesen folgenden:
+    \centeredline{|\let\oldtableofcontents\tableofcontents|,}
+    \centeredline{|\renewcommand\tableofcontents{\oldtableofcontents\mystuff}|,}
+    da dies den |\label/\ref|-Mechanismus unmöglich macht. Sie können vielmehr
+    \centeredline{|\renewcommand\etocaftertochook{\mystuff}|} ausführen und es
+    ergibt auch \csb{etocaftercontentshook}, das führt ein bisschen eher
+    \footnotemark{} aus, gerade vor dem Schließen des Teils vom toc-Anzeigestil
+    (und damit innerhalb einer Gruppe).
+   \end{framed}
+\footnotetext{Im Gegensatz zu \csa{etocaftertochook},
+     \csa{etocaftercontentshook} wird nicht ausgeführt, wenn |tocdepth| das
+     Drucken des TOC nicht ermöglicht.}
+
+\etoc zu verwenden, kann unvereinbar sein mit dem Paket
+|tocvsec2|\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tocvsec2}}; jetzt lebt es ,
+sortierend, wie es deaktiviert die Modifikationen des |\tableofcontents| durch
+|tocvsec2| (getan im Stile von oben) und es kanzelt auch andere |toc|-bezogene
+Macros, aber es reimplantiert partiell ihre Funktionalität mit
+\csb{etocsettocdepth.toc}. In der Art und Weise, die letzten beiden \LaTeX-Läufe
+sind für das erneute Nehmen des Befehls in einem Dokument notwendig, um einen
+Effekt im Inhaltsverzeichnis zu haben.
+  
+Wenn ein \localtoc durch den Nutzer in das Dokument aufgenommen wird, eine
+Zeile, in einen inneren \etoc-Befehl und eine Identifikationszahl in die
+|.toc|-Datei aufgenommen wird. Das korrekte Inhaltsverzeichnis wird nur nach dem
+nächsten \LaTeX -Lauf angezeigt werden.
+
+Es ist möglich (unter Verwendung des Pakets|tocloft| beispielsweise), im
+gesamten Dokument die Makros \csa{l@section}, \csa{l@subsection} \ldots{} zu
+benutzen und der Effekt wird im nächsten Inhaltsverzeichnis durch den
+Kompatibilitätsmodus von \etoc sichtbar werden.
+
+\textbf{UEBERSETZUNG NOETIG}
+
+\begin{otherlanguage}{english}
+It is possible to use simultaneously \etoc and
+{\color{niceone}|tableof|}\footnote{\url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tableof}}. Release
+|1.08| of \etoc requires at least version |1.4a| of |tableof|. If
+\csb{etocglobaldefs} is put in the preamble, this must be after the loading of
+package |tableof|. {\color{niceone}|tableof|} command \csa{nexttocwithtags}
+should work as expected. 
+
+{\color{niceone}|tableof|} commands \csa{tableof}, \csa{tablenotof}, ... will
+typeset the (a priori global) table of contents according to the document
+class defaults, obeying the \etoc depth tags; as explained in the |tableof|
+documentation they do not typeset a TOC title. They should \emph{not} be used
+in case \csb{etocglobaldefs} was issued before, except if its scope has been
+terminated since then, or \csb{etoclocaldefs} has cancelled its influence.
+\end{otherlanguage}
+
+\subsection{\TeX -nische Sachen}
+
+Die \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber}, \csa{etocpage} Befehle sind gegen
+vorzeitige Expansion geschützt. Sie enthalten geeignete |hyperref|-Links, wenn
+das Paket |hyperref| geladen und aktiviert für das TOC ist. Die Befehle
+\csa{etoclink} und \csa{etocifnumbered} sind auch gegen vorzeige Expansion
+geschützt.
+
+Andererseits \csa{etocthename}, \csa{etocthenumber}, \csa{etocthepage}, haben
+keine Anbindung an |hyperref|-Links und sind nicht gegen Expansionen geschützt.
+
+Befehle wie \csa{etocsetstyle}, \csa{etocsetlevel}, \csa{etocsettocstyle},
+\csa{etocmulticolstyle}, \csa{etocruledstyle}, \csa{etocframedstyle} folgen
+Gruppierungen von \LaTeX. Alle TOCs werden in Gruppierungen gesetzt.
+
+\subsection{Fehler und Katastrophen}
+
+Nach der Verwendung von \csa{etocsetstyle}für eine Ebene nehmen die restlichen,
+nicht angepassten Ebenen die Standardstile von \etoc (diejenigen, die aktiviert
+werden von \csa{etocdefaultlines}). Man muss sicherstellen, dass alle Ebenen,
+die für das nächste Inhaltsverzeichnis gebraucht werden, miteinander kompatibel
+sind: Insbesonders, dass die Standardlinienstile jeweils im "`vertikalen Modus"'
+gestartet werden.
+
+Wenn man mehrere \toc-Befehle in einem Dokument verwendet, sollte man sich
+hüten, mehrere Satzanweisungen in der |.toc|-Datei zu addieren, so sie mit \toc
+ausgeführt für alle TOCs ausgeführt werden: Auch für \localtoc spielt es keine
+Rolle, ob die Anweisungen Material außerhalb des Anwendungbereichs betreffen,
+sie werden sie trotzdem erhalten. Falls unbedingt erforderlich (aber es das
+sollte es nie) müssen dies Instruktionen so sein, dass einfach aktiviert oder
+deaktiviert werden von der Dokumentquelle, wie es sein muss.
+
+So wie es üblich ist bei TOCs und Labels, muss nach jeder Änderung \LaTeX{} eine
+bestimmte Anzahl von Durchführungen haben, um für das Dokument das endgültige
+Aussehen zu erhalten (mindestens zweimal durchlaufen).
+
+
+
+\clearpage
+\etocdepthtag.toc {code}
+
+\part{Der Code}
+
+\section{Zeitstempel}
+
+Dies ist die deutsche Dokumentation von \texttt{\etocDEdocdate}, erzeugt von der
+Quelldatei mit dem Stempel \texttt{\etocdtxtimestamp}. Die dokumentierte
+Paketversion ist \texttt{\etocDEpkgversion} von \texttt{\etocDEpkgdate}.
+
+% STOP GERMAN (DEUTSCH) VERSION
+
+^^Afi
+
+^^Acatcode92 0
+
+\catcode1 13
+
+\begingroup
+\renewcommand\lowast{{\normalsize\raisebox{-.4\height}{*}}}
+\small
+
+\ifnum\ForEnglish=1
+    \section{Change history}
+\fi
+
+\ifnum\ForDeutsch=1
+    \section{Änderungen}
+\fi
+
+\selectlanguage{english}
+
+\setlength{\columnsep}{\etoccolumnsep}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+% 27 avril 2014 un petit hack pour hyphénation (éventuelle) en allemand
+% j'ai déjà ~ qui sera de catcode 0, cependant il faudrait aussi les accolades,
+% donc finalement pour aller vite, je rends le + actif. Je modifie aussi le test
+% fait par \jfverbaspace (n'ayant pas commenté mon code, j'ai dû réfléchir pour
+% me rappeler à peu près ce que c'était censé faire).
+
+\def\jfverbatim{\@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty 
+  \parindent \z@ 
+  \parfillskip \@flushglue 
+  \parskip \tw@\p@ plus 1fil\relax
+  \let \do \@makeother \dospecials \makestarlowast \catcode`+ \active
+  \begingroup\lccode`~`+
+  \lowercase{\endgroup\def~[##1]{\foreignlanguage{ngerman}{##1}}}%
+  \catcode`^ \active
+  \begingroup\lccode`~`^
+  \lowercase{\endgroup\def~{\nopagebreak}}% ajouté 2014/04/28, oblige à un peu
+                                % plus de mark-up cependant
+  \catcode`\~\z@ 
+  \footnotesize\normalfont\baselineskip10pt\relax
+  \frenchspacing \obeyspaces \jf@xverbatim }
+
+\begingroup 
+\catcode `|=0 \catcode `[= 1 \catcode`]=2 
+\catcode `\{=12 \catcode `\}=12 \catcode`\\=12 
+|long|gdef|jf@xverbatim#1\end{jfverbatim}[#1|end[jfverbatim]]
+|endgroup
+
+\def\endjfverbatim{} 
+
+\newdimen\jfverbadim
+
+\everypar{\leftskip\jfverbadim\bgroup
+          \def\par{\egroup\jfverbadim\z@\@@par}%
+          \def\jfverbaspace#1{\if\@sptoken\string#1\unskip\else\ \fi#1}}
+
+\begingroup\obeyspaces\def\x{\endgroup%
+\def {\ifvmode\advance\jfverbadim.5em\relax\else\expandafter\jfverbaspace\fi}}\x
+
+\makeatother
+
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+\begin{jfverbatim}
+v1.08 [2015/03/10]^
+
+   \etocskipfirstprefix may now appear anywhere in the <start>
+   part of a level style. 
+
+   New commands \etociffirst, \etocxiffirst, \etocxifnumbered.
+
+   It is now possible to issue line style specifications directly
+   with & and \\ tokens, in order to typeset a TOC as a tabular
+   or longtable with the opening for example in the first
+   argument of \etocsettocstyle and the closing in its second
+   argument.
+
+   It is mandatory for such uses to issue \etocglobaldefs which
+   tells etoc to proceed globally for certain definitions. This
+   is also useful in the context of the inline environments of
+   package enumitem.
+
+   On this occasion, various old parts of the code have been
+   improved.
+
+
+v1.07n [2015/03/05]^
+
+   No more use of \toks@ when etoc constructs \etocthelinkedname
+   etc... Thus \toks@ can be put in the line styles in order to
+   accumulate information. Only useful if it is certain nothing
+   else will change \toks@ either.
+
+   In the documentation: list of main commands now in alphabetic
+   order.
+
+
+v1.07m [2015/01/23]^
+
+   Reading of .toc file is delayed to \begin{document} to account for
+   possible Babel active characters used therein. Thanks to Denis
+   Bitouzé who reported a Babel related problem.
+
+   Improved global toc display emulation under KOMA-script classes.
+
+   New command \etocbeforetitlehook. New command \etocdisplay.
+
+
+v1.07l [doc of 2014/04/29]^
+
+   Added to the documentation an example of use of \etocthelinkedname together
+   with an enumitem inline itemize* environment; moved main TOC to immediately
+   after the title, and license to the first pages.
+
+   Incorporation of the translation into German done on the initiative of
+   +[Christine Römer] by +[Felix Baral-Weber, Jenny Rothkrämer-Vogt, Daniel
+   Büttner, Claudia Dahl, Christian Otto and Christine Römer (FSU Jena).] My
+   grateful thanks to all!
+
+
+v1.07l [2014/04/22]^
+
+   Fixes a bug with the 1.07k compatibility layer with tocloft which had broken
+   the 1.07k (sic) compatibility with memoir (yes, memoir class 1.07k testing
+   had been done before adding the tocloft thing to the source code . . . ).
+   Also, etoc when detecting tocvsec2 now checks if this is under the memoir
+   class, as then nothing special needs to be done to rescue \tableofcontents,
+   contrarily to the situation with the native tocvsec2. 
+
+
+v1.07k [2014/03/06]^
+
+   Compatibility with package tocloft; and improved compatibility with
+   class memoir. Novel TOC example in Overview.
+
+
+v1.07j [2013/12/03]^
+
+   Some issues with the documentation formatting (now two-sided) have been
+   addressed, and a novel documentation section ``Typesetting the TOC as a
+   table'' has been added. Very minor code change (\Etoc@readtoc).
+
+
+v1.07i [2013/10/21]^
+
+   Changes to the \etocmulticolstyle and \etocruledstyle codes 
+   to lessen the risk of a page break after the title (in the one-column case).
+
+
+v1.07h [2013/10/16]^
+
+   New commands \etocdepthtag.toc, \etocsettagdepth, \etocobeydepthtags,
+   \etocignoredepthtags. 
+
+
+v1.07g [2013/10/13]^
+
+   New commands \etocsettocdepth, \etocsettocdepth.toc,
+   \etocobeytoctocdepth, \etoc~-ignoretoctocdepth which
+   emulate part of tocvsec2 functionality ; measures to
+   make tocvsec2 partially compatible with etoc.
+
+   New commands \etocsetnexttocdepth, \invisibletableofcontents,
+   \invisiblelocaltableofcontents.
+
+   Switched from tikz-qtree to forest for the first `toc as
+   tree' example. 
+
+   Command names are linked to their descriptions, and many
+   other changes in the documentation.
+
+   Removed printing of temporary message when the local toc
+   id is not yet stabilized; indeed \localtableofcontents
+   can have many uses, such as filling up some token list
+   register and one may wish to not have anything typeset, 
+   even in an intermediate run. 
+
+   All of tex etoc.dtx, etex etoc.dtx, xetex etoc.dtx, latex
+   etoc.dtx, pdflatex etoc.dtx are now possible, and the
+   extracted file etoc.tex allows easy customization of
+   compilation options for the documentation (default is via
+   dvipdfmx which produces the smallest file).
+
+
+v1.07f [2013/03/07]^
+
+   New macros \etocthelinkedname, \etocthelinkednumber,
+   \etocthelinkedpage, and \etocthelink.
+
+
+v1.07e [2013/03/01]^
+
+   Improvements in the package own line styles with
+   regards to penalties and vertical spaces. 
+
+   Addition to the documentation of an example of
+   a tree-like table of contents (uses tikz).
+
+   More such examples added 2013/03/03.
+
+
+v1.07d [2013/02/24]^
+
+   Minor code improvements and new documentation 
+   section ``Another compatibility mode''.
+
+
+v1.07b [2013/02/02]^
+
+   Removal of the \xspace from the macros \etocname, 
+   \etocnumber, \etocpage.
+
+   Additional examples in the documentation.
+
+
+v1.07 [2013/01/29]^
+
+   New commands:
+
+      \etocthename, \etocthenumber, \etocthe~-page, \etoclink, 
+
+      \etoctoccontentsline, \etoctoccontentsline~lowast
+
+      \etocnopar, \etocaftercontentshook
+
+   Modified command: \etocmulticolstyle
+
+   New documentation section ``Surprising uses of etoc'' which
+   explains how to do  ``Lists of arbitrary things'', in
+   addition to the tables of contents.
+
+
+v1.06 [2012/12/07]^
+
+   The standard macros \l@section etc... are modified only
+   during the calls to \tableofcontents; they can thus be
+   customized as will by the user (with the help of a
+   package like tocloft) and this will be taken into account
+   by etoc for the TOCs typeset in compatibility mode.
+
+
+v1.05 [2012/12/01]^
+
+   \localtableofcontents replaces \tableofcontents~lowast (for
+   compatibility with the memoir class).
+
+   Compatibility with KOMA-script and memoir document
+   classes.
+
+
+v1.04 [2012/11/24]^
+
+   A (possibly local) table of contents can be labeled:
+
+       \tableofcontents \label{toc:1}
+
+   and reproduced elsewhere in the document (with a possibly
+   completely different layout):
+
+       \tableofcontents \ref{toc:1}
+
+
+v1.02 [2012/11/18]^
+
+   Initial version.
+
+\end{jfverbatim}
+\end{multicols}
+\endgroup  % group for modified verbatim printing of the changes log
+
+\makeatletter
+    \let\check@percent\original@check@percent
+\makeatother
+
+\small
+
+\ifnum\ForEnglish=1
+\section{Implementation}
+\fi
+
+\ifnum\ForDeutsch=1
+\section{Ausführung}
+\fi
+
+\indent % !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Lundi 09 mars 2015 à 09:32:22
+% PUTAIN DE BORDEL DE MERDE AVEC CES \trivlist
+% il faut faire un paragraphe après \section sinon pas d'espacement
+% vertical en sortie de blocs macrocode. Pas évident à trouver, vu que
+% je customisais différentes choses qui pouvaient affecter macrocode.
+
+% 9 mars 2015
+% Pour rappel on avait dans le préambule:
+% \def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\small\hyphenchar\font45 \baselineskip11pt\relax}
+% ce qui donne donc le \macro@font qui sera utilisé.
+
+
+
+\StopEventually{\normalsize
+  \ifnum\NoSourceCode=1
+   \ifnum\ForEnglish=1
+     \texttt{\parindent 0pt\rightskip 1cm minus 1cm
+     This documentation has been compiled without inclusion of the source
+     code. To produce the English documentation with source code included:\endgraf
+     \ \ \ \ run tex on etoc.dtx or etoc.ins to produce etoc.tex,\endgraf
+     \ \ \ \ then thrice latex on etoc.tex, then dvipdfmx on etoc.dvi.\endgraf
+     \medskip
+     To produce the German documentation with source code included, run tex on
+     etoc.dtx or etoc.ins to produce etoc-DE.tex, then edit etoc-DE.tex
+     to set \string\NoSourceCode\space to 0, and run latex thrice on etoc-DE.tex
+     then dvipdfmx on etoc-DE.dvi\endgraf
+     \medskip
+     (ignore dvipdfmx warnings, or, in case of problems caused by an old version
+     of dvipdfmx, set \string\Withdvipdfmx\space to 0 in etoc.tex or
+     etoc-DE.tex, to compile with pdflatex)\endgraf }% 
+   \fi
+   \ifnum\ForDeutsch=1
+     \texttt{\hyphenchar\font-1
+     \parindent 0pt\rightskip 0.5cm minus 0.5cm \selectlanguage{ngerman}%
+     Diese Dokumentation wurde ohne Einbeziehung des Quellcodes erstellt. Um 
+     die englische Dokumentation mit dem Quellcode zu produzieren, ist
+     einzubeziehen: \endgraf  
+     \ \ \ \ kompilieren tex mit etoc.dtx oder etoc.ins, um etoc.tex zu
+     produzieren, \endgraf 
+     \ \ \ \ dann dreimal latex mit etoc.tex, dann dvipdfmx mit etoc.dvi.\endgraf
+     \medskip 
+     Um die deutsche Dokumentation mit Einbeziehung des Quellcodes zu erstellen,
+     ist zu kompilieren tex mit etoc.dtx oder etoc.ins, um etoc-DE.tex zu 
+     erzeugen, dann ist \string\NoSourceCode\space in etoc-DE.tex auf 0 zu 
+     setzen, dann ist latex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen zu lassen, dann 
+     dvipdfmx mit etoc-DE.dvi.\endgraf 
+     \medskip
+     (Ignorieren Sie dvipdfmx-Warnungen oder, im Falle von Problemen mit einer 
+     alten Version von dvipdfmx, setzen Sie \string\Withdvipdfmx\space auf 0 in
+     etoc.tex oder etoc-DE.tex um dann pdflatex laufen zu lassen.)\endgraf }% 
+   \fi
+  \fi
+\end{document}}
+
+
+% November 2012
+% I don't want to have to type at this location (far from the top of the
+% file) explicitly the package version or version date, as it is
+% inconvenient to have to remember to do this when updating the package.
+% Also, I prefer not to add macros to the |.sty| file giving the package
+% date, name, or version. So I extracted this from the real macrocode
+% environment (leaving out the \init@crossref.)
+
+\makeatletter
+\begingroup
+\topsep\MacrocodeTopsep
+\trivlist\parskip\z@\item[]
+\macro@font
+\leftskip\@totalleftmargin  \advance\leftskip\MacroIndent
+\rightskip\z@  \parindent\z@  \parfillskip\@flushglue
+\global\@newlistfalse \global\@minipagefalse
+\ifcodeline@index
+  \everypar{\global\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne
+  \llap{\theCodelineNo\ \hskip\@totalleftmargin}}%
+\fi
+\string\NeedsTeXFormat\string{LaTeX2e\string}\par
+\string\ProvidesPackage\string{etoc\string}\par
+\noindent\space [\etocpkgdate\space\etocpkgversion\space\etocpkgdescription]\par
+\nointerlineskip
+\global\@inlabelfalse
+\endtrivlist
+\endgroup
+\makeatother
+
+% The catcode hackery next is to avoid to have <*package> to be listed
+% in the commented source code...
+% (c) 2012/11/19 jf burnol ;-)
+
+\MakePercentIgnore
+
+%
+% \catcode`\<=0 \catcode`\>=11 \catcode`\*=11 \catcode`\/=11
+% \let</none>\relax
+% \def<*package>{\catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \catcode`\*=12 \catcode`\/=12}
+%
+%</none>
+%<*package>
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{multicol}
+\DeclareOption*{\PackageWarning{etoc}{Option `\CurrentOption' is unknown.}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| suppresses |\ifEtoc@part| and defines |\ifEtoc@skipprefix|. It
+% also defines |\etocglobaldefs|, |\etoclocaldefs| and |\Etoc@global|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\Etoc@toctoks
+\def\Etoc@par{\par}
+\def\etocinline{\def\Etoc@par{}}
+\let\etocnopar\etocinline
+\def\etocdisplay{\def\Etoc@par{\par}}% 1.07m 2015/01/23
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |\etocglobaldefs| should be used only for special things such as TOC as a
+% table; it should be put in a group to limit its scope. If used in the
+% preamble, it must come \emph{after} |tableof| if the later is loaded too.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\Etoc@global\@empty              % 1.08 2015/03/10
+\def\etocglobaldefs{\let\Etoc@global\global\let\tof@global\global}
+\def\etoclocaldefs {\let\Etoc@global\@empty\let\tof@global\@empty}
+\newif\ifEtoc@jj  % book
+\newif\ifEtoc@j   % part  
+\newif\ifEtoc@    % chapter
+\newif\ifEtoc@i   % section
+\newif\ifEtoc@ii  % subsection
+\newif\ifEtoc@iii % subsubsection
+\newif\ifEtoc@iv  % paragraph
+\newif\ifEtoc@v   % subparagraph
+\newif\ifEtoc@number
+\newif\ifEtoc@hyperref
+\newif\ifEtoc@parskip   % 1.07d
+\newif\ifEtoc@tocwithid
+\newif\ifEtoc@standard
+\newif\ifEtoc@skipprefix % 1.08
+\newif\ifEtoc@isfirst    % 1.08
+\newif\ifEtoc@localtoc
+\newif\ifEtoc@skipthisone
+\newif\ifEtoc@stoptoc
+\newif\ifEtoc@notactive
+\newif\ifEtoc@mustclosegroup
+\def\etoc@{\etoc@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07g| uses a second counter; this could be avoided, but ok, let's not be
+% that strict. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{etoc@tocid}
+\newcounter{etoc@tocdepth}% 1.07g
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2015/03/08| Why do I use |jj| in the flags and |minustwo| here? and
+% is there an entity full of forgiveness out there to save my soul even
+% if taking into consideration my use of single and doubled |@|'s ?
+% Although I desperately need to waste time I miraculously decided not
+% to change everything today and thus the somewhat dispendious set-up
+% below is maintained.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{memoir}{\def\Etoc@minf{-\thr@@}}{\def\Etoc@minf{-\tw@}}
+\def\Etoc@@minustwo@@{-\tw@}
+\let\Etoc@@minusone@@\m@ne
+\let\Etoc@@zero@@    \z@
+\let\Etoc@@one@@     \@ne
+\let\Etoc@@two@@     \tw@
+\let\Etoc@@three@@   \thr@@
+\chardef\Etoc@@four@@ 4
+\chardef\Etoc@@five@@ 5
+\chardef\Etoc@@six@@  6
+\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@minustwo@@
+\def\Etoc@@minustwo@{minustwo}
+\def\Etoc@@minusone@{minusone}
+\def\Etoc@@zero@    {zero}
+\def\Etoc@@one@     {one}
+\def\Etoc@@two@     {two}
+\def\Etoc@@three@   {three}
+\def\Etoc@@four@    {four}
+\def\Etoc@@five@    {five}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07g|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname Etoc@-3@@\endcsname {-\thr@@}
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@-2@@\endcsname \Etoc@@minustwo@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@-1@@\endcsname \Etoc@@minusone@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@0@@\endcsname  \Etoc@@zero@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@1@@\endcsname  \Etoc@@one@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@2@@\endcsname  \Etoc@@two@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@3@@\endcsname  \Etoc@@three@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@4@@\endcsname  \Etoc@@four@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@5@@\endcsname  \Etoc@@five@@
+\expandafter\let\csname Etoc@6@@\endcsname  \Etoc@@six@@
+\let\Etoc@all@@   \Etoc@@five@@
+\let\Etoc@none@@  \Etoc@minf   
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Versions earlier than |1.08| did |\Etoc@newlevel| in a quite
+% embarrassing way with an |\edef|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\Etoc@levellist\@empty
+\def\Etoc@newlevel #1%
+{\expandafter\def\expandafter\Etoc@levellist\expandafter
+        {\Etoc@levellist\Etoc@levellist@elt #1}%
+}
+\def\etocsetlevel#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\Etoc@newlevel\csname l@#1\endcsname
+ \ifcase#2\relax
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@zero@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@zero@
+   \or
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@one@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@one@
+   \or
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@two@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@two@
+   \or
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@three@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@three@
+   \or
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@four@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@four@
+   \or
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@five@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@five@
+   \or
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@six@@
+   \else
+   \ifnum#2=\m@ne
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@minusone@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@minusone@
+   \else
+   \ifnum#2=-\tw@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@minustwo@@
+      \expandafter\let \csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\Etoc@@minustwo@
+   \else
+       \PackageWarning{etoc}
+         {unexpected value `#2' in \string\etocsetlevel.^^J%
+          Should be -2,-1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. Set to 6 (=ignored)}%
+       \expandafter\let\csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname\Etoc@@six@@
+\fi\fi\fi}
+\etocsetlevel{book}{-2}
+\etocsetlevel{part}{-1}
+\etocsetlevel{chapter}{0}
+\etocsetlevel{section}{1}
+\etocsetlevel{subsection}{2}
+\etocsetlevel{subsubsection}{3}
+\etocsetlevel{paragraph}{4}
+\etocsetlevel{subparagraph}{5}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The first two parameters of |\Etoc@et@hop| are exchanged in |1.08|
+% compared to earlier versions; this is in relation to changes done in
+% |\Etoc@etoccontentsline|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@ifpackageloaded{parskip}{\Etoc@parskiptrue}{}%
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\Etoc@hyperreftrue
+                            \def\Etoc@et@hop#1#2#3#4#5{#2{#3}{#4}{#5}#1}%
+                            \long\def\Etoc@gobblesixorfive#1#2#3#4#5#6{}}
+                           {\def\Etoc@et@hop#1#2#3#4{#2{#3}{#4}#1}%
+                            \long\def\Etoc@gobblesixorfive#1#2#3#4#5{}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2015/03/08| One has to be careful about the |Etoc@end@<level>| user
+% defined macros which may close groups. This has always been the reason
+% for the |\global|'s here and elsewhere.
+%
+% |1.08| uses |\Etoc@level| rather than a |#1| which used to be anyhow always
+% the |\Etoc@tmp|. Now |\Etoc@level| is what was called formerly |\Etoc@tmp|
+% in |\Etoc@etoccontentsline|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@setflags {%
+  \ifcase \Etoc@level
+      \global\Etoc@vfalse
+      \global\Etoc@ivfalse
+      \global\Etoc@iiifalse
+      \global\Etoc@iifalse
+      \global\Etoc@ifalse
+      \global\Etoc@true
+  \or
+      \global\Etoc@vfalse
+      \global\Etoc@ivfalse
+      \global\Etoc@iiifalse
+      \global\Etoc@iifalse
+      \global\Etoc@itrue
+  \or
+      \global\Etoc@vfalse
+      \global\Etoc@ivfalse
+      \global\Etoc@iiifalse
+      \global\Etoc@iitrue
+  \or
+      \global\Etoc@vfalse
+      \global\Etoc@ivfalse
+      \global\Etoc@iiitrue
+  \or
+      \global\Etoc@vfalse
+      \global\Etoc@ivtrue
+  \or
+      \global\Etoc@vtrue
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2015/03/08| I move up the common assignments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \global\Etoc@vfalse
+    \global\Etoc@ivfalse
+    \global\Etoc@iiifalse
+    \global\Etoc@iifalse
+    \global\Etoc@ifalse
+    \global\Etoc@false
+    \ifnum\Etoc@level=\m@ne
+      \global\Etoc@jtrue
+    \else
+      \global\Etoc@jfalse
+      \global\Etoc@jjtrue
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| This was originally in |\Etoc@etoccontentsline|, intermixed
+% with the definitions of |\Etoc@contents| and |\Etoc@prefix|. Separated
+% here for clarity of code. One has to be careful that this may close
+% groups. The conditionals are all global. The |\Etoc@level| has been
+% |\global\let| to a |\chardef| variable. The final |\else| of the
+% |\ifcase| assumes none of the |\Etoc@end@..| routines modify it,
+% naturally.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@doends {%  
+    \ifcase \Etoc@level
+        \ifEtoc@v  \Etoc@end@five\fi
+        \ifEtoc@iv \Etoc@end@four\fi
+        \ifEtoc@iii\Etoc@end@three\fi
+        \ifEtoc@ii \Etoc@end@two\fi
+        \ifEtoc@i  \Etoc@end@one\fi
+    \or
+        \ifEtoc@v  \Etoc@end@five\fi
+        \ifEtoc@iv \Etoc@end@four\fi
+        \ifEtoc@iii\Etoc@end@three\fi
+        \ifEtoc@ii \Etoc@end@two\fi
+    \or
+        \ifEtoc@v  \Etoc@end@five\fi
+        \ifEtoc@iv \Etoc@end@four\fi
+        \ifEtoc@iii\Etoc@end@three\fi
+    \or
+        \ifEtoc@v \Etoc@end@five\fi
+        \ifEtoc@iv\Etoc@end@four\fi
+    \or 
+        \ifEtoc@v \Etoc@end@five\fi 
+    \or 
+    \else
+      \ifEtoc@v  \Etoc@end@five \fi
+      \ifEtoc@iv \Etoc@end@four \fi
+      \ifEtoc@iii\Etoc@end@three\fi
+      \ifEtoc@ii \Etoc@end@two  \fi
+      \ifEtoc@i  \Etoc@end@one  \fi
+      \ifEtoc@   \Etoc@end@zero \fi
+      \ifnum \Etoc@level =-\tw@
+        \ifEtoc@j \Etoc@end@minusone\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Heart of \etoc hack into execution of |.toc| file. It MUST be the case
+% that the file contains |\contentsline {<unit>}...| instructions, with
+% the standard meaning of executing |\l@unit| (the hyperref
+% modifications are taken into account). It is the various |\l@unit|'s
+% which are (locally) |\let| to |\Etoc@lxyz| and it is |\Etoc@lxyz|
+% which does the parsing of the arguments in order to extract name,
+% number and page number. Once they are obtained, via the execution of
+% this indirectly hacked |\contentsline|, the code executes the
+% |\Etoc@prefix| and |\Etoc@contents| corresponding to that unit level,
+% according to the user |\etocsetstyle| declarations. Before that the
+% begin part is executed when \etoc first encounters that level
+% coming from a higher one and the end part will be executed when
+% hitting a more important level.
+%
+% |\etocskipfirstprefix| was already part of the very first release of
+% \etoc. Up to |1.07n| it was just an elegant |\@thirdofthree| possibly
+% executed just before a |\@firstoftwo{\Etoc@swa{#1}}{\Etoc@swb{#1}}|
+% line. But this made it impossible for me to execute things afer the
+% |begin| parts.
+%
+% Executing stuff before |begin| is now a potential problem because the user
+% can close some group in the |begin| code (this was in fact impossible in
+% versions |<1.08| because this would have erased the definitions of
+% |\Etoc@contents| and |\Etoc@prefix|). Thus I am not so free now to define
+% things before execution of begin, if I allow people to close a group
+% therein, except if I make them global.
+%
+% The mechanism of |\etocskipfirstprefix| made it impossible to add
+% anything at the end of the |begin| codes. Thus I changed it in |1.08|
+% to simply work with a (global) boolean flag. This gives user the
+% freedom to use |\etocskipfirstprefix| anywhere in the |begin| code and
+% it made room for a delimited macro I called |\etoconlyonfirst|. But
+% then I dropped it in favor of definition of the |\etociffirst|
+% conditional.
+%
+% Macros |\Etoc@swa| and |\Etoc@swb| which did the |\Etoc@et@hop| thing have
+% been suppressed, their effect is incorporated to the end of
+% |\Etoc@etoccontentsline|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocskipfirstprefix {\global\Etoc@skipprefixtrue }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2015/03/08| Let's record that |\Etoc@level| used to be called
+% |\Etoc@tmp| in versions earlier than |1.08| (and |\Etoc@tmp| is used
+% in the completely different ulterior |\Etoc@lxyz| context). The code
+% sets it for example to be |\Etoc@section@@| which has been let by
+% |\etocsetlevel| to |\@ne|, thus is always self-terminating in
+% |\ifnum..\fi| contexts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@etoccontentsline #1{%
+  \global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Etoc@level\csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname
+  \Etoc@skipthisonefalse
+  \ifnum\Etoc@level=\Etoc@@six@@
+      \Etoc@skipthisonetrue
+  \else
+    \ifEtoc@localtoc
+      \let\Etoc@next\relax
+      \ifEtoc@stoptoc 
+        \Etoc@skipthisonetrue 
+      \fi
+      \ifnum\Etoc@level<\Etoc@localtop 
+        \def\Etoc@next{\global\Etoc@stoptoctrue}%
+        \Etoc@skipthisonetrue
+      \fi
+      \ifEtoc@notactive
+        \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@setflags}%
+        \Etoc@skipthisonetrue
+      \fi
+      \Etoc@next
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@gobblesixorfive
+  \ifnum\c@tocdepth<\Etoc@level 
+  \else 
+  \ifEtoc@skipthisone
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| New way to handle the compatibility mode. One has to worry
+% only for the local tables of contents (in inactive state, which still
+% must be parsed for global level flags) but in this case
+% |\Etoc@setflags| was done above already. Earlier method proceeded with
+% dummy empty line styles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifEtoc@standard\let\Etoc@next\@thirdofthree
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2015/03/08| Ever since the first release of \etoc, the code has
+% to be careful that the |\Etoc@end@<level>| user defined macros may
+% close groups. This is the reason why some assignments have to be done
+% globally. The |\let\Etoc@next\Etoc@gobblesixorfive| above could be
+% local, because it is used only in case the stuff below is skipped,
+% inclusive of |\Etoc@doends| which may close groups.
+%
+% Versions |1.08| extracts to a separate macro |\Etoc@doends|. Earlier code
+% did |\global\let\Etoc@next\relax| but we can now give a default |\relax|
+% value to |\Etoc@next| with no need of a |\global| prefix.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \Etoc@doends
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| the |\Etoc@next| will (possibly) execute the |begin| code,
+% \emph{before} |\Etoc@contents| and |\Etoc@prefix| get defined,
+% contrarily to what I did in earlier versions. I still reset the flags
+% before execution of the |begin| codes (although the flags are not
+% supposed to be used therein anyhow).
+%
+% Also the \meta{begin} code does |\Etoc@isfirsttrue|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\Etoc@next\@empty
+    \Etoc@global\Etoc@isfirstfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2015/03/08| If my naming scheme had not been so baroque, I could easily do
+% things in a more concise way here...
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifcase\Etoc@level
+        \ifEtoc@\else    \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@zero}\fi
+    \or
+        \ifEtoc@i\else   \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@one}\fi
+    \or
+        \ifEtoc@ii\else  \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@two}\fi
+    \or
+        \ifEtoc@iii\else \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@three}\fi
+    \or 
+        \ifEtoc@iv\else  \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@four}\fi
+    \or 
+        \ifEtoc@v\else   \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@five}\fi
+    \else
+      \ifnum\Etoc@level=\m@ne
+        \ifEtoc@j\else   \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@minusone}\fi
+      \else
+        \ifEtoc@jj\else  \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@begin@minustwo}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \Etoc@setflags
+    \Etoc@next
+    \let\Etoc@next\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08|:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item  separates the definition of |\Etoc@prefix| and
+% |\Etoc@contents| from the execution of the |end| parts. And it does
+% the definition with some |\csname|'s.
+%
+% \item implements |\etocskipfirstprefix| with a boolean, this is less slick
+% but more flexible than the earlier method.
+%
+% \item defines the |\etociffirst| conditional.
+%
+% \item has |\Etoc@level| rather than |\Etoc@tmp| and thus we can dispense
+% with the |\ifEtoc@part| switch as we will be able to test the equality
+% |\Etoc@level=-1| inside of |\Etoc@lxyz|.
+% 
+% \item adds the |\Etoc@global| prefix.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\Etoc@prefix\expandafter
+        {\csname Etoc@prefix@\csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\endcsname }%
+    \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\Etoc@contents\expandafter
+        {\csname Etoc@contents@\csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\endcsname }%
+    \ifEtoc@skipprefix \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@prefix\@empty\fi
+    \global\Etoc@skipprefixfalse
+  \fi\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| modifies the ending to not use the |\Etoc@swa| and |\Etoc@swb|
+% things. With this version, the |\Etoc@next| here is only to gobble
+% everything if it has to (or gobble only the \etoc things, when in
+% compatibility mode).
+%
+% For the record we don't do |\csname l@#1\endcsname| mainly because
+% hyperref patches |\contentsline|. 
+% 
+% The location where |\Etoc@savedcontentsline| is |\let| to
+% |\contentsline| has been moved with release |1.08| to before the
+% title as set by |\etocsettoctyle|, thus it is now possible to open a
+% tabular in this part. And with the |\Etoc@global| prefix the user may
+% opt for global definitions of |\etocname| and the like, thus use
+% freely |&| and other group closing things. Also, some care has been
+% put into doing only expandable things after expansion of the
+% \meta{prefix} and \meta{contents} parts of a sectioning unit style.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \Etoc@next
+  \Etoc@et@hop{\Etoc@prefix\Etoc@contents}{\Etoc@savedcontentsline{#1}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2013/03/07|:
+%
+% Up to |1.06| \etoc defined only \csa{etocname}, \csa{etocnumber} and
+% \csa{etocpage}. The |hyperref| added data is recycled in the simplest manner,
+% prefixing it with \csa{leavevmode}. The included \csa{Hy@tocdestname} is left
+% unexpanded. We have to spend some time with delimited macros to
+% dis-entangle the |.toc| data, and reconstruct the possible |hyperref|
+% data. If
+% the page number is not hyperlinked, \csa{etocpage} does \emph{not} add the
+% link found possibly in the name.
+%
+% Then |1.07| added \csa{etocthename}, \csa{etocthenumber}, \csa{etocthepage}
+% which are left fragile and do not have the links data, and
+% \csa{etoclink}\marg{linkname} which is robust and reconstructs an arbitrarily
+% named link. A need (for things like building up a token list to be used in a
+% |tikzpicture|) arose later to have some form of the link which could be saved
+% by a simple command like one can do |\global\let\lastname\etocthename|, and
+% avoid having to manipulate \csa{Hy@tocdestname}. So |1.07f| adds
+% \csa{etocthelinkedname}, \csa{etocthelinkednumber}, \csa{etocthelinkedpage},
+% \csa{etocthelink}: they use \csa{hyperlink} with an expanded
+% \csa{Hy@tocdestname}. 
+%
+% One could now define \csa{etocname}, etc ... to be the robust versions of
+% \csa{etocthelinkedname}, etc ..., but the original definitions are kept by
+% sentimentalism. |1.07f| also adds \csa{leavevmode} to \csa{etoclink} which
+% should have been done earlier, as it was included in \csa{etocname} etc...
+%
+% attention,  \csa{@namedef}|{A}{B}| and not \csa{@namedef}|{A} {B}| !!
+% on the other hand this gives a simple way to insert a space as the first
+% token in the paramaters. For \csa{Etoc@again} (which appears later in the
+% code), a \csa{@firstofone} construct is however the simplest of all.
+%
+% |2015/03/09|: |1.08| adds |\Etoc@global| prefix.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@lxyz #1#2{% 
+     \Etoc@global\@namedef {etoclink }{\leavevmode}%        fall-back
+     \Etoc@global\let\etocthelink         \@empty  %        fall-back
+     \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocname }{\leavevmode #1}% fall-back (perhaps linked)
+     \Etoc@global\def\etocthename         {#1}%  (if link, will be removed later)
+     \Etoc@global\def\etocthelinkedname   {#1}%  will probably get redefined 
+     \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocpage }{\leavevmode #2}%      (perhaps linked)
+   \Etoc@getthepage #2\etoc@ % defines also \etocthelinkedpage (and \etoclink)
+   \Etoc@getnb #1\relax\relax\etoc@  % gets number *and* name, and \etoclink
+   \ifEtoc@number\else               
+      \ifnum\Etoc@level=\m@ne
+        \Etoc@getit #1\hspace\relax\etoc@   % additional job for parts
+      \fi
+   \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| adds the |\Etoc@global|'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@getthepage #1{%
+  \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@getthepage@nohyp
+  \ifEtoc@hyperref\ifx #1\hyper@linkstart
+    \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@getthepage@hyp
+  \fi\fi
+  \Etoc@next #1%
+}
+\def\Etoc@getthepage@nohyp #1\etoc@ {%
+    \Etoc@global\def\etocthepage       {#1}%
+    \Etoc@global\def\etocthelinkedpage {#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07k| corrects a bug here with an extra space before |##1| in 
+% |\@namedef{etoclink } ##1|. In 99.99\% of use cases however, the
+% macro gets redefined at a later stage, thus the bug did not show.
+%
+% |1.07n| replaces use of |\toks@| by macro |\Etoc@tmp|. Thus, the user has
+% the (not so recommended) possibility to use |\toks@| in the styles, even to
+% store information whose scope extends beyond the execution of each
+% |\contentsline|.
+%
+% |1.08| adds the |\Etoc@global|'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@getthepage@hyp #1#2#3#4#5\etoc@ {%
+  \Etoc@global\@namedef{etoclink }##1{\leavevmode #1{#2}{#3}{##1}#5}%
+  \Etoc@global\edef\etocthelink ##1{\noexpand\hyperlink {#3}{##1}}%
+  \Etoc@global\def\etocthepage {#4}%
+  \edef\Etoc@tmp   {{#3}}%
+  \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\etocthelinkedpage\expandafter
+    {\expandafter\hyperlink \Etoc@tmp{#4}}%
+}
+%
+\def\Etoc@getnb #1{%
+  \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@getnb@nohyp
+  \ifEtoc@hyperref\ifx #1\hyper@linkstart
+    \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@getnb@hyp
+  \fi\fi
+  \Etoc@next #1%
+}
+%
+\def\Etoc@getit #1{%
+  \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@getit@nohyp
+  \ifEtoc@hyperref\ifx #1\hyper@linkstart
+    \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@getit@hyp
+  \fi\fi
+  \Etoc@next #1%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| adds the |\Etoc@global|'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@getnb@nohyp #1#2#3\etoc@ {%
+    \def\Etoc@getname ##1\relax\relax\etoc@ {%
+      \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocname }{\leavevmode ##1}%
+      \Etoc@global\def\etocthename       {##1}%
+      \Etoc@global\def\etocthelinkedname {##1}%
+     }%
+  \ifx #1\numberline
+    \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocnumber }{\leavevmode #2}%
+    \Etoc@global\def\etocthenumber       {#2}%
+    \Etoc@global\def\etocthelinkednumber {#2}%
+    \Etoc@global\Etoc@numbertrue
+    \Etoc@getname #3\etoc@
+  \else % then \etocthename and \etocthelinkedname already defined
+    \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocnumber }{\leavevmode}%
+    \Etoc@global\let\etocthenumber       \@empty
+    \Etoc@global\let\etocthelinkednumber \@empty
+    \Etoc@global\Etoc@numberfalse
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07n| replaces use of |\toks@| by macro |\Etoc@tmp|. |1.08| adds
+% the |\Etoc@global|'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@getnb@hyp #1#2#3#4#5#6\etoc@ {%
+         \Etoc@global\def\Etoc@getname ##1\relax\relax\etoc@ {%
+         \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocname }{\leavevmode #1{#2}{#3}{##1}#5}%
+         \Etoc@global\def\etocthename {##1}%
+         \edef\Etoc@tmp   {{#3}}%
+         \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\etocthelinkedname\expandafter
+                              {\expandafter\hyperlink \Etoc@tmp{##1}}%
+         }%
+         \def\Etoc@getnbr ##1##2##3\etoc@ {%
+          \ifx ##1\numberline
+            \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocnumber }{\leavevmode #1{#2}{#3}{##2}#5}%
+            \Etoc@global\def\etocthenumber {##2}%
+            \edef\Etoc@tmp   {{#3}}%
+            \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\etocthelinkednumber
+                        \expandafter{\expandafter\hyperlink \Etoc@tmp{##2}}%
+            \Etoc@global\Etoc@numbertrue
+            \Etoc@getname ##3\etoc@
+          \else
+            \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocnumber }{\leavevmode}%
+            \Etoc@global\let\etocthenumber       \@empty
+            \Etoc@global\let\etocthelinkednumber \@empty
+            \Etoc@global\Etoc@numberfalse
+            \Etoc@global\def\etocthename {#4}%
+            \edef\Etoc@tmp   {{#3}}%
+            \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\etocthelinkedname
+                        \expandafter {\expandafter\hyperlink \Etoc@tmp{#4}}%
+          \fi
+         }%
+  \Etoc@global\@namedef {etoclink }##1{\leavevmode #1{#2}{#3}{##1}#5}%
+  \Etoc@global\edef\etocthelink ##1{\noexpand\hyperlink {#3}{##1}}%
+  \Etoc@getnbr #4\relax\relax\etoc@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| adds the |\Etoc@global|'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@getit@nohyp #1\hspace#2#3\etoc@ {%
+    \def\Etoc@getname ##1\hspace\relax\etoc@ {%
+       \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocname }{\leavevmode ##1}%
+       \Etoc@global\def\etocthename       {##1}%
+       \Etoc@global\def\etocthelinkedname {##1}%
+    }%
+  \ifx\relax#2\else 
+        \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocnumber }{\leavevmode #1}%
+        \Etoc@global\def\etocthenumber       {#1}%
+        \Etoc@global\def\etocthelinkednumber {#1}%
+        \Etoc@global\Etoc@numbertrue
+        \Etoc@getname #3\etoc@
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07n| replaces use of |\toks@| by macro |\Etoc@tmp|. |1.08| adds
+% the |\Etoc@global|'s.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@getit@hyp #1#2#3#4#5#6\etoc@ {%
+    \def\Etoc@getname ##1\hspace\relax\etoc@ {%
+       \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocname }{\leavevmode #1{#2}{#3}{##1}#5}%
+       \Etoc@global\def\etocthename {##1}%
+       \edef\Etoc@tmp   {{#3}}%
+       \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\etocthelinkedname
+                   \expandafter{\expandafter\hyperlink \Etoc@tmp{##1}}%
+    }%
+    \def\Etoc@getnbr ##1\hspace##2##3\etoc@ {%
+       \ifx\relax##2\else
+         \Etoc@global\@namedef {etocnumber }{\leavevmode #1{#2}{#3}{##1}#5}%
+         \Etoc@global\def\etocthenumber {##1}%
+         \edef\Etoc@tmp   {{#3}}%
+         \Etoc@global\expandafter\def\expandafter\etocthelinkednumber
+                     \expandafter{\expandafter\hyperlink \Etoc@tmp{##1}}%
+         \Etoc@global\Etoc@numbertrue
+         \Etoc@getname ##3\etoc@
+       \fi
+    }%
+  \Etoc@getnbr #4\hspace\relax\etoc@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\etocthename   \@empty
+\let\etocthenumber \@empty
+\let\etocthepage   \@empty
+\let\etocthelinkedname   \@empty
+\let\etocthelinkednumber \@empty
+\let\etocthelinkedpage   \@empty
+\let\etocthelink   \@empty
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\etocname}  {}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\etocnumber}{}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\etocpage}  {}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\etoclink}  {}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\etocifnumbered}
+   {\ifEtoc@number\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi}
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\etocxifnumbered\csname etocifnumbered \endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| defines |\etociffirst|
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\etociffirst}
+   {\ifEtoc@isfirst\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi}
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\etocxiffirst\csname etociffirst \endcsname
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07j| modifies |\Etoc@readtoc|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@readtoc {%
+  \ifeof \Etoc@tf
+  \else
+     \read \Etoc@tf to \Etoc@buffer
+     \Etoc@toctoks=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+       {\expandafter\the\expandafter\Etoc@toctoks\Etoc@buffer}%
+     \expandafter\Etoc@readtoc
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07m| moves the reading of the toc file At Begin Document. Needed for
+% Babel activated characters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\Etoc@toctoks {}% (superfluous, but for clarity)
+\AtBeginDocument{\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}
+    {{\endlinechar=-1 
+      \makeatletter
+      \newread\Etoc@tf
+      \openin\Etoc@tf\@filef@und
+      \Etoc@readtoc
+      \global\Etoc@toctoks=\expandafter{\the\Etoc@toctoks}%
+      \closein\Etoc@tf}}
+    {\typeout{No file \jobname.toc.}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 1.07d: parskip and |\@nobreakfalse| stuff moved to |\Etoc@tableofcontents|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@openouttoc{%
+  \ifEtoc@hyperref 
+    \ifx\hyper@last\@undefined
+    \IfFileExists{\jobname .toc}
+      {\Hy@WarningNoLine 
+         {old toc file detected, not used; run LaTeX again (cheers from etoc)}%
+       \global\Etoc@toctoks={}%
+      }
+      {}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@filesw 
+   \newwrite \tf@toc 
+   \immediate \openout \tf@toc \jobname .toc\relax 
+  \fi 
+  \global\let\Etoc@openouttoc\empty
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| has a new way to handle |\Etoc@standardtrue|.
+%
+% Also the expansion of |\Etoc@levelist| is moved to inside
+% |\Etoc@tableofcontents| as set-up by |\etocsettocstyle|. This opens up
+% the possibility for the user to open a group in the title (for example
+% start a tabular) which would be closed (by the first |&|) sometime
+% later. In combination with |\etocglobaldefs| it will be now much
+% easier to typeset TOC as tables with \etoc!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@toctoc{%
+   \global\Etoc@vfalse
+   \global\Etoc@ivfalse
+   \global\Etoc@iiifalse
+   \global\Etoc@iifalse
+   \global\Etoc@ifalse
+   \global\Etoc@false
+   \global\Etoc@jfalse
+   \global\Etoc@jjfalse
+\the\Etoc@toctoks
+\ifEtoc@notactive\else 
+  \ifEtoc@v   \Etoc@end@five\fi
+  \ifEtoc@iv  \Etoc@end@four\fi
+  \ifEtoc@iii \Etoc@end@three\fi
+  \ifEtoc@ii  \Etoc@end@two\fi
+  \ifEtoc@i   \Etoc@end@one\fi
+  \ifEtoc@    \Etoc@end@zero\fi
+  \ifEtoc@j   \Etoc@end@minusone\fi
+  \ifEtoc@jj  \Etoc@end@minustwo\fi
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etoc@@startlocaltoc#1#2{%
+\let\Etoc@next\relax
+    \ifEtoc@localtoc 
+    \ifEtoc@notactive
+        \ifnum #1=#2\relax
+          \ifEtoc@jj  \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@minusone@@ \fi
+          \ifEtoc@j   \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@zero@@  \fi
+          \ifEtoc@    \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@one@@   \fi
+          \ifEtoc@i   \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@two@@   \fi
+          \ifEtoc@ii  \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@three@@ \fi
+          \ifEtoc@iii \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@four@@  \fi
+          \ifEtoc@iv  \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@five@@  \fi
+          \ifEtoc@v   \Etoc@global\let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@six@@   \fi
+          \def\Etoc@next{\global\Etoc@notactivefalse
+                      \global\Etoc@vfalse
+                      \global\Etoc@ivfalse
+                      \global\Etoc@iiifalse
+                      \global\Etoc@iifalse
+                      \global\Etoc@ifalse
+                      \global\Etoc@false
+                      \global\Etoc@jfalse
+                      \global\Etoc@jjfalse}%
+        \fi
+    \fi\fi
+\Etoc@next}
+\let\etoc@startlocaltoc\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07g| suppresses the printing of |--unknown etoc ref: run latex again--| as
+% sometimes one uses |\localtableofcontents| to prepare something else, and one
+% does not want any text output even in intermediate runs.
+% 
+% Also |1.07g| adds |\etocaftertochook| to help with
+% |\invisiblelocaltableofcontents| (and then I did |\etocsetnexttocdepth|).
+% |1.07h| makes the hook used by |\etocsetnexttocdepth| private.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@localtableofcontents#1{%
+    \edef\Etoc@tmp{#1}%
+    \ifnum\Etoc@tmp<\@ne
+    \PackageWarning{etoc}
+       {Unknown toc id: run LaTeX to get references right}% 
+    \let\Etoc@next\@gobble\else\let\Etoc@next\@firstofone\fi
+    \Etoc@next
+    {\edef\etoc@startlocaltoc##1{%
+         \noexpand\etoc@@startlocaltoc{##1}{#1}}
+    \Etoc@localtoctrue
+    \let\Etoc@localtop\Etoc@@minustwo@@
+    \global\Etoc@stoptocfalse
+    \global\Etoc@notactivetrue
+    \Etoc@tableofcontents}%
+    \endgroup\ifEtoc@mustclosegroup\endgroup\fi
+    \Etoc@aftertochook % 1.07h
+    \etocaftertochook % 1.07g
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2013/03/07|: I discover a \csa{@namedef} trick to construct the
+% \csa{Etoc@again} space delimited macro:\\ 
+% |    \@namedef {Etoc@again} {...stuff...}|\\
+%  Original version was (copied from analogous stuff in |source2e|):\\
+% |    {\def\1{\Etoc@again}\expandafter\gdef\1 {...stuff...}}|\\
+% and in the end (now that I think about it) I simply use |\@firstofone|.\par
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@getrefno #1#2\etoc@ {#1}
+\def\Etoc@getref #1{\@ifundefined{r@#1}{0}{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+          \Etoc@getrefno\csname r@#1\endcsname\relax\etoc@}}
+\def\Etoc@ref#1{\Etoc@localtableofcontents{\Etoc@getref{#1}}}
+\def\Etoc@label#1{\label{#1}\futurelet\Etoc@nexttoken\Etoc@t@bleofcontents}
+\@firstofone{\def\Etoc@again} {\futurelet\Etoc@nexttoken\Etoc@t@bleofcontents}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Why |\global| for |\Etoc@notactivefalse|? and not for
+% |\Etoc@localtocfalse|. Must think about this, a pity I did not
+% document it when I was young and intelligent ...
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@t@bleofcontents{%
+ \ifx\Etoc@nexttoken\label
+    \def\Etoc@next{\expandafter\Etoc@label\@gobble}\else
+ \ifx\Etoc@nexttoken\@sptoken
+    \let\Etoc@next\Etoc@again\else
+ \ifEtoc@tocwithid
+    \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@localtableofcontents{\c@etoc@tocid}}%
+ \else
+    \ifx\Etoc@nexttoken\ref
+       \def\Etoc@next{\expandafter\Etoc@ref\@gobble}%
+    \else
+       \def\Etoc@next{\Etoc@localtocfalse
+                      \global\Etoc@notactivefalse
+                      \Etoc@tableofcontents
+                      \endgroup
+                      \ifEtoc@mustclosegroup\endgroup\fi
+                      \Etoc@aftertochook % 1.07h
+                      \etocaftertochook % 1.07g 
+                      }%
+    \fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\Etoc@next}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07g| for consistency Etoc@ prefix added.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@table@fcontents{%
+    \refstepcounter{etoc@tocid}% 
+    \Etoc@tocwithidfalse
+    \futurelet\Etoc@nexttoken\Etoc@t@bleofcontents}
+\def\Etoc@localtable@fcontents{%
+    \refstepcounter{etoc@tocid}%
+    \addtocontents{toc}
+       {\string\etoc@startlocaltoc{\arabic{etoc@tocid}}}%
+    \Etoc@tocwithidtrue
+    \futurelet\Etoc@nexttoken\Etoc@t@bleofcontents}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07g| defines |\etoctableofcontents| to be able to undo the evil and
+% brutal doings of some packages with |\tableofcontents|.
+%
+% |1.08| patches |tableof|'s influence. Version |1.4a| or later of |tableof|
+% is needed. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\etocaftertitlehook    \@empty
+\let\etocaftercontentshook \@empty
+\def\etoctableofcontents{%
+   \Etoc@openouttoc
+   \Etoc@par
+   \begingroup % closed in \Etoc@t@bleofcontents or \Etoc@localtableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% No need for tableof extra group level, and furthermore
+% it is better to get rid of it if. However I can't do it globally because I
+% want to leave open for the user the possibility (whose interest is quasi nil
+% however) of using directly |\tableof|, |\tablenotof|, ... and not the only
+% reasonable thing which is |\nexttocwithtags{}{}|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \let\tof@begingroup\@empty
+      \let\tof@endgroup  \@empty
+      \def\etoc@startlocaltoc##1{\etoc@@startlocaltoc{##1}{\c@etoc@tocid}}%
+      \@ifstar
+      {\def\Etoc@aftertitlehook{}\Etoc@table@fcontents}
+      {\let\Etoc@aftertitlehook\etocaftertitlehook\Etoc@table@fcontents}}
+\let\tableofcontents\etoctableofcontents
+\newcommand*\localtableofcontents{%
+   \Etoc@openouttoc
+   \Etoc@par
+   \begingroup % closed in \Etoc@t@bleofcontents or \Etoc@localtableofcontents
+      \let\tof@begingroup\@empty
+      \let\tof@endgroup  \@empty
+      \@ifstar
+      {\def\Etoc@aftertitlehook{}\Etoc@localtable@fcontents}
+      {\let\Etoc@aftertitlehook\etocaftertitlehook\Etoc@localtable@fcontents}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08| moves earlier the definitions of |\Etoc@savedcontentsline| as
+% well as |\Etoc@levellist|. It will thus not be operative to do
+% |\etocsetlevel| from inside the title now. But perhaps it will be
+% easier to deal with tables.
+%
+% Also I remove a big |\@firstofone|, and use rather
+% |\Etoc@gobbletoetoc@| for the gobbling case.
+%
+% Also, |1.08| modifies the code to do only expandable things after
+% |\Etoc@toctoc|, in order to allow opening of an alignment in the first
+% argument and closing in the second. Earlier versions had an
+% |\Etoc@@next| initially set to relax after the first |\Etoc@toctoc|. I
+% was in 2012/2013 quite uneasy with the TeX conditionals hence wanted
+% for safety to move the things for the second invocation of
+% |\Etoc@toctoc| after the |\fi\fi\fi|. I could define an |\afterfififi|
+% macro, but it should be ok as it is done here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\Etoc@gobbletoetoc@ #1\etoc@ {}
+\newcommand\etocsettocstyle[2]{%
+\def\Etoc@tableofcontents
+{%
+    \ifnum\c@tocdepth>\Etoc@minf\else
+            \expandafter\Etoc@gobbletoetoc@
+    \fi
+    \etocbeforetitlehook % 1.07m
+    \Etoc@storetocdepth % 1.07g
+    \let\Etoc@savedcontentsline\contentsline % moved up here 1.08
+    \let\contentsline\Etoc@etoccontentsline 
+    \ifEtoc@standard
+    \else % moved here from \Etoc@toctoc (1.08)
+        \def\Etoc@levellist@elt####1{\let####1\Etoc@lxyz}%
+        \Etoc@levellist
+        \let\booknumberline\numberline
+        \let\partnumberline\numberline
+        \let\chapternumberline\numberline
+    \fi
+    #1%
+    \ifEtoc@parskip\parskip\z@skip\fi %1.07d
+    \Etoc@aftertitlehook
+    \Etoc@toctoc
+            \ifEtoc@tocwithid\else
+              \ifEtoc@localtoc
+                \ifEtoc@notactive
+                  \Etoc@localtocfalse
+                  \global\Etoc@notactivefalse
+                  \Etoc@toctoc
+                \fi
+              \fi
+            \fi
+    \etocaftercontentshook
+    #2\@nobreakfalse % 1.07d: \@nobreakfalse moved here
+    \Etoc@resettocdepth  % 1.07g. moved here from before #2 by 1.08
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.08|: necessary if |tableof 1.4a| has been used in global mode and thus
+% was forced to modify globally |\contentsline|. The collateral effect is that
+% \etoc is now forced to reset globally |\contentsline|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\Etoc@global\global\ifx\tof@finish\@empty\else
+        \global\let\contentsline\Etoc@savedcontentsline
+    \fi\fi
+    \@gobble\etoc@ 
+}% end of \Etoc@tableofcontents definition by \etocsettocstyle
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |2015/03/09| |1.08| hacks the begin parts to update therein the
+% |\ifEtoc@isfirst| flag.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocsetstyle{\Etoc@standardfalse\etoc@setstyle}
+\long\def\etoc@setstyle#1#2#3#4#5{%
+     \long\expandafter\def
+     \csname Etoc@begin@\csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\endcsname
+                     {#2\Etoc@global\Etoc@isfirsttrue}%
+     \long\expandafter\def
+     \csname Etoc@prefix@\csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\endcsname   {#3}%
+     \long\expandafter\def
+     \csname Etoc@contents@\csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\endcsname {#4}%
+     \long\expandafter\def
+     \csname Etoc@end@\csname Etoc@#1@\endcsname\endcsname      {#5}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocfontminustwo {\normalfont \LARGE \bfseries}
+\def\etocfontminusone {\normalfont \large \bfseries}
+\def\etocfontzero     {\normalfont \large \bfseries}
+\def\etocfontone      {\normalfont \normalsize \bfseries}
+\def\etocfonttwo      {\normalfont \normalsize}
+\def\etocfontthree    {\normalfont \footnotesize}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocsepminustwo  {4ex \@plus .5ex \@minus .5ex}
+\def\etocsepminusone  {4ex \@plus .5ex \@minus .5ex}
+\def\etocsepzero      {2.5ex \@plus .4ex \@minus .4ex}
+\def\etocsepone       {1.5ex \@plus .3ex \@minus .3ex}
+\def\etocseptwo       {.5ex \@plus .1ex \@minus .1ex}
+\def\etocsepthree     {.25ex \@plus .05ex \@minus .05ex}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocbaselinespreadminustwo {1}
+\def\etocbaselinespreadminusone {1}
+\def\etocbaselinespreadzero     {1}
+\def\etocbaselinespreadone      {1}
+\def\etocbaselinespreadtwo      {1}
+\def\etocbaselinespreadthree    {.9}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocminustwoleftmargin  {1.5em plus 0.5fil}
+\def\etocminustworightmargin {1.5em plus -0.5fil}
+\def\etocminusoneleftmargin  {1em}
+\def\etocminusonerightmargin {1em}
+\def\etoctoclineleaders 
+        {\hbox{\normalfont\normalsize\hb@xt@2ex {\hss.\hss}}}
+\def\etocabbrevpagename {p.~}
+\def\etocpartname       {\partname}
+\def\etocbookname       {Book}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+% The macro \csa{etocdefaultlines} was initially called \csa{etoctoclines}. Now
+% \csa{etoctoclines} just does \csa{Etoc@standardfalse}.
+% Version |1.07e| has rewritten entirely the stuff related to penalties and
+% \csa{addvspace}, as this was not satisfactory in the earlier versions, which
+% were written at a early stage in the development of the
+% package. Actually I am not fully satisfied with these line styles.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocdefaultlines{\Etoc@standardfalse % 
+%% `book':
+\etoc@setstyle{@minustwo}
+  {\addpenalty\@M\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\addpenalty\@secpenalty}
+  {\begingroup 
+   \etocfontminustwo
+   \addvspace{\etocsepminustwo}%
+   \parindent \z@ 
+   \leftskip  \etocminustwoleftmargin
+   \rightskip \etocminustworightmargin
+   \parfillskip \@flushglue
+   \vbox{\etocifnumbered{\etocbookname\enspace\etocnumber:\quad}{}\etocname
+        \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadminustwo\baselineskip
+        \par}%
+   \addpenalty\@M\addvspace{\etocsepminusone}%
+   \endgroup}
+  {}%
+%% `part':
+\etoc@setstyle{@minusone}
+  {\addpenalty\@M\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\addpenalty\@secpenalty}
+  {\begingroup 
+   \etocfontminusone
+   \addvspace{\etocsepminusone}%
+   \parindent \z@ 
+   \leftskip  \etocminusoneleftmargin
+   \rightskip \etocminusonerightmargin
+   \parfillskip \@flushglue
+   \vbox{\etocifnumbered{\etocpartname\enspace\etocnumber.\quad}{}\etocname
+         \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadminusone\baselineskip
+         \par}%
+   \addpenalty\@M\addvspace{\etocsepzero}%
+   \endgroup}
+  {}%
+%% `chapter':
+\etoc@setstyle{@zero}
+  {\addpenalty\@M\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\addpenalty\@itempenalty}
+  {\begingroup 
+   \etocfontzero
+   \addvspace{\etocsepzero}%
+   \parindent \z@ \parfillskip \@flushglue 
+   \vbox{\etocifnumbered{\etocnumber.\enspace}{}\etocname
+         \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadzero\baselineskip
+         \par}%
+   \endgroup}
+  {\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}\addvspace{\etocsepminusone}}%
+%% `section':
+\etoc@setstyle{@one}
+  {\addpenalty\@M\etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\addpenalty\@itempenalty}
+  {\begingroup
+   \etocfontone
+   \addvspace{\etocsepone}%
+   \parindent \z@ \parfillskip \z@ 
+   \setbox\z@\vbox{\parfillskip\@flushglue
+                   \etocname\par
+                   \setbox\tw@\lastbox
+                   \global\setbox\@ne\hbox{\unhbox\tw@\ }}%
+   \dimen\z@=\wd\@ne
+   \setbox\z@=\etoctoclineleaders
+   \advance\dimen\z@\wd\z@
+   \etocifnumbered
+     {\setbox\tw@\hbox{\etocnumber, \etocabbrevpagename\etocpage}}
+     {\setbox\tw@\hbox{\etocabbrevpagename\etocpage}}%
+   \advance\dimen\z@\wd\tw@
+   \ifdim\dimen\z@ < \linewidth
+       \vbox{\etocname~%
+             \leaders\box\z@\hfil\box\tw@
+             \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadone\baselineskip
+             \par}
+   \else
+       \vbox{\etocname~%
+             \leaders\copy\z@\hfil\break 
+             \hbox{}\leaders\box\z@\hfil\box\tw@
+             \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadone\baselineskip
+             \par}
+   \fi
+   \endgroup}
+  {\addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace{\etocsepzero}}%
+%% `subsection':
+\etoc@setstyle{@two}
+  {\addpenalty\@medpenalty\etocskipfirstprefix} 
+  {\addpenalty\@itempenalty}
+  {\begingroup
+   \etocfonttwo
+   \addvspace{\etocseptwo}%
+   \parindent \z@ \parfillskip \z@
+   \setbox\z@\vbox{\parfillskip\@flushglue
+                   \etocname\par\setbox\tw@\lastbox
+                   \global\setbox\@ne\hbox{\unhbox\tw@}}%
+   \dimen\z@=\wd\@ne
+   \setbox\z@=\etoctoclineleaders
+   \advance\dimen\z@\wd\z@
+   \etocifnumbered
+     {\setbox\tw@\hbox{\etocnumber, \etocabbrevpagename\etocpage}}
+     {\setbox\tw@\hbox{\etocabbrevpagename\etocpage}}%
+   \advance\dimen\z@\wd\tw@
+   \ifdim\dimen\z@ < \linewidth
+       \vbox{\etocname~%
+             \leaders\box\z@\hfil\box\tw@
+             \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadtwo\baselineskip
+             \par}
+   \else
+       \vbox{\etocname~%
+             \leaders\copy\z@\hfil\break 
+             \hbox{}\leaders\box\z@\hfil\box\tw@
+             \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadtwo\baselineskip
+             \par}
+   \fi
+   \endgroup}
+  {\addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace{\etocsepone}}%
+%% `subsubsection':
+\etoc@setstyle{@three}
+  {\addpenalty\@M
+   \etocfontthree
+   \vspace{\etocsepthree}%
+   \noindent
+   \etocskipfirstprefix}
+  {\allowbreak\,--\,}
+  {\etocname}
+  {.\hfil
+    \begingroup
+     \baselineskip\etocbaselinespreadthree\baselineskip
+     \par
+    \endgroup
+   \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\etoc@setstyle{@four}{}{}{}{}%
+\etoc@setstyle{@five}{}{}{}{}%
+} % end of \etocdefaultlines!
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The |\etocinnertopsep| default value is too big as well as |\etocbelowtocskip|
+% and |\etocabovetocskip|, I guess, but if I am remember correctly I chose them
+% to mimick the standard TOC spacings in |article| class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocabovetocskip{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex} 
+\def\etocbelowtocskip{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
+\def\etoccolumnsep{2em}
+\def\etocmulticolsep{0ex}
+\def\etocmulticolpretolerance{-1}
+\def\etocmulticoltolerance{200}
+\def\etocdefaultnbcol{2}
+\def\etocinnertopsep{2ex}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07i| adds a |\nobreak| before the |\etocinnertopsep| and a test of vertical
+% mode to see if truly adding a |\par| is a reasonable idea, in the
+% case of single-column mode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\etocmulticolstyle[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+\etocsettocstyle
+   {\let\etocoldpar\par
+    \addvspace{\etocabovetocskip}%
+    \ifnum #1>\@ne\let\Etoc@next\@firstoftwo
+         \else \let\Etoc@next\@secondoftwo\fi
+    \Etoc@next{%
+    \multicolpretolerance\etocmulticolpretolerance
+    \multicoltolerance\etocmulticoltolerance
+    \setlength{\columnsep}{\etoccolumnsep}%
+    \setlength{\multicolsep}{\etocmulticolsep}%
+    \begin{multicols}{#1}[#2\etocoldpar\addvspace{\etocinnertopsep}]}
+    {#2\ifvmode\else\begingroup\interlinepenalty\@M\parskip\z@skip
+                    \@@par\endgroup
+       \fi
+       \nobreak\addvspace{\etocinnertopsep}%
+       \pretolerance\etocmulticolpretolerance
+       \tolerance\etocmulticoltolerance}}
+   {\ifnum #1>\@ne\let\Etoc@next\@firstofone
+         \else \let\Etoc@next\@gobble\fi
+    \Etoc@next{\end{multicols}}%
+    \addvspace{\etocbelowtocskip}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocinnerbottomsep{3.5ex}
+\def\etocinnerleftsep{2em}
+\def\etocinnerrightsep{2em}
+\def\etoctoprule{\hrule}
+\def\etocleftrule{\vrule}
+\def\etocrightrule{\vrule}
+\def\etocbottomrule{\hrule}
+\def\etoctoprulecolorcmd{\relax}
+\def\etocbottomrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+\def\etocleftrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+\def\etocrightrulecolorcmd{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07i| moves the |\nobreak| to before the |\vskip\etocinnertopsep|
+% (especially important for the single column case).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etoc@ruledheading #1{%
+   \hb@xt@\linewidth{\color@begingroup
+          \hss #1\hss\hskip-\linewidth
+          \etoctoprulecolorcmd\leaders\etoctoprule\hss
+          \phantom{#1}%
+          \leaders\etoctoprule\hss\color@endgroup}%
+          \nointerlineskip\nobreak\vskip\etocinnertopsep}
+\newcommand*\etocruledstyle[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+\etocsettocstyle
+   {\addvspace{\etocabovetocskip}%
+    \ifnum #1>\@ne\let\Etoc@next\@firstoftwo
+         \else \let\Etoc@next\@secondoftwo\fi
+    \Etoc@next
+       {\multicolpretolerance\etocmulticolpretolerance
+        \multicoltolerance\etocmulticoltolerance
+        \setlength{\columnsep}{\etoccolumnsep}%
+        \setlength{\multicolsep}{\etocmulticolsep}%
+        \begin{multicols}{#1}[\etoc@ruledheading{#2}]}
+       {\etoc@ruledheading{#2}%
+         \pretolerance\etocmulticolpretolerance
+         \tolerance\etocmulticoltolerance}} 
+   {\ifnum #1>\@ne\let\Etoc@next\@firstofone
+         \else \let\Etoc@next\@gobble\fi
+    \Etoc@next{\end{multicols}}%
+    \addvspace{\etocbelowtocskip}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07k| defines |\Etoc@relax| and |\etocbkgcolorcmd| as |\long|: the user
+% manual says to use |\renewcommand\etocbkgcolorcmd|, and an |\ifx| test is used
+% in the framed style. It was thus a bug to have non-long definitions before. Or
+% I could have said in the user manual to use |\renewcommand*|, or in
+% |\etocframedstyle| I should test for the two, or I should pause to try to
+% remember about this code and think about it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocframedmphook{\relax}
+\long\def\etocbkgcolorcmd{\relax}
+\long\def\Etoc@relax{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\etoc@framed@titlebox
+\newbox\etoc@framed@contentsbox
+\newcommand*\etocframedstyle[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+\etocsettocstyle{%
+    \addvspace{\etocabovetocskip}%
+    \sbox\z@{#2}%
+    \dimen\z@\dp\z@
+        \ifdim\wd\z@<\linewidth \dp\z@\z@ \else \dimen\z@\z@ \fi
+    \setbox\etoc@framed@titlebox=\hb@xt@\linewidth{\color@begingroup
+        \hss 
+        \ifx\etocbkgcolorcmd\Etoc@relax\else 
+            \sbox\tw@{\color{white}%
+            \vrule\@width\wd\z@\@height\ht\z@\@depth\dimen\z@}%
+            \ifdim\wd\z@<\linewidth \dp\tw@\z@\fi
+            \box\tw@
+            \hskip-\wd\z@
+        \fi
+        \copy\z@
+        \hss
+        \hskip-\linewidth
+        \etoctoprulecolorcmd\leaders\etoctoprule\hss%
+        \hskip\wd\z@
+        \etoctoprulecolorcmd\leaders\etoctoprule\hss\color@endgroup}%
+    \setbox\z@\hbox{\etocleftrule\etocrightrule}%
+    \dimen\tw@\linewidth\advance\dimen\tw@-\wd\z@
+        \advance\dimen\tw@-\etocinnerleftsep
+        \advance\dimen\tw@-\etocinnerrightsep
+    \setbox\etoc@framed@contentsbox=\vbox\bgroup
+        \hsize\dimen\tw@
+        \kern\dimen\z@
+        \vskip\etocinnertopsep
+        \hbox\bgroup
+        \begin{minipage}{\hsize}%
+        \etocframedmphook
+    \ifnum #1>\@ne\let\Etoc@next\@firstoftwo
+    \else \let\Etoc@next\@secondoftwo\fi
+        \Etoc@next
+        {\multicolpretolerance\etocmulticolpretolerance
+        \multicoltolerance\etocmulticoltolerance
+        \setlength{\columnsep}{\etoccolumnsep}%
+        \setlength{\multicolsep}{\etocmulticolsep}%
+        \begin{multicols}{#1}}  
+        {\pretolerance\etocmulticolpretolerance
+         \tolerance\etocmulticoltolerance}}
+     {\ifnum #1>\@ne\let\Etoc@next\@firstofone
+         \else \let\Etoc@next\@gobble\fi
+    \Etoc@next{\end{multicols}\unskip}%
+    \end{minipage}%
+    \egroup
+    \vskip\etocinnerbottomsep
+    \egroup
+    \vbox{\hsize\linewidth
+        \ifx\etocbkgcolorcmd\Etoc@relax\else
+            \kern\ht\etoc@framed@titlebox
+            \kern\dp\etoc@framed@titlebox
+            \hb@xt@\linewidth{\color@begingroup
+            \etocleftrulecolorcmd\etocleftrule
+            \etocbkgcolorcmd
+            \leaders\vrule 
+                   \@height\ht\etoc@framed@contentsbox 
+                   \@depth\dp\etoc@framed@contentsbox 
+            \hss
+            \etocrightrulecolorcmd\etocrightrule
+            \color@endgroup}\nointerlineskip
+            \vskip-\dp\etoc@framed@contentsbox
+            \vskip-\ht\etoc@framed@contentsbox
+            \vskip-\dp\etoc@framed@titlebox
+            \vskip-\ht\etoc@framed@titlebox
+        \fi
+    \box\etoc@framed@titlebox\nointerlineskip
+    \hb@xt@\linewidth{\color@begingroup
+    {\etocleftrulecolorcmd\etocleftrule}%
+    \hss\box\etoc@framed@contentsbox\hss
+    \etocrightrulecolorcmd\etocrightrule\color@endgroup}
+    \nointerlineskip
+    \vskip\ht\etoc@framed@contentsbox
+    \vskip\dp\etoc@framed@contentsbox
+    \hb@xt@\linewidth{\color@begingroup\etocbottomrulecolorcmd
+          \leaders\etocbottomrule\hss\color@endgroup}}
+    \addvspace{\etocbelowtocskip}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\etoc@multicoltoc[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocmulticolstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \tableofcontents}
+\newcommand\etoc@multicoltoci[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocmulticolstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \tableofcontents*}
+\newcommand\etoc@local@multicoltoc[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocmulticolstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \localtableofcontents}
+\newcommand\etoc@local@multicoltoci[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocmulticolstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \localtableofcontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\etoc@ruledtoc[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocruledstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \tableofcontents}
+\newcommand*\etoc@ruledtoci[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocruledstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \tableofcontents*}
+\newcommand*\etoc@local@ruledtoc[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocruledstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \localtableofcontents}
+\newcommand*\etoc@local@ruledtoci[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocruledstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \localtableofcontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\etoc@framedtoc[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocframedstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \tableofcontents}
+\newcommand*\etoc@framedtoci[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocframedstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \tableofcontents*}
+\newcommand*\etoc@local@framedtoc[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocframedstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \localtableofcontents}
+\newcommand*\etoc@local@framedtoci[2][\etocdefaultnbcol]{%
+    \etocframedstyle[#1]{#2}%
+    \localtableofcontents*}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocmulticol{\begingroup
+    \Etoc@mustclosegrouptrue
+    \@ifstar
+    {\etoc@multicoltoci}
+    {\etoc@multicoltoc}}
+\def\etocruled{\begingroup
+    \Etoc@mustclosegrouptrue
+    \@ifstar
+    {\etoc@ruledtoci}
+    {\etoc@ruledtoc}}
+\def\etocframed{\begingroup
+    \Etoc@mustclosegrouptrue
+    \@ifstar
+    {\etoc@framedtoci}
+    {\etoc@framedtoc}}
+\def\etoclocalmulticol{\begingroup
+    \Etoc@mustclosegrouptrue
+    \@ifstar
+    {\etoc@local@multicoltoci}
+    {\etoc@local@multicoltoc}}
+\def\etoclocalruled{\begingroup
+    \Etoc@mustclosegrouptrue
+    \@ifstar
+    {\etoc@local@ruledtoci}
+    {\etoc@local@ruledtoc}}
+\def\etoclocalframed{\begingroup
+    \Etoc@mustclosegrouptrue
+    \@ifstar
+    {\etoc@local@framedtoci}
+    {\etoc@local@framedtoc}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocarticlestyle{%
+    \etocsettocstyle
+    {\section *{\contentsname 
+                \@mkboth {\MakeUppercase \contentsname}
+                         {\MakeUppercase \contentsname}}}
+    {}}
+\def\etocarticlestylenomarks{%
+    \etocsettocstyle
+    {\section *{\contentsname}}
+    {}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocbookstyle{%
+    \etocsettocstyle
+    {\if@twocolumn \@restonecoltrue \onecolumn \else \@restonecolfalse \fi 
+     \chapter *{\contentsname 
+                \@mkboth {\MakeUppercase \contentsname}
+                         {\MakeUppercase \contentsname}}}
+    {\if@restonecol \twocolumn \fi}}
+\def\etocbookstylenomarks{%
+    \etocsettocstyle
+    {\if@twocolumn \@restonecoltrue \onecolumn \else \@restonecolfalse \fi 
+     \chapter *{\contentsname}}
+    {\if@restonecol \twocolumn \fi}}
+\let\etocreportstyle\etocbookstyle
+\let\etocreportstylenomarks\etocbookstylenomarks
+\def\etocmemoirtoctotocfmt #1#2{%
+    \def\Etoc@addsuitablecontentsline{\addcontentsline {toc}{#1}{#2}}%
+    \renewcommand*\etocaftertitlehook{%
+      \ifmem@em@starred@listof
+      \else\phantomsection\aftergroup\Etoc@addsuitablecontentsline\fi}}
+\def\etocmemoirstyle{%
+    \etocsettocstyle
+        {\ensureonecol \par \begingroup \@nameuse {@tocmaketitle}
+         \Etoc@aftertitlehook\let\Etoc@aftertitlehook\relax
+         \parskip \cftparskip \@nameuse {cfttocbeforelisthook}}
+        {\@nameuse {cfttocafterlisthook}\endgroup\restorefromonecol}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocscrartclstyle{%
+    \etocsettocstyle
+        {\let\if@dynlist\if@tocleft
+         \def\@currext{toc}% added 1.07m 2015/01/23
+         \iftocfeature {toc}{onecolumn}
+             {\iftocfeature {toc}{leveldown}
+              {}
+              {\if@twocolumn \aftergroup \twocolumn \onecolumn \fi }}
+             {}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07k|: next line to do as within current |scrartcl 2013/12/19 v3.12| 
+% KOMA-Script article class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+         \iftocfeature {toc}{numberline}{\def \nonumberline {\numberline {}}}{}%
+         \tocbasic@listhead {\listoftocname}%
+         \begingroup \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter 
+         \endgroup \expandafter 
+         \ifx 
+             \csname microtypesetup\endcsname \relax 
+         \else 
+             \iftocfeature {toc}{noprotrusion}{}
+                 {\microtypesetup {protrusion=false}%
+                  \PackageInfo {tocbasic}%
+                  {character protrusion at toc deactivated}}%
+         \fi
+         \setlength {\parskip }{\z@ }%
+         \setlength {\parindent }{\z@ }%
+         \setlength {\parfillskip }{\z@ \@plus 1fil}% 
+         \csname tocbasic@@before@hook\endcsname
+         \csname tb@toc@before@hook\endcsname}
+        {\csname tb@toc@after@hook\endcsname 
+         \csname tocbasic@@after@hook\endcsname}}
+\let\etocscrbookstyle\etocscrartclstyle
+\let\etocscrreprtstyle\etocscrartclstyle
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etocarticlestyle}
+\newcommand*\etocmarkboth[1]{%
+    \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase{#1}}{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}
+\newcommand*\etocmarkbothnouc[1]{\@mkboth{#1}{#1}}
+\newcommand\etoctocstyle[3][section]{\etocmulticolstyle[#2]%
+    {\csname #1\endcsname *{#3}}}
+\newcommand\etoctocstylewithmarks[4][section]{\etocmulticolstyle[#2]%
+    {\csname #1\endcsname *{#3\etocmarkboth{#4}}}}
+\newcommand\etoctocstylewithmarksnouc[4][section]{\etocmulticolstyle[#2]%
+    {\csname #1\endcsname *{#3\etocmarkbothnouc{#4}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@redefetocstyle#1{%
+    \renewcommand\etoctocstylewithmarks[4][#1]
+    {\etocmulticolstyle[##2]%
+          {\csname ##1\endcsname *{##3\etocmarkboth{##4}}}}
+    \renewcommand\etoctocstylewithmarksnouc[4][#1]
+    {\etocmulticolstyle[##2]%
+          {\csname ##1\endcsname *{##3\etocmarkbothnouc{##4}}}}
+    \renewcommand\etoctocstyle[3][#1]{%
+     \etocmulticolstyle[##2]{\csname ##1\endcsname *{##3}}}}
+\@ifclassloaded{scrartcl}
+    {\renewcommand*\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etocscrartclstyle}}{}
+\@ifclassloaded{book}
+    {\renewcommand*\etocfontone{\normalfont\normalsize}
+     \renewcommand*\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etocbookstyle}
+     \Etoc@redefetocstyle{chapter}}{}
+\@ifclassloaded{report}
+    {\renewcommand*\etocfontone{\normalfont\normalsize}
+     \renewcommand*\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etocreportstyle}
+     \Etoc@redefetocstyle{chapter}}{}
+\@ifclassloaded{scrbook}
+    {\renewcommand*\etocfontone{\normalfont\normalsize}
+     \renewcommand*\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etocscrbookstyle}
+     \Etoc@redefetocstyle{chapter}}{}
+\@ifclassloaded{scrreprt}
+    {\renewcommand*\etocfontone{\normalfont\normalsize}
+     \renewcommand*\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etocscrreprtstyle}
+     \Etoc@redefetocstyle{chapter}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%|1.07k (2014/03/06)| adds the |appendix| to the list of known levels if class
+%|memoir| is detected.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{memoir}
+    {\etocsetlevel{appendix}{0}%
+     \renewcommand*\etocfontone{\normalfont\normalsize}
+     \etocmemoirtoctotocfmt{chapter}{\contentsname}%
+     \renewcommand*\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etocmemoirstyle}
+     \Etoc@redefetocstyle{chapter}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%|1.07k (2014/03/06)| adds the compatibility with the |tocloft| package; in
+% compatibility mode etoc will obey the |tocloft| customisation for the division
+% headings as well as for the toc title.
+%
+%|1.07l (2014/04/02)| fixes the bug from the |tocloft| compatibility layer which
+%was |memoir| incompatible: |memoir| has its version of |tocloft| which doesn't
+%have the |\if@cftnctoc| boolean.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etoctocloftstyle {%
+    \etocsettocstyle 
+    {\@cfttocstart\par\begingroup
+      \parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip \@cftmaketoctitle
+      \if@cfttocbibind\@cftdobibtoc\fi }%
+    {\endgroup\@cfttocfinish }%
+}
+\@ifclassloaded{memoir}{}
+{\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}
+    {\if@cftnctoc\else
+     \renewcommand*\etocstandarddisplaystyle{\etoctocloftstyle}
+     \AtBeginDocument{\let\tableofcontents\etoctableofcontents}
+     \fi }
+    {\AtBeginDocument
+      {\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}
+       {\if@cftnctoc\else
+         \PackageWarning {etoc}
+         {Package `tocloft' was loaded after `etoc'!^^J% 
+**** to prevent it from overwriting \protect\tableofcontents, it will be tricked^^J%
+**** into believing to have been loaded with option `titles'. For better^^J%
+**** compatibility, please load `tocloft' before `etoc'}%
+        \AtEndDocument{\PackageWarning{etoc}
+                       {Please load `tocloft' /before/ `etoc'!}}\fi
+        \@cftnctoctrue }%
+       {}%
+      }%
+     }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% placeholder for comments
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@addtocontents #1#2%
+    {\ifEtoc@hyperref
+       \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+                {#1}{#2}%
+                {\thepage }{\@currentHref }}%
+     \else
+       \addtocontents {toc}{\protect\contentsline 
+          {#1}{#2}{\thepage }}%
+     \fi}
+\def\Etoc@addcontentsline@ #1#2#3%
+    {\@namedef{toclevel@#1}{#3}%
+     \addcontentsline {toc}{#1}{#2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\etoctoccontentsline}
+    {\@ifstar{\Etoc@addcontentsline@}{\Etoc@addtocontents}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% All the following added for version |1.07g [2013/10/13]|. Motivated by
+% a demand about  |tovsec2|. But it is impossible to make |tocvsec2|
+% compatible, if not re-doing all `toc' macros in |tocvsec2| 
+% (|v1.3, 2011/08/07|). I do not retain the stack idea, which does not convince
+% me as useful. The empty line in the |.toc| file is put there by
+% |tocvsec2| (see its code line 143). 
+% 
+% I take this opportunity to add to the start of the toc file 
+% |\let\etoc@startlocaltoc\@gobble| in case |etoc| is not detected, I should
+% possibly have done that long ago (like I did in |tableof|).
+%
+% In |1.07h| I decide that I should not have used |\Etoc@| but |\etoc@| for
+% |\Etoc@settocdepth|. So I now use lowercase and add a temporary line for
+% transition in the very improbable situation that someone actually did already
+% use the just released |1.07g|.
+%
+% In |1.07i| the deactivation of |\etoc@settocdepth| done at the start
+% of the |.toc| file (for the case this file is used after having
+% removed |etoc| from the document, or imported in another document) is
+% done via letting it to |\@gobble| rather than |\count@| (which would
+% not be ok, as what follows would be undefined too). The reason for the
+% |\count@| also used originally in |\etocignoretoctocdepth| is that
+% when I first worked on |1.07g| I possibly had more than one token
+% after |\etoc@settocdepth|, but I changed that later.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@storetocdepth {\global\c@etoc@tocdepth\c@tocdepth }
+\def\Etoc@resettocdepth {\global\c@tocdepth\c@etoc@tocdepth }
+\def\etocobeytoctocdepth {\def\etoc@settocdepth 
+        {\afterassignment\Etoc@@nottoodeep \global\c@tocdepth}}
+\def\Etoc@@nottoodeep {\ifnum\c@tocdepth>\c@etoc@tocdepth
+                          \global\c@tocdepth\c@etoc@tocdepth\fi }
+\def\etocignoretoctocdepth {\let\etoc@settocdepth\@gobble } 
+\def\etocsettocdepth   {\futurelet\Etoc@nexttoken\Etoc@set@tocdepth }
+\def\Etoc@set@tocdepth {\ifx\Etoc@nexttoken\bgroup
+                            \expandafter\Etoc@set@tocdepth@
+                       \else\expandafter\Etoc@set@toctocdepth
+                       \fi }
+\def\Etoc@set@tocdepth@ #1{\@ifundefined {Etoc@#1@@}
+      {\PackageWarning{etoc}
+          {Unknown sectioning unit #1, \protect\etocsettocdepth\space ignored}}
+      {\global\c@tocdepth\csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname}%
+}
+\def\Etoc@set@toctocdepth  #1#{\Etoc@set@toctocdepth@ }
+\def\Etoc@set@toctocdepth@ #1{%
+  \@ifundefined{Etoc@#1@@}%
+   {\PackageWarning{etoc}
+        {Unknown sectioning depth #1, \protect\etocsettocdepth.toc ignored}}%
+   {\addtocontents {toc}      
+   {\protect\etoc@settocdepth\expandafter\protect\csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname}}% 
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07h| adds the depth tags, and an even more general mechanism could be added
+% at some point: we could insert `action' tags and have the user map them to
+% arbitrary commands. For the time being we just provide 
+% |\etocdepthtag.toc {name}| and |\etocsettagdepth {tag_name}{level}| where
+% level is numeric or 
+% alphabetical. The numeric
+% level |-3| is now again not accepted by |\etocsetlevel|, it can be used with
+% |\etocsettagdepth| (which accepts equivalently |none|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocdepthtag   #1#{\Etoc@depthtag } % \etocdepthtag.toc {name}
+\def\Etoc@depthtag  #1{\addtocontents {toc}{\protect\etoc@depthtag {#1}}}
+\def\etocignoredepthtags {\let\etoc@depthtag \@gobble }
+\def\etocobeydepthtags   {\let\etoc@depthtag \Etoc@depthtag@ }
+\def\Etoc@depthtag@ #1{\@ifundefined{Etoc@depthof@#1}%
+       {}% ignore in silence if tag has no associated depth
+       {\afterassignment\Etoc@@nottoodeep
+                 \global\c@tocdepth\csname Etoc@depthof@#1\endcsname}%
+}
+\def\etocsettagdepth #1#2{\@ifundefined{Etoc@#2@@}%
+       {\PackageWarning{etoc}
+         {Unknown sectioning depth #2, \protect\etocsettagdepth\space ignored}}%
+       {\@namedef{Etoc@depthof@#1}{\@nameuse{Etoc@#2@@}}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We must cancel all |tocvsec2| toc-related actions. But a check must be done
+% for the memoir class, as its |tocvsec2| emulation does not have the
+% incompatible things etoc needs to revert. This extra check added with etoc
+% |1.07l|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Etoc@tocvsec@err #1{\PackageError {etoc}
+        {the command \protect#1\space is incompatible with etoc} 
+        {use \protect\etocsettocdepth.toc as replacement (check the manual)}%
+}%
+\AtBeginDocument {%
+   \@ifclassloaded{memoir}
+    {\PackageWarning{etoc}{You may consider using \protect\etocsettocdepth.toc
+      as a drop-in^^J
+      replacement to the memoir own \protect\settocdepth\space
+      if you wish to exploit etoc to its^^J 
+      fullest. Similarly consider using
+     \protect\etocsettocdepth\space and 
+     \protect\etocsetnexttocdepth^^J rather 
+     than memoir's \protect\maxtocdepth.}}
+    {\@ifpackageloaded {tocvsec2}
+     {\def\maxtocdepth  #1{\Etoc@tocvsec@err \maxtocdepth   }%
+      \def\settocdepth  #1{\Etoc@tocvsec@err \settocdepth   }%
+      \def\resettocdepth  {\@ifstar {\Etoc@tocvsec@err \resettocdepth }%
+                                    {\Etoc@tocvsec@err \resettocdepth }%
+                          }%
+      \def\save@tocdepth #1#2#3{}%    % if etoc is added to file previously
+      \let\reset@tocdepth\relax       % using tocvsec2
+      \let\remax@tocdepth\relax   
+      \let\tableofcontents\etoctableofcontents
+      \PackageWarning {etoc}
+      {package tocvsec2 detected and its modification of^^J
+       \protect\tableofcontents\space reverted. Use
+       \protect\etocsettocdepth.toc as a replacement^^J 
+       for the tocvsec2 toc-related commands}}{}%
+   }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07g|
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\invisibletableofcontents {\etocsetnexttocdepth {-3}\tableofcontents }%
+\def\invisiblelocaltableofcontents 
+                         {\etocsetnexttocdepth {-3}\localtableofcontents }%
+\def\etocsetnexttocdepth #1{%
+    \@ifundefined{Etoc@#1@@}
+     {\PackageWarning{etoc}
+       {Unknown sectioning unit #1, \protect\etocsetnextocdepth\space ignored}}
+     {\edef\Etoc@aftertochook {\global\c@tocdepth\the\c@tocdepth\space
+                              \let\noexpand\Etoc@aftertochook\noexpand\@empty }%
+       \global\c@tocdepth\csname Etoc@#1@@\endcsname}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% |1.07h|. In order for the |.toc| file to be usable without error even
+% without etoc. In |1.07i| use of |\@gobble| for |\etoc@settocdepth|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\addtocontents {toc}{\protect\@ifundefined{etoctocstyle}%
+           {\let\protect\etoc@startlocaltoc\protect\@gobble 
+            \let\protect\etoc@settocdepth\protect\@gobble
+            \let\protect\etoc@depthtag\protect\@gobble }{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Initializations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\etocstandardlines {\Etoc@standardtrue}
+\def\etoctoclines      {\Etoc@standardfalse}
+\etocdefaultlines
+\etocstandardlines 
+\etocstandarddisplaystyle
+\etocobeytoctocdepth 
+\etocobeydepthtags
+\let\Etoc@aftertochook\@empty % private for \etocsetnexttocdepth
+\let\etocaftertochook \@empty % public for end user.
+\let\etocbeforetitlehook \@empty % new with 1.07m
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \MakePercentComment
+\CharacterTable
+ {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+  Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+  Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+  Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+  Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+  Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+  Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+  Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+  Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+  Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+  Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+  Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+  Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+  Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+
+\CheckSum{3061}
+
+\csname check@checksum\endcsname
+\Finale
+%%
+%% End of file `etoc.dtx'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/etoc/etoc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/etoc/etoc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7e292525a27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/etoc/etoc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+%%
+%% Package: etoc
+%% Version: 1.08 (2015/03/10)
+%% License: LPPL 1.3c or later (see etoc.dtx)
+%% Copyright (C) 2012-2015 Jean-Francois Burnol <jfbu at free dot fr>
+%% Copyright (C) 2014-2015 Christine Roemer <Christine_Roemer at t-online dot de>
+%%    and collaborators for the translation into German of the documentation
+%%
+\def\etocpkgdate        {2015/03/10}
+\def\etocdocdate        {2015/03/10}
+\def\etocpkgversion     {v1.08}
+\def\etocpkgdescription {Completely customisable TOCs (jfB)}
+%% Run tex on this file to extract from etoc.dtx:
+%%        etoc.sty, etoc.tex, etoc-DE.tex and README.md
+%%
+%% At least three ways to produce etoc.pdf (method (3) is preferred):
+%%  (1) latex etoc.dtx (three times), then dvips, then ps2pdf
+%%  (2) pdflatex etoc.dtx (three times)
+%%  (3) latex etoc.tex (three times), then dvipdfmx
+%%
+%% Method (3) produces the smallest pdf files.
+%% Options can be set in etoc.tex (and etoc-DE.tex):
+%%  - scrdoc class options (paper size, font size, ...)
+%%  - with or without source code,
+%%  - with dvipdfmx or with latex/pdflatex.
+%%
+%% To produce the German documentation etoc-DE.pdf run tex on etoc.ins
+%% or etoc.dtx to produce etoc-DE.tex, then compile etoc-DE.tex with
+%% latex (thrice) then dvipdmx, or edit the suitable toggle in
+%% etoc-DE.tex to allow compilation to proceed with pdflatex.
+%%
+%% Um etoc-DE.pdf zu erzeugen ist latex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen
+%% zu lassen, dann dvipdfmx mit etoc-DE.dvi. Im Falle von Problemen
+%% mit dvipdfmx ist \Withdvidpdfmx auf 0 in etoc-DE.tex zu setzen,
+%% dann ist pdflatex dreimal mit etoc-DE.tex laufen zu lassen.
+%%
+%% Installation:
+%%
+%%   etoc.sty    -> TDS:tex/latex/etoc/etoc.sty
+%%   etoc.dtx    -> TDS:source/latex/etoc/etoc.dtx
+%%   etoc.pdf    -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/etoc.pdf
+%%   etoc-DE.pdf -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/etoc-DE.pdf
+%%   README.md   -> TDS:doc/latex/etoc/README.md
+%%
+\input docstrip.tex
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\def\etocpkgpreamble{\defaultpreamble^^J\MetaPrefix^^J%
+\string\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}^^J%
+\string\ProvidesPackage{etoc}^^J%
+\space[\etocpkgdate\space\etocpkgversion\space\etocpkgdescription]}%
+\generate{\nopreamble\nopostamble
+\file{README.md}{\from{etoc.dtx}{readme}}%
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble
+\file{etoc.tex}{\from{etoc.dtx}{tex}}%
+\file{etoc-DE.tex}{\from{etoc.dtx}{DEtex}}%
+\usepreamble\etocpkgpreamble
+\file{etoc.sty}{\from{etoc.dtx}{package}}}%
+\catcode32=13\relax% active space
+\let =\space%
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* file into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{*     etoc.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run latex thrice on file etoc.tex}
+\Msg{* (or etoc-DE.tex) and then run dvipdfmx on file etoc.dvi, resp.}
+\Msg{* etoc-DE.dvi}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\endbatchfile
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `etoc.ins'.